THIRD EDITION, REVISED AND CORRECTED. 
A COMPLETE MANUAL 
OF 
plectro -therapeutics, 
AND A BRIEF 
TREATISE ON ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 
BY 
ELIZABETH J.j;RENCH. 
V Vw TllA T ED- 
PHILADELPHIA 
J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY. 
188 6. Copyright, 1886, by Elizabeth J. French. DEDICATED 
TO 
HUMANITY AND SCIENCE. 
BY 
THE AUTHOR. PREFACE TO REVISED EDITION. 
By GEO. W. SNYDER, M.D. 
Convinced of the truth, and therefore assured of 
the ultimate prevalence of the principles advocated 
and maintained, and for many years practised with 
singular success, by the author of " Electro-Thera- 
peutics," the writer, in common with many others 
who have had the opportunity and have taken the 
time to thoroughly acquaint themselves under the 
tuition of the author with her methods of applying 
electricity to the cure of disease, and have marked 
the result, has urged upon her the importance of 
revising the "New Manual," and giving to her stu- 
dents and to the practitioners of her system the 
benefit of her extensive experience acquired since 
the publication of that volume. Only those who 
know the extent and magnitude of her daily pro- 
fessional work can appreciate the mental and physi- 
cal tax imposed in the fulfilment of this task. 
While she has conscientiously endeavored to make 
this little volume what its title claims, "A Complete 
Manual of Electro-Therapeutics," the author does not 
claim for it infallibility. But whatever other defects 
the book may have, that it is brief is not regarded as 
one of them. It is a book of facts rather than of law, 
5 6 
PREFACE TO REVISED EDITION. 
and these facts are stated in the fewest words com- 
patible with clearness, and for the guidance of those 
who know the value of the fundamental principles 
on which they are based. 
The anxiety originally felt by the author in giving 
to the world the "New Manual" and putting herself 
upon the record as the discoverer of a new and 
hitherto untried path in pathology and of new meth- 
ods in treating the " thousand ills that flesh is heir 
to," is not repeated in issuing the " Revised Edition." 
Iler faith and her work have been proven in the 
experience of thousands all over our fair land,-from 
Maine to Florida, from the fiery gate of the Atlantic 
to the Golden Gate of the Pacific. 
And it is experience after all, rather than theory, 
that must determine the value of any therapeutic 
agent. The most scientific knowledge possible of a 
disease can give us no hint of the effect of any remedy 
until experience has demonstrated its value. Theory, 
that unaided by experience, has given rise to all 
manner of absurdities in medical practice; caused 
Cato to recommend cabbage as a sovereign remedy in 
most diseases; and in times past led all the schools 
to denounce any remedy that neither "sweated, 
puked, nor purged." 
What we most need is positivism in the treatment 
of disease,-more facts, less theory, and exact clini- 
cal observations. The vocation of the true physician 
is to make them scientific. 
The author of this manual possesses the merit of 
originality in cardinal ideas, distinctive methods, 
and a system based upon experience; reasoning PREFACE TO REVISED EDITION. 
7 
from which she has reduced her theories to a science. 
That experience covers a period of nearly forty 
years,-in a vast number of cases, in hospital and 
private practice, in all climates, and under the most 
varied conditions,-and enables her to speak " as 
one having authority." 
The measure of success to be attained by others 
in applying the principles herein laid down to the 
cure of disease will depend mainly upon the atten- 
tion given to the details of treatment. The careless 
and indifferent will be disappointed; but the faith- 
ful and conscientious practitioner, " whatsoever he 
doeth, shall prosper." 
G. W. S. 
Chicago, III., October, 1885. CONTENTS. 
Preface 5-7 
PART I. 
CHAPTER I. 
Human Anatomy and Physiology, 17; Elements of Human Organ- 
ism, 18; Respiratory Apparatus, 21; Circulation of the Blood, 
23; Valves of the Heart, 25; Systemic Circulation, 27; Digestive 
System, 28; Salivary Glands, 29; the Stomach, 30; Alimentary 
Canal, 31; the Liver, 32; Lacteal and Thoracic Ducts, 33. 
CHAPTER II. 
The Brain and Nervous System, 34; Life Principle, 35; Gray's Nerve- 
Force, 36; Human Battery, 38; Brain Matter, 40; Medulla Ob- 
longata, 43; Cranial Nerves, 45; Spinal Nerves, 47; Sympathetic 
System, 49; Review, 51. ' 
CHAPTER III. 
Organs of Generation, 53; the Ovaries, 55; the Genito-Urinary Or- 
gans, 57. 
CHAPTER IV. 
Anatomical and Physiological Illustrations, 58; Base of Brain, 59; 
Section of the Brain, 60; Pneumogastric Nerve, 61; Spinal 
Cord, 62; Sympathetic Nerve, 64; Sympathetic Nerve, accord- 
ing to Gray's Anatomy, 66; Trachea, Lungs, and Heart, 67; 
Distribution of the Eighth Pair of Nerves, 68; Front View 
of Thorax, 69; Reflection of the Peritoneum, 71; Alimentary 
Canal, Stomach, Spleen, and Bowels, 72; Section of Kidney, 73; 
the Uterus and Appendages, 74; the Ovaries, 75; Section of 
9 10 
CONTENTS. 
Female Pelvis, showing Position of Viscera, 76; Male Pelvis and 
its Contents, 77; Ligaments of Pelvis and Hip-Joint, 78; Female 
Pelvis, 79; Lymphatics and Lacteals, 80; Temperature of the 
Human Body-Proportions of Blood-Dimensions of Organs, 81; 
Dimension and Capacity of Organs, 82; Exudation and Absorp- 
tion of the Lymphatics, 83; Table of the Cranial Nerves, 85; 
Table of the Spinal Nerves and Sympathetic Nerves of the Head 
and Neck, 87; Table of the Spinal Nerves of Upper Limb, 88; 
Table of the Spinal Nerves in the Abdomen, 89; Table of Sym- 
pathetic Nerves of the Abdomen, 90; Pneumogastric Nerve in 
the Abdomen, 91. 
CHAPTER V. 
Medical Electricity, 92; Primary and Secondary Currents, 94; Selec- 
tion of Currents, 97; Administration by Electrodes, 99; Mode 
of Addressing Treatment, 101; the Vapor-Bath, 102; Caution in 
Manipulation, 105; Illustrations of Instruments used by the 
Author, 106; the Combination Batteries, 109; Care of the Bat- 
tery-To Start the Battery, 112; How to Use a Battery, 113. CONTENTS. 
11 
PART II. 
RATIONALE OF CURE-SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
PAGE 
Electrical Diagnosis 115 
Local Diagnosis-Spinal Diagnosis 116 
The Author's Discovery-Cranial Diagnosis 117 
Difference in Electrical Currents 118 
Qualities of the Currents 119 
The Silver Helix 120 
General Rules 121 
General Treatment-Running-off Treatment 123 
General Tonic-Scrofulosis-Suspended Animation 124 
Shock-Collapse-Chills 125 
Congestive Chills 126 
Fevers 127 
Intermittent-Remittent-Typhoid Fevers 129 
Yellow Fever 130 
Eruptive Fevers-Scarlet Fever 131 
Measles-Catarrhal Fever 132 
Rheumatic Fever-Acute Rheumatism 133 
Chronic Rheumatism-Lumbago-Myalgia 135 
Muscular Rheumatism-Sciatica 135 
Numbness and Heaviness of the Legs 136 
Cerebro-spinal Meningitis (Spotted Fever) 136 
Sleeplessness-Nervousness-Soreness 137 
Stupor 138 
Headache-Nervous, Gastric, etc 139 
Sick Headache 140 
Headache 141 
Electric Foot-bath-Foot-bath in Bed-Intemperance 142 
Narcotic Poisoning-Chronic Narcotism 143 
Poisoned Wounds-Bites of Rabid Animals 144 
Mineral and Irritant Poisons 145 
Neuralgia-Toothache 146 
Hysteria 147 
Chorea (St. Vitus's Dance) 148 12 
CONTENTS. 
Tka-a 
Convulsions-Epileptic 150 
Convulsions-Infantile 151 
Convulsions-Puerperal, Hydrophobia, Tetanus 152 
Prevention of Miscarriage-Labor Assisted 153 
Apoplexy-Paralysis 154 
Paralysis 157 
Myographia (Scrivener's Palsy) 158 
Local Congestions, Inflammations, and Allied Diseases .... 159 
Inflammation of the Brain 159 
Affections of the Eyes 160 
Disordered Vision-Weak Eyes-Conjunctivitis 160 
Lachrymal Obstructions 161 
Otitis (Earache)-Gathering in the Ear 161 
Deafness-Nasal Catarrh 162 
Nasal Polypus-Bleeding of the Nose 163 
Tonsillitis-Pharyngitis 164 
Sore Throat-Diphtheria 164 
Whooping-cough-Mumps 165 
Goitre 166 
Laryngitis-Croup-Hoarseness 167 
Tracheitis-Bronchitis-Asthma 168 
Influenza-Cold in the Head 169 
Phthisis (Consumption) 169 
Pneumonia 170 
Pleurisy 170 
Diseases of the Heart 171 
General Circulation 172 
Paretic Diaphragm 172 
Indigestion-Dyspepsia 173 
(The Rocking Motion of Electrode) 173 
Morbid Liver-Enlarged Liver 174 
Constipation-Piles 175 
Colic-Tenesmus-Cramps 175 
Diarrhoea and Dysentery 176 
Cholera and Cholera Morbus 177 
Weak or Sore Kidneys 178 
Prolapsed or Floating Kidney 178 
Albuminuria-Diabetes 179 
Dropsy 180 CONTENTS. 
13 
PAGE 
Incontinence of Urine 181 
Cystitis-Metritis-Ovaritis 182 
Ulceration of the Genito-Urinary Passages-Rectum, etc. . . . 183 
Uterine Displacements 184 
Uterine Displacements (Improved Method) 187 
Ovarian Weakness 188 
Weakness of Uterus and Bladder 188 
Weakness of the Bowels 189 
Painful Menstruation 189 
Suppressed Menstruation 190 
Leucorrhoea-Impotence 190 
Gonorrhoea-Syphilis 191 
Bubo-Hydrocele-Varicocele 192 
Varix of the Legs (Varicose Veins) 193 
Aneurism . .■ • . . . 193 
Indurations 194 
Polypus 194 
Tumors - 195 
Ovarian Tumors .... 196 
Cancers 197 
Hemorrhages 198 
Erysipelas 199 
Eurunculus, or Boils-Ulcers-Fistula-Ingrowing Nails-Burns 
-Run-arounds-Chilblains-Abscesses-Sprains-Carbuncles 
-Felons 201 
Pustula Maligna 203 
Cutaneous Diseases 204 
Diseases of the Joints, Chronic or Subacute, Sequelae of Sprains, 
Rheumatism, etc 206 
Suppuration 207 
Morbus Coxarius (Hip-Disease) 207 
Curvature of the Spine 208 
Instruments and Electrodes referred to in this Work 258 14 
CONTENTS. 
APPENDIX. 
PAG* 
Symptomatology 211 
Digestive System 212 
Hemorrhage 213 
Respiratory System-Tegumentary System 214 
Secretory System 215 
Motor System-Sensory System 216 
Pain in the Head 217 
Psychical System-Delirium 218 
Modes of Death-Physical Diagnosis 218 
Diseases. 
Affections of the Respiratory System 219 
Organs of Circulation 222 
Organs of Digestion 223 
The Liver 227 
The Kidneys and Bladder 228 
The Brain and Nervous System 230 
Hemorrhages 236 
Dropsy 237 
Zymotic Diseases 238 
Fevers 241 
Diathesis-Rheumatism-Gout-Scurvy 244 
Scrofula-Rickets-Caries of Spine-Hip-joint Disease .... 245 
Anaemia-Chlorosis-Pyaemia-Skin Diseases 246 
Scaly Diseases of the Skin 247 
Tuberculous Diseases of the Skin 248 
Parasitic Diseases of the Skin 249 
Poison-vine Eruption-Chilblains-Bites of Animals 250 
Marshall Hall's Ready Method in Asphyxia 250 
Poisons and their Antidotes 252 
Dietetics for the Sick 254 NOTICE. 
This work can be procured from the author, 
Elizabeth J. French, or-only upon the presenta- 
tion of an order from her-from 
J. B. Lippincott Company, 715 Market Street, 
Otto Flemming, 1009 Arch Street, 
Philadelphia, Pa. 
PRICE, FIVE DOLLARS. PART I. 
CHAPTER I. 
HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 
The author feels it necessary, before proceeding to 
a consideration of Electro-Therapeutics, to give in as 
comprehensive language as possible the anatomical 
structure and physiological organism which consti- 
tute life and health, or disease, in the human form, 
herein subsequently to be acted upon. 
Assuming that the readers stand in the light of 
uninformed pupils, the effort on the part of the author 
will be directed to render as lucid explanations, and 
to give as wide a range of ideas upon these subjects as 
possible, without the perplexity of wading through 
technical nomenclature. 
An organism is a body composed of separate parts 
called organs. It is definite in form and function, 
and each part or organ is necessary to the full per- 
fection of the whole structure. Unorganized matter, 
on the contrary, is not necessarily made up of sepa- 
rate parts; it does not consist of organs, nor are the 
sizes and forms of inorganic masses limited or defi- 
nite, except in respect to crystalline formations, which 
17 18 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
are always definite. Inorganic substances, such as 
minerals, earths, fluids, gases, etc., may be unlimited 
in size, and heterogeneous in the shape of their several 
masses; but plants and animals always assume cer- 
tain definite shapes and sizes, ranging within certain 
normal limits. You may break up and divide inor- 
ganic bodies into any number of subdivisions, and 
each part shall retain its identity, and be still the 
same substance; but you cannot take from an or- 
ganized body any portion, however minute, without 
damaging its integrity, and depriving it of an essen- 
tial part of its structure. 
The study of anatomy deals with and describes 
dead matter. Physiology treats of the powers, mo- 
tions, and functions of living bodies. Physiology 
also includes a survey of all animate structures, 
from the simplest forms of the vegetable to the high- 
est conditions of animal existence ; but as the human 
structure may be regarded as a microcosm, including 
every form of life below itself, so the study of man is 
more instructive and comprehensive than all other 
branches. 
The human organism is made up of matter and 
force: matter, in its three states of solid, fluid, and 
gaseous; and force, including all the various forms 
of motion, the sum of which we call life. 
The fluids in animal bodies exist chiefly in the 
form of chyme, chyle, lymph, blood, the different 
juices secreted by special glands, and water. 
The solid portions consist of bone, muscle, car- 
tilage, membrane, adipose, cellular and areolar tis- 
sues, nervous matter, hair, teeth, and nails. ELEMENTS OF HUMAN ORGANISM. 
19 
The fluids contain in solution all the materials for 
the formation of solids, and as the fluids and solids 
are mutually convertible, and constantly interchang- 
ing states, their constituent elements do not differ 
materially from each other. 
The following elements are found in more or less 
variable proportions in the human system : oxygen, 
hydrogen, nitrogen, carbon, sulphur, phosphorus, 
silicon, chlorine, fluorine, and iron. There are other 
elements occasionally found in the body, such as 
manganesium, aluminum, and copper, but these are 
rather incidental than constant in their presence. 
There are, without reckoning the teeth, about two 
hundred and eight pieces of bone, arranged for the 
most part in pairs, and grouped symmetrically on 
either side of the body. The bony structure may be 
divided into the cranium inclosing the brain; the 
bones of the face; the trunk, including the sternum, 
vertebrae, twelve pairs of ribs, the collar-bones and 
shoulder-blades; and the pelvis, which supports the 
abdominal regions. The lower extremities consist 
of the thigh and knee-bones, the legs, feet, and toes. 
The upper extremities include the arms, hands, and 
fingers. 
The cranium incloses the brain and its appropriate 
system of blood-vessels, and also bounds the face, 
organs of special sense, and cranial nerves. The 
thorax and vertebrae inclose the heart, lungs, blood- 
vessels, and spinal cord. The pelvic basin supports 
the stomach, liver, pancreas, spleen, bladder, intes- 
tines, and organs of generation. Thus the bony 
structure performs the important office of protecting, 20 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE UTICS. 
as in an inclosed lattice-work, the vital organs. There 
are certain pieces of bone in the pelvis, face, head, 
and spine which are single and uniform; all the rest 
are arranged, like the extremities, in pairs, on either 
side of the body. Each pair of bones differs in 
some respects from every other pair, and all are 
fastened together by joints called articulations. The 
cranium is not formed of one compact mass, but con- 
sists of several pieces, firmly united by the inter- 
locking of notched edges, called sutures. The long 
bones of the extremities are hard, hollow cylinders, 
lined with membrane, on which blood-vessels are 
distributed for the nutriment of their substance. 
The long bones are expanded at the extremities, so 
as to present surfaces for articulation with other 
bones. Some of these bones are united by a ball 
and socket, others by flat surfaces, but all are firmly 
bound together by muscles and ligaments, and the 
end of each bone is covered with a layer of car- 
tilage, lubricated by means of a sac of serous mem- 
brane, which effuses a peculiar fluid, called synovia, 
the use of which is to keep the joints moist and 
supple. 
The bones are composed, in the first place, of car- 
tilage, which is converted into osseous tissue by the 
deposition of phosphate and carbonate of lime. In 
infancy, cartilaginous or animal matter constitutes 
the chief portion of the skeleton ; in adults, the lime 
increases, hardening the bones, and communicating 
strength to the frame; in old age, however, the ani- 
mal matter dissipates so rapidly that the bones be- 
come exceedingly brittle,-hence it is that fractures RESPIRATORY APPARATUS. 
21 
to persons in advanced life are so dangerous and 
difficult to repair. 
Without entering into the minutiae of detail which 
belongs to the anatomy of the bones, it is enough to 
call attention to the beautiful mechanism of which 
the frame-work is composed, the position it occupies 
in the human economy, and to note how admirably 
the finest principles of mechanics are carried out in 
the articulation of the several joints, and the freedom 
with which every part of the structure moves. 
The respiratory apparatus commences with the 
mouth, which conducts the inhaled air through the 
trachea (windpipe) into the lungs. The trachea is 
a strong, highly elastic tube, composed of muscular, 
fibrous, and mucous membranes, all of which line and 
connect about eighteen cartilaginous rings, the con- 
tractile action of which is admirably adapted to pro- 
duce the various inflexions of the voice essential in 
speaking or singing. 
We may here pause to remark that all portions 
of the viscera or internal organs that are exposed to 
the air are lined with mucous membrane, and all the 
internal organs themselves are inclosed in sacs of 
serous membrane, the office of which is to secrete a 
watery fluid, called serum. It is by the effusion of 
serum that the various organs are lubricated, and 
any undue irritation, from their friction one upon 
the other, is avoided. 
The trachea terminates, as it enters the thorax, in 
two arches, called bronchi, and these, dividing off into 
the right and the left lung, subdivide and ramify into 
an immense system of tubing, every fibre of which 22 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
ends in a minute air-cell. The tissue of the lungs is 
composed of fine areolar membrane, air-cells, bron- 
chial tubing, arteries, veins, and capillaries. The 
air-cells are composed of microscopic sacs of mem- 
brane. The bronchial tubes, veins, arteries, and 
capillaries of the lungs are all attenuated to the ut- 
most degree of fineness, and so profusely distributed 
that the entire mass of the lungs may be said to 
consist of an immense surface of membrane, with 
blood-vessels on one side and air-cells on the other. 
The blood and air do not come into contact, although 
the fine and permeable character of the membrane 
permits the nutritive quality of the blood to pass 
into and nourish the air-cells, and the vitalizing 
properties of the inhaled air to act upon and change 
materially the character of the blood. It has been 
estimated that there are at least six hundred millions 
of air-cells in the lungs, each one of which is supplied 
by an artery communicating with a vein, and inflated 
by the air inhaled in the act of inspiration. The sur- 
face presented by the membrane of the lungs would, 
it is supposed, cover more than thirty times that of 
the whole body, and the capacity for inflating this 
light, spongy tissue is provided for, first, by the elas- 
tic intercostal muscles which connect the ribs to- 
gether and expand with every respiration, and next 
by the action of the large muscular membrane called 
the diaphragm, which separates the thorax from the 
abdomen, and alternately curves upward and down- 
ward with the actions of inspiration and exhalation 
performed by the lungs. The chief function of the 
respiratory organs is that of aerating the blood, CIRCULATION OF BLOOD. 
23 
which is carried into the lung-tissues by the pul- 
monary artery from the right ventricle of the heart. 
At this point the blood is finally collected by the 
veins from all portions of the system, and, being 
charged with the impurities and effete matters, 
gathered up in traversing the body, presents the 
appearance of a dark purple, almost black, fluid, 
when poured through the right vena cava or large 
vein into the heart. By the exposure of the ve- 
nous blood to the oxygen of the atmosphere inhaled 
through the lungs, its impurities are in part dis- 
engaged and given off in the form of carbonic acid 
gas; the whole mass of blood, or nearly the whole, 
becomes changed in tone and color; the dark purple 
hue is converted into a bright scarlet, and by the time 
the pulmonary circulation is completed, the blood is 
arterialized and poured back into the heart through 
the left auricle, in a condition sufficiently renovated 
to form pabulum for the support and nourishment 
of the entire system. 
We must now trace in more detail the circulatory 
process, and note the intimate connection and inter- 
dependence which it maintains with the respiratory 
system. The heart is the centre of the circulatory 
apparatus, and it is situated in the thorax, between 
the right and left lungs. The point or apex slants 
forward toward the left lung, on which it slightly 
impinges, the base or broad part inclining back- 
ward and upward toward the right shoulder. Al- 
though the formation of muscular fibre is uniform 
in all parts of the system, the closely-knit and 
strongly-packed fibres of the heart constitute it the 24 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
most powerful muscle of the whole body. It is pro- 
tected from friction against other organs by a smooth 
serous membrane or sac containing cardiacal fluid, 
and this sac is spread over the whole surface of the 
heart, and so doubled on itself as to form a close 
bag, called the pericardium, or heart-case. 
The heart itself is divided internally in the direc- 
tion of its length into two halves, which, though so 
closely connected as to form one, constitute it in 
reality a double organ. Each part being called 
upon to perform different functions from the other, 
the walls of each side differ in thickness in propor- 
tion to their uses. Thus, the right side (the office 
of which is simply to receive the blood and propel it 
with moderate force into the lungs) exhibits muscu- 
lar walls less thick, and valves less elaborately fash- 
ioned, than the left, through which the blood is re- 
ceived from the lungs, and propelled by the aortal 
artery through the whole body. 
There are four principal cavities in the heart, the 
first two of which are termed auricles, one situated 
on each side, right and left, though not exactly uni- 
form ; and two other cavities termed ventricles, sim- 
ilarly located, though less uniform even than the 
auricles. The auricles perform the part of receivers, 
the ventricles that of propellers. 
Between each cavity there is a beautifully con- 
structed valve, the duty of which is to permit the 
flow of blood in one direction, but to prevent its 
return again through the same orifice. 
The auricle on the right side is furnished with a 
three-pointed valve, called tricuspid, and that on the VALVES OF THE HEART. 
25 
left with a two-pointed valve, termed bicuspid. Both 
these membranes are attached to the walls of the 
heart by little muscular cords, and though they 
appear to be merely finely attenuated threads, they 
are fashioned, like the valves, with an extraordinary 
amount of strength and resisting power. 
Besides the auricular valves, there are two sets 
communicating between the ventricles and the ar- 
teries. These are termed semilunar valves, and 
their office is to afford passage from the ventricles 
to the arteries; the right ventricle forcing the blood 
into the pulmonary artery, and from thence through 
the lungs, and the left ventricle by the great aorta 
throughout the whole body. 
In order to gain a correct idea of the course in 
which the tidal currents of the blood are projected, 
it is necessary to have a starting-point; and this we 
shall find by commencing to trace the circuit from 
the left ventricle. Remember always that the blood 
does not flow in regular channels through the heart, 
but that it is propelled by a strong impulse through 
each valve into its separate cavity. In the left ven- 
tricle we find the blood in that bright scarlet con- 
dition peculiar to the arterial flow. If we should 
pierce a vein in any part of the living structure, we 
would observe a moderate but by no means impulsive 
flow of the contained fluid; but if we should sever 
an artery, a violent upward rush of the blood would 
testify to the momentum with which the current 
had been impelled. This impulse is originated by 
the muscular contraction peculiar to the left ven- 
tricular cavity, which forces the blood with im- 26 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
mense power through the large arterial tube crown- 
ing the broad base of the heart, called the aorta. 
Directly after receiving the first flow of the arterial 
fluid, the aorta divides like an arch to the right and 
left, and again subdivides into four main trunks,- 
two branches of which extend upward, when they 
are called the carotid arteries, and supply the dif- 
ferent portions of the throat and bead ; the other 
two trunks tend downward, and branch off* on 
either side of the body into a complex system of 
tubing, ending in an inextricable net-work of fine 
hair-like passages called capillaries. The ramifica- 
tions of this extensive system of vessels are sup- 
posed to extend to a length of several miles, and it 
is thus that arterial blood is furnished to the body, 
supplying the entire system with nutrition and the 
life-giving oxygen inhaled through the lungs. 
In the capillaries, the blood parts with its nutri- 
tive qualities, and from thence it is taken up by 
the veins, the extent and ramifications of which 
correspond in all respects with the arteries, only 
that its dark purple hue denotes the absence of 
the vitalizing element found in the arteries; but 
it must be remembered that the chief office of the 
veins is to carry the blood back again to the great 
central reservoir of circulatory power in the heart. 
This they effect by being distributed side by side 
with the arteries,-intersecting them in thousands 
of yards of fine hair-like tubing, until they expand 
into larger proportions, and finally concentrate into 
four main trunks about the heart, corresponding to 
the position of the arteries. The large trunks which SYSTEMIC CIRCULATION. 
27 
carry back the venous blood from the heart and 
throat are called the jugular veins, and the branches 
which return the blood from the trunk and extrem- 
ities are termed vense cavae. Through these the 
blood is emptied into the right auricle, and from 
thence through the tricuspid valve into the right 
ventricle. Here what is called the great systemic 
circulation ends, and here the pulmonary or lesser 
circulation commences. It must be remembered 
that we started on our analysis by tracing the blood 
from the left ventricle, but before it can reach this 
point there must intervene that complete pulmonary 
circuit through the lungs to which we have previ- 
ously called attention. The object of this lesser 
system of circulation is, as before stated, to expose 
the blood to the oxygen inhaled by the act of res- 
piration, and thus to effect that radical change which 
converts the dark venous flow into the healthful and 
vitalizing condition of arterial blood. 
The wonders of the circulatory system, and the 
effects of health or disease which result from a 
thorough understanding of its influence, cannot of 
course be fully appreciated from the condensed de- 
scription which is herewith presented. It is enough 
to say, however, that if, as the best informed physi- 
ologists allow, a single grain of poison infused into 
any given portion of the organism will traverse the 
whole circulatory extent of tubing in something less 
than three minutes of time, what an array of poi- 
sonous elements are we not perpetually introducing 
into our systems, in the shape of vitiated airs, fer- 
mented liquors, and injurious articles of food, by 28 
EL ECTRO- THERA PE VTICS. 
the ignorant and unphysiological modes in which 
nine-tenths of the community pass their lives! 
We now add a brief sketch of the methods by 
which food is prepared for the nourishment of the 
system through the digestive apparatus. 
The organs of digestion commence with the teeth, 
and include the mouth, salivary glands, oesophagus 
or food-pipe, the stomach, duodenum or entrance to 
the small intestine, the pancreas, liver, gall-bladder, 
and lacteals. 
The three kinds of teeth found in the human jaw 
are called incisors, canine, and molars. The first of 
these are designed simply to divide the food, the 
second to tear it, and the third to bruise or grind it. 
There are two sets of teeth, namely, the milk-teeth, 
which supply the gums of infancy and childhood, 
and the permanent teeth, which take the place of 
the others from about the age of six to eight years. 
The extreme hardness, diverse fashion, and sepa- 
rate offices performed by the three varieties of teeth 
fastened into the human jaw, taken in connection 
with similarly diverse functions performed by other 
portions of the digestive apparatus, demonstrate 
that the food designed to sustain man should be of 
a mixed character, and should include animal, vege- 
table, and cereal productions. 
Besides the act of mastication another important 
process takes place in the mouth, and this consists 
of insalivation, or the moistening and preparing the 
food for swallowing by the mixture of saliva. This 
fluid is secreted from three different sets of glands: 
one pair situated just below each ear, and called the SALIVARY GLANDS. 
29 
parotid glands; another pair placed beneath the 
tongue, called sublingual; and the third, or sub- 
maxillary, placed near the angles of the lower jaw. 
The fluids secreted from these three sets of glands 
differ in character, but in combination form saliva. 
A certain portion of saliva is always found in the 
mouth, except its flow is restrained by disease, but, 
like the gastric juice of the stomach, the moment 
food is presented to the mouth the flow is greatly 
increased, and this sometimes occurs even when 
the thought of food excites the nerves which sup- 
ply the salivary glands. This result is what is vul- 
garly called "setting the mouth watering" at the 
sight or mention of desirable food. After the food 
has been duly masticated and moistened by the 
saliva, it is collected by the muscles of the cheeks 
and the action of the tongue, and conveyed against 
the back part or veil of the palate, which is so hung 
as to close the cavity of the mouth in rest, yet in 
swallowing to open it freely and permit the passage 
of the food into the pharynx. 
The oesophagus is an elastic muscular tube resem- 
bling the trachea in construction, inclosed on its ex- 
ternal surface by a serous membrane; then follows 
a layer of thick elastic muscular membrane, the 
whole being lined with mucous membrane. 
By the muscular contractions of the oesophagus, 
the food is next forced through an orifice near the 
heart, surrounded with a strong band, or sphincter, 
into the main digestive cavity, or stomach. 
The human stomach is an oblong membranous 
bag, situated just below the diaphragm, and placed 30 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
somewhat obliquely across the abdomen. It has two 
orifices: the one just alluded to, namely, the cardiac 
orifice, by which the food is received, and the other 
at its smaller extremity, called the pyloric orifice, 
the office of which is to convey the semi-digested 
food from the stomach into the intestines. Both 
these orifices are surrounded with muscular bands, 
which close upon the interioi' sac, and only open or 
expand when it is essential to receive ox* to expel 
the food from the cavity of the stomach. 
The stomach has three coats, consisting of an ex- 
ternal covering, or serous membrane ; a muscular or 
middle coating, formed of highly elastic muscular 
fibre, the property of which is to contract and ex- 
pand, and thus promote the rolling motion occurring 
whilst the food is being digested in the stomach; and 
an inner lining, called, as before stated, the mucous 
membrane, the office of which is not only to cover 
the interior surface with a smooth slimy fluid, but 
also to contain the countless number of little folli- 
cles or glands through which the gastric juices are 
poured out and secreted; in fact, the surface of the 
mucous membrane or inner lining of the stomach is 
pierced with little glands and processes so thickly 
set that millions of them may be counted under the 
microscope. When this organ contains no food these 
glands are at rest, but directly food is introduced into 
the cardiac orifice, the follicles pour out an acrid fluid 
secreted within them, which, running down into the 
contents of the stomach, so dissolves and changes 
them that all matters susceptible of digestion be- 
come converted into a pulpy mass called chyme. ALIMENTARY CANAL. 
31 
Nothing but solid matter, and that of an organic 
nature, is acted upon by the gastric fluid. Liquids 
are at once got rid of, and when introduced into the 
stomach in large quantities, materially interfere with 
the process of digestion. Solid tissues, such as cooked 
meat, fish, and bread, are most readily dissolved by 
the gastric juices. Saccharine and starchy matters 
are ejected in an unchanged state into the small in- 
testines. Gastric fluid, though poured in large quan- 
tities into the stomach during the process of diges- 
tion, does not remain there, nor is it all absorbed by 
the food; some portions of it are reabsorbed into the 
capillaries which surround and overlay the glands, 
and thus pass into the general circulation, and per- 
form the function of nourishing or vitiating the tis- 
sues of the body; but the greater portion of the 
solids, when they are susceptible of being dissolved 
by the gastric juices, are carried off through the 
pyloric orifice into the duodenum, or first part of the 
alimentary canal. 
The usual length of the small intestine in man is 
about twenty-five feet. The opening then widens 
into a much larger passage, called the colon, or great 
intestine, the length of which, for about five feet, 
is traversed by the waste matter, which is finally 
ejected from the system. The intestines, like the 
stomach, have three coats or membranes, consisting 
of the peritoneal or serous, the muscular, and the 
mucous. 
The surface of the mucous lining of the small in- 
testine is even more numerously studded with small 
glands, called villi, than the stomach. Through these 32 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UT1CS. 
villi the nutritive portions of the food are absorbed 
by a set of vessels called lacteals, but not until the 
chyme, or half-digested food, has been further pre- 
pared by a juice, secreted by a long gland situated 
on the right side of the stomach, called the pancreas. 
This gland pours out a fluid called the pancreatic 
juice, and its peculiar property seems to be to mix 
with and prepare the fatty matters taken into the 
system for general distribution. 
The final act of the digestive process is performed 
by the liver. This is a large gland, divided into sev- 
eral lobes, pierced thickly with blood-vessels, and 
having a circulation of its own, called the portal 
circulation. 
One of the chief offices of the liver is to secrete 
or manufacture a bitter, acrid fluid, called bile. This 
is poured out into a small duct, adhering to the lower 
side of the liver, called the gall-bladder. There is a 
duct which leads direct from the liver into the gall- 
bladder, and from this again into the small intestine, 
at or about the same point as the pancreatic duct, 
and this is called the bile-duct. Through this pas- 
sage the biliary fluid is poured in a given quantity 
into the small intestine, changing so materially the 
character of the chyme, that after it has passed be- 
yond the pancreatic and bile ducts it is converted 
into a white, milk-like fluid; in fact, it now assumes 
that rudimental condition of which blood is formed, 
and, having undergone its last change in the act of 
digestion, it is called chyle, and is taken up as already 
stated by absorption through the mucous membrane 
of the small intestine into a set of vessels termed LACTEALS AND THORACIC DUCT. 
33 
lacteals, and from thence it is poured into the general 
circulation through the blood-vessels. 
Whatever residue matter there may be, including 
that not fit for nutriment, is forced on into the colon, 
and as the lining membrane in this intestine is no 
longer supplied with nutritive glands, the contained 
matter becomes hard and comparatively dry, and 
is expelled in regular course from the system by the 
excrementary passage. 
It now only remains to add a few words of de- 
scription concerning the lacteals, through which the 
thoroughly digested food is ultimately converted into 
chyle and poured into the general circulation. 
The lacteals form part of an extensive fluid sys- 
tem, called lymphatics, of which that portion termed 
lacteals originates in the mucous membrane of the 
alimentary canal. Here they are imbedded in the 
form of villi, or minute tubules, imperceptible to the 
naked eye; and the chyle, or digested food, in its 
liquid, milky state, is absorbed into these villi, from 
whence it passes into larger passages, uniting into 
great branches, and finally combining into one trunk, 
called the thoracic duct. 
Into this main passage all the lymphatics and lac- 
teals are emptied. Its situation is in front of the 
second lower joint of the spine, or lumbar vertebrae, 
and after continuing up the backbone until it reaches 
a valvular opening, just beneath the clavicle, or collar- 
bone, it discharges its contents into the left subclavian 
vein, becomes commingled with the returning currents 
of venous blood, and is carried into the right cavity 
of the heart, to be lost in the general circulation. CHAPTER II. 
THE BRAIN AND NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
Under the microscope the diameter of blood-disks 
is one four-thousandth part of an inch ! 
Hundreds of millions of air-sacs in the lungs, miles 
of tubing in the blood-vessels and capillaries, and 
millions of cells occupied in forming the brain; 
phrases, these, which, however true, bring no sense 
of realization to the mind seeking to learn the grand 
machinery of life, except to those familiar with the dis- 
secting-room, or conversant with works devoted ex- 
clusively to the delineation of anatomy and physiology. 
Therefore, in this volume, all minutiae of descrip- 
tion which applies to the original formation of tissues 
is withheld, and the simple statement is given that 
all the different portions of the body, whether bone, 
muscle, membrane, cartilage, or nervous matter, are 
constructed from minute cells, the primary form of 
which is a sac of membrane of infinitesimal attenua- 
tion and nuclei of microscopic size. 
Millions of these, flattened, elongated, rounded, or 
pressed into spheroids, go to make up a single fibre 
of muscular or nervous matter. Bundles of fibres, 
countless in multitude, are bound together to form a 
mass of tissue; whilst the human body includes the to- 
tality of all tissues, organs, systems, and apparatuses. 
34 LIFE-PRINCIPLE. 
35 
Passing forward then to the grand results of 
formation, we are now about to enter upon that 
peculiar system of organic life which connects the 
realms of matter and force, and in part reveals the 
causation underlying the variety of motions which 
make up the life-principle. 
When we turn from the dead body, which is in 
reality inorganic matter, and contemplate the im- 
mense variety of powers and functions manifest in 
the living structure itself, it becomes impossible to 
narrow down our investigations to the inert masses 
examined by anatomy; hence we must push into 
the avenues opened up by physiology. 
To determine the source of those marvellous activ- 
ities which proceed with such regular order in life, 
and to ascertain what element it is, the absence of 
which stills those activities into death, and reduces 
their instrument of expression to inert matter, has 
been the problem of ages, and one which even now 
would not have been susceptible of solution if a par- 
tial disclosure of the mystery had not been made by 
the researches of physiologists, and the light which 
modern science has thrown upon the powers and 
functions of the nervous system, under the stimulus 
of Electricity. 
For some time past the theory has been advanced, 
that the hidden and mysterious forces of life were 
generated by the brain and nervous system in what 
is termed "nerve aura" and that this element would 
account for all the phenomena vaguely attributed to 
a " vital principle." 
The simple fact that the nerves, like the rest of 36 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
the organs, perish at death, and that their tissues 
retain none of the properties assumed to belong to 
them except they are acted upon from without, is 
a sufficient refutation of the fallacy that the "vital 
principle" and " nerve aura" are one and the same ele- 
ment ; but when we find a force which produces upon 
the organism the effects which we attribute to the 
" vital principle," when we find that force capable 
of moving the muscles, stimulating the circulation, 
promoting digestion and respiration, and acting even 
upon the nervous system itself, are we not justified in 
assuming that such force is one and the same with 
the 11 vital principle"? We have a sufficient array 
of phenomena, through whatever media we observe 
the action of electricity, to determine that it is the 
true motor of vital force, and that the physiologist 
who carefully observes its working as a therapeutic 
agent, and the anatomist who watches its effects 
even upon dead matter, have plausible reason to 
assume that they approach a solution of the problem 
of life. 
Mr. St. Clair Gray published in 1872 a paper upon 
the origin of nerve-force, which he illustrated by 
what he considers to be a newly discovered source 
of natural electricity. During some of his experi- 
ments he prepared a cell or cup, containing a solu- 
tion of caustic potash, in which sticks of phosphorus 
and sulphur were placed ; within half an hour the 
sulphur was apparently unaffected, the phosphorus 
was reduced to an oily mass at the bottom of the 
cell. After a time, it was ascertained that several 
salts of potassium occurred in the solution, and that GRAY'S NERVE-FORCE. 
37 
the sulphur at the point of contact with the phospho- 
rus sustained a considerable loss of substance. Similar 
conditions being found at the end of three months, 
the phosphorus still fluid, and the sulphur having a 
continued waste, the amount of electricity generated 
was tested by Thomson's electrometer, and the elec- 
tric motive force was 162°, in comparison with a 
Daniell cell, which only gave 120° ; the difference 
was 42° in favor of the new cell. The constancy of 
this original battery was shown by its continuing 
to work steadily after the expiration of several 
months. 
Mr. Gray proceeds from these hints to suggest a 
new hypothesis in regard to nerve-force; and start- 
ing with the assumption that nerve-power has in it 
an electric element, he endeavored to ascertain its 
source, which, after elaborate experiment, he believes 
can be found in the sulphur and phosphorus of the 
human body : the brain contains considerable phos- 
phorus, whilst sulphur exists in the liver, and an 
alkaline solution is circulated between them. He 
took a frog, and having secured anaesthesia by applica- 
tion of chloroform, an incision was made through the 
abdominal walls in the right hypochondriac region; 
and a copper wire passed into the substance of the 
liver. The eyeball was then pierced, and a similar 
piece of copper wire brought in contact with the 
brain by passing it through the optic foramen. The 
free extremities of the copper wires were brought in 
contact with the exposed sciatic nerve of another 
frog's hind leg, when powerful convulsions were im- 
mediately induced in the muscles. 38 
ELECTRO- TH ERAPE UTICS. 
Mr. Gray evolved from these experiments the 
opinion that at least a portion of this electric current 
is generated by the action of the alkaline fluid on 
the sulphur and phosphorus contained in the liver 
and brain. Although the living body is known to 
have other sources of electricity, Mr. Gray believes 
that the prime agent in nervo-motor power is derived 
from the reaction of the brain and liver, especially 
in view of the fact that the kidneys excrete about 
72 grains per diem of phosphoric acid, and of sul- 
phuric acid nearly 100 grains are produced per diem, 
chiefly from the brain and liver. 
Mr. Gray also advances the idea-which the 
author has every reason to corroborate, and has fre- 
quently declared in part explanation of her own dis- 
covery of Electrical Cranial Diagnosis-namely, that 
the sympathetic nerve, with its branches and ganglia, 
is not a separate or isolated system, but merely a 
constituent part of the general nervous system, hav- 
ing the function of regulating the movements of in- 
voluntary muscular fibre, and obtaining its nerve- 
force from the brain. He suggests an arrangement 
similar to that of the Leyden-jar, as occurring in the 
membranes inclosing the viscera, the lungs, the heart, 
and the great serous cavities of the body; whereas 
the author in a former volume has written, " I would 
liken the human organism not to a magnet, which 
has been done so often, but to a great natural bat- 
tery, of which the lungs are the magnets, generating 
the electricity for the whole organism ; the nerves, 
the wires or conductors; the heart, the helix or in- 
tensifying factor; the head and feet corresponding HUMAN BATTERY. 
39 
to the positive and negative poles. Conceive that 
the lungs generate the fluid from the oxygen of the 
atmosphere, and we have a never-failing electric 
reservoir, in which the slightest perturbation in the 
current produces, as is well known, a corresponding 
disturbance in the electric condition of the body; 
and as the electric forces resident in the various 
organs of the human body are simply modifications 
of those which vitalize human nature at large, it fol- 
lows that any excess or diminution in their quantity, 
or any impoverishment in quality, may be supplied 
by a judicious administration of induced electricity. 
It is upon this basis the author's system of Electro- 
Therapeutics operates. Her theory of the electric 
force in its connection with the human organism 
recognizes it as the motor-power of the life principle." 
Not to anticipate in this place the arguments 
which can be presented to support this theory, we 
will proceed to briefly consider the structure of the 
brain and nervous system, and see thereby how far 
we are justified in assuming that, in their operation, 
we find the instrumentalities through which the 
life-forces act. 
It has long been believed that consciousness, intel- 
ligence, and will, find in the nervous matter of the 
brain the seat of those properties by which mind acts 
upon matter. As a full analysis of all that might be 
advanced in reference to the subtle links which con- 
nect mind and matter would involve psychological, 
as well as physiological, considerations, we must 
limit ourselves to the physical relations of our sub- 
ject, alluding to its psychological connections only 40 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
where it is essential to elucidate the influences which 
mind exercises upon matter in different conditions of 
health and disease. 
In the nervous apparatus of man we find two well- 
marked and distinct systems,-the cerebro-spinal, and 
the sympathetic or ganglionic system. The cerebro- 
spinal consists of the brain, the spinal cord, and the 
nerves, which extend these great centres to the ulti- 
mate extremities of the body. 
The brain is composed of a soft, pulpy tissue, and 
is inclosed in the cavity formed by the cranium. The 
mass of the brain is divided into two principal por- 
tions, called the cerebrum, or front brain, and the 
cerebellum, or back brain. 
The cerebrum occupies all the anterior and upper 
part of the cranial cavity; it also extends to the 
posterior region of the head, covering the upper por- 
tion of the cerebellum, and resting on the membranes 
which divide the two. It is seven-eighths larger 
than the cerebellum, and is supposed to be the prin- 
cipal seat of the intellectual faculties. 
The mass of the cerebrum is divided into two 
hemispheres or lateral halves, and again, these have 
three prominences on either side, called lobes. The 
lobes are the special masses which fill the concave 
portion of the skull at the forehead, temples, and 
back of the head. 
The hemispheres are divided by a double fold of 
membrane, which dips down between them, and cuts 
the cerebrum into two distinct halves. There are 
transverse bands of nervous matter connecting these 
hemispheres, called commissures, and the last and BRAIN-MA TTER. 
41 
largest of these is situated at the base of the cere- 
brum, forming a strong band of nerve-fibres, called 
the corpus-callosum. Toward the base of the cere- 
brum it becomes inflected inward, then expands, 
and forms an intricate cavity, with several chambers, 
called ventricles. 
The surface of the cerebrum is folded up into 
an immense number of convolutions, which pierce 
deeply into the substance, and form a complete mass 
of fissures and eminences. Brain-matter, although 
uniform in consistence, presents two striking vari- 
eties of color, and a specialty in the arrangement of 
its surfaces. The external surface is composed of a 
thick layer of nervous matter of a gray color, called, 
from its ash-like hue, cineritious; and this dips down 
into all the convolutions, piercing the internal mass in 
a well-defined, though exceedingly irregular, layer. 
This interior mass is of a milky-white substance, 
semi-fluid in consistency, and is called medullary. 
Notwithstanding the irregularity of surface occas- 
ioned by the convoluted nature of the cineritious 
layer, it does not commingle with the medullary, but 
the gray and white substances preserve their distinct 
positions throughout the whole mass. The brain is 
more abundantly supplied with blood than any other 
organ of the body; but if the extent of brain-surface 
were limited by the size of the mass, only one-tenth 
of the quantity of blood would be sent to the brain 
that it now receives; and the additional provision 
for its nutrition is derived from the blood-vessels 
spread out on the membranes, and piercing all the 
convolutions into which the mass is folded. 42 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE UTICS. 
There are three membranes inclosing the brain. 
The external is a strong, firm tissue, lining the 
cranial cavity, and adhering closely to the bones; 
it also dips down between the two hemispheres, 
and, being reflected back over either side, forms the 
double fold which divides them. This membrane is 
called the dura mater, or "hard mother," from the 
belief of the old anatomists that it originated all the 
strong membranes of the body. 
The second membrane is called the arachnoid, or 
"spider-web," from its exceeding attenuation. This 
membrane dips into all the convolutions, and upon 
its surface is spread out the extensive vascular system 
which supplies the brain with blood. 
The third and inner membrane is an exceedingly 
fine and delicate investiture which incloses all the 
brain-matter, and is termed pia mater, or " soft 
mother," in contradistinction to the dura mater. 
Myriads of minute vessels are spread out between 
these membranes, besides which there is a serous 
fluid secreted by the arachnoid, serving the same 
lubricating purpose as that effected by the serous 
sacs which inclose the heart, lungs, and other in- 
ternal organs. All these membranes, in the same 
order as they exist in the cranium, form the tubular 
sheath which invests the spinal cord. 
The cerebellum, or back brain, is situated at the 
base of the cerebrum, or front brain, and is in part 
covered by it. In structure, as in functions, it differs 
from the cerebrum, its surface being furrowed with 
lines or ridges instead of convolutions. Like the 
cerebrum, it is divided into two hemispheres, sepa- MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 
43 
rated by folds of membrane, and united by commis- 
sures, or transverse bands of nervous matter. The 
gray and white matters are arranged in layers sim- 
ilar to the cerebrum; but it is a curious feature in 
the cerebellum, that when a vertical section of the 
mass is cut into and solidified by being frozen or 
otherwise, the white matter is found in the form of 
a well-defined tree, called from this appearance the 
arbor vitce, or tree of life. 
At the upper part of the spinal column is a singu- 
lar bulb-shaped mass of white matter, called the 
medulla oblongata. It is situated immediately be- 
neath the corpus callosum, between the right and 
left hemispheres of the cerebellum, and forms the 
point of union between the brain and spinal cord, 
although it properly belongs to the latter. 
Its functions in the nervous system are complicated 
and important, so that anatomists assign it a very 
prominent position in the distribution of nerve-force. 
Figs. 1 and 2, illustrating the brain, will give some 
idea of the divisions and subdivisions into which it is. 
resolved; suffice to mention four, the functions of 
which are far more important than their diminutive 
size would seem to portend. ' The medulla oblongata 
is divided into two halves, like the spinal cord, and 
although these are transversed and united by bands 
of nerve-fibres, the functions of these columns are 
obviously different. 
The anterior half of the medulla is the gate 
through which all the powers of motion are trans- 
mitted to the nerves throughout the body. 
The posterior half of the medulla oblongata per- 44 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE VTICS. 
forms the same office for the sensory nerves; in fact, 
whatever powers originate in the brain must be 
transmitted through the medulla oblongata; and in 
reflex action, whatever sensations are transmitted to 
the brain must in like manner pass through this 
singular little mass of nervous matter. 
The medulla oblongata is also subdivided laterally, 
so that two distinct centres of sensation are found 
to exist in the posterior half, and two correspond- 
ing centres of motion in the anterior column. Ex- 
periments show that if one of the anterior columns 
of the medulla oblongata is cut away the power of 
motion in the opposite half of the body is lost, al- 
though in the other half motion will remain, and 
sensation is unimpaired; remove the other half of 
the anterior column, and all motion ceases. The 
same results to the powers of sensation are obtained 
by cutting away the posterior columns separately or 
together. 
Experiments made on living animals have shown 
that although successive portions of the brain may 
be cut away until it is all removed, so long as the 
medulla oblongata remains uninjured the functions 
of breathing, deglutition, and the automatic pro- 
cesses of life still go on undisturbed. 
A very slight wound at the centre of the medulla 
oblongata is sufficient to produce death, and the func- 
tions of motion and sensation are, as we have shown, 
absolutely dependent on its integrity and perfectness. 
Many physiologists assume that the instinctive 
powers of animal life are centred in the cerebellum ; 
but whilst that organ is undoubtedly essential to CRANIAL NERVES. 
45 
govern and co-ordinate the instinctive powers, the 
much smaller mass of medulla oblongata is evidently 
the chief centre of the powers themselves, and with- 
out its preservation, motion, sensation, and even life 
itself cease to animate the organism. 
There are twelve pairs of nerves given off from 
the brain, and from thence to the organs of special 
sense, and different portions of the head. 
The first pair are called the olfactory nerves, and 
terminate in the inner portions of the nose. 
The second pair are called the optic nerves, and 
supply the retina of the eye. 
The third, fourth, fifth, and sixth pairs are also 
distributed about the eyes; the third, fourth, and 
sixth pairs being motor nerves. 
The fifth pair, called trifacial, are sensory, and send 
off branches which supply the cheeks, nose, and mouth. 
The seventh pair are the general motor nerves of 
the facial muscles. 
The eighth pair, called auditory nerves, end in the 
interior of the eye. 
The ninth pair supply the back of the mouth and 
pharynx. 
The tenth pair, the important pneumogastric 
nerves, originating in the medulla oblongata, com- 
municate with the lungs, heart, and stomach, and 
ramify through the entire viscera to a considerable 
extent. (See Fig. 3.) 
The eleventh pair supply the muscles of the neck. 
The twelfth pair communicate with the tongue 
and the organs of speech. 
The two pairs, eleventh and twelfth, are called 46 
ELECTRO- THERA PE VT1CS. 
spinal accessory and hyoglossal; but physiologists 
are not in general agreed upon the classification and 
names of the cranial nerves. 
The nerves are mostly cells, or tubules, composed 
of membranous sacs or sheaths, lined with nervous 
matter, inclosing nerve-filaments in the form of 
bundles, which stretch away, divide, and subdivide, 
but never lose the original quality of sensation or 
motion which they derive from their roots. In every 
membranous sheath there are two distinct sets of 
filaments, one of which communicates with the cere- 
bral hemispheres, and the other with the spinal cord. 
The spinal cord is a long, irregular column of 
nerve-substance, inclosed in a sheath, composed of 
the cranial membranes prolonged down the spine. 
It extends from the medulla oblongata to the second 
lumbar vertebra of the spine. (See Fig. 4.) 
The spinal cord, although composed of gray and 
white nervous matter like the brain, presents a dif- 
ferent arrangement of the layers,-the white matter 
being on the exterior, and the gray or cineritious 
mass forming a band which traverses the interior 
of the column. 
Like the medulla oblongata, the spinal cord is 
divided into two symmetrical halves, united in the 
middle by a commissure, or converging lines of 
nerve-fibre; it is also separated into an anterior and 
posterior column by a vertical fissure. Each lateral 
half is traversed by two longitudinal tracts, which 
separate it by distinct furrows. Thus there are on 
either side three well-marked columns, called the 
anterior, posterior, and lateral. SPINAL NERVES. 
47 
The spinal cord is enlarged at the neck and loins, 
and from these expansions are given off the nerves 
which supply the upper and lower extremities. 
From the spinal cord are given off thirty-two pairs 
of nerves, the roots of which spring from either side 
of the cord, right and left. 
The first eight pairs arise in the region of the 
neck, and are called Cervical. 
The next twelve pairs, corresponding to the num- 
ber of the ribs, are termed Dorsal. 
Then five pairs, which spring from the lumbar 
vertebrae. 
The remaining six pairs originate in the vertebral 
bones, which divide the basin of the pelvis and sup- 
ply the lower abdominal regions. 
Every nerve-trunk arises from a distinct root, and 
these roots originate in pairs, one in the anterior and 
the other in the posterior half of the column. 
The nerves which spring from the posterior half 
are nerves of sensation ; those from the anterior di- 
vision of the cord, motor nerves. Like the columns 
of the medulla oblongata, if one of the sensory nerves 
be divided at any portion of its length, the ultimate 
point which it supplies becomes destitute of sensa- 
tion. A corresponding effect is produced by dividing 
a motor nerve: the muscle or joint with which it 
communicates will never more move, and that result 
follows notwithstanding that the brain and spinal 
cord may remain in their perfect integrity. 
To cut or sever a cord itself in any portion of its 
length is paralysis of both motion and sensation in 
all those parts of the body supplied by the nerves 48 
ELECTRO- THERA PE VTICS. 
arising below the point of injury; in fact, it is mani- 
fest that the stupendous powers of motion and sensa- 
tion find their instrumentalities in these little insig- 
nificant-looking nerve-filaments; sever, wound, or 
injure them, and paralysis of motion, or sensation, is 
just as inevitably the result as if the columns of the 
medulla oblongata were cut away as before described. 
The nerves arise, as we have said, in pairs ; a nerve 
of motion and sensation in one-half of the column, and 
corresponding roots springing from the other half,- 
the sensory nerve-roots arising from the posterior 
division, the motor nerve-roots from the anterior. 
These pairs arise at first singly, but they soon 
after combine into a ganglionic knot, again to di- 
vide and subdivide and ramify into countless fibrous 
lengths, supplying every part of the body, reaching 
to the ultimate points of the spine, the interior of the 
bones, muscles, membranes, tissues, and blood-vessels: 
in fact, it is impossible to conceive any portion of the 
organism which is not supplied with some ramifica- 
tion, great or small, from the main trunks of the 
cerebro-spinal system. 
It must be noted that nervous action is invari- 
ably dual or reflex: for example, the cerebrum wills 
to move a joint or contract a muscle; the thought is 
immediately telegraphed through the medulla ob- 
longata to the desired point, and whatever sensation 
is produced by that motion is instantaneously tele- 
graphed back again to the brain by the corresponding 
nerve of the pair. Of course there are a vast number 
of motions going on in the system which proceed 
wholly independent of volition. Many of these arise THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM. 
49 
under the influence of the pneumogastric and spinal 
accessory nerves, also from the ganglionic or sympa- 
thetic system, the nerves of which supply the func- 
tions of organic life; but whatever motions are 
produced under the influence of nerve-action, are 
telegraphed back to the brain by reflex action. 
When the organism is in health, the motions that 
proceed in the various departments of organic life 
are so mechanically perfect, that they produce no 
other sensation than a generally exhilarating realiza- 
tion of life; but when, on the contrary, there is a 
lack of equilibrium in the organism, and torpidity or 
excessive action ensues, the result is disease, and the 
announcement of its presence is telegraphed to the 
brain in the sensation called pain. 
Possibly it may be argued against this position, 
that the ganglionic nerves (the system which sup- 
plies the viscera, and is profusely distributed about 
the head and trunk) are neither sensory nor motor, 
hence that those portions of the organism supplied 
by the sympathetic system do not convey to the 
brain the sensations of pain. 
To fully comprehend the working of this complex 
scheme of nervous action, we must consider the 
nature and origin of the ganglionic or sympathetic 
system, and its connection with the cerebro-spinal 
nerves. (See Fig. 5.) 
The sympathetic system consists of a double chain 
of nervous ganglia, running along the front and sides 
of the spinal column, and connected with each other 
by slender longitudinal filaments. Each ganglion is 
reinforced by a motor and a sensitive filament, de- 50 
ELECTRO- THERA PE VTICS. 
rived from the cerebro spinal system, and thus the 
organs supplied by the sympathetic nerves are 
brought directly into communication with the brain, 
which is kept informed of all the influences operating 
on the various organs supplied by the sympathetica. 
The nerves of this system are distributed to the heart, 
liver, spleen, kidneys, intestines, generative organs, 
head, neck, lungs, and blood-vessels. 
The whole organism abounds in ganglia, which 
form plexuses of glands and nerves, and completely 
overlay the organs which they supply. Masses of 
sympathetic ganglia abound in the abdominal re- 
gions, the largest of which, from its numerous inos- 
culations, has been named the solar plexus; but the 
entire system communicates, first with each ramifica- 
tion of its own system, next with the cerebro-spinal 
system, and finally with all the internal viscera. 
Notwithstanding the connections between the two 
systems are preserved throughout the body, they are 
nevertheless much scattered ; and as the sensory and 
motor nerves do not penetrate into the internal por- 
tions of the organism, where the sympatbetics most 
abound, it follows that the telegraphic communica- 
tions which the latter send off to the brain must 
proceed more slowly, as they act through a sec- 
ondary system. It is for this reason that the parts 
of the body immediately under the influence of the 
cerebro-spinal nerves are more sensitive to pain than 
those supplied by the sympatbetics. The sensations 
travel more slowly, and the motions, being purely 
instinctive, do not report themselves to the brain as 
directly as those operating immediately under the REVIEW. 
51 
influence of the will. Still, they are reported, and 
it is by this intimate connection between the two 
systems that the brain is kept informed of all that 
is transpiring in the body-of all its states and con- 
ditions-and that without the fatigue and w'ear 
which would ensue if every motion were immedi- 
ately under the influence of the will. 
In the foregoing brief summary of the action of 
the two systems of nerves, their mutual relations to 
each other, and the intelligence resident in the brain, 
we may clearly understand how the skilful physician 
is enabled to interpret the nerve-language which as- 
sumes the tone of pain ; and the only marvel is that 
the experience and observation of more than two 
thousand years of medical practice have not been 
sufficient to reduce sympathetic indications to a far 
more exact status than that which they at present 
occupy. 
At this juncture let us review the functions of the 
brain and nervous systems. 
First. The cerebrum is obviously the seat of con- 
sciousness. Structureless and insignificant as may 
appear the matter of this grand cranial instrument, 
considered in its physiological workings it is the seat 
of consciousness. 
Second. The cerebellum is the governing organ, 
which controls and directs in harmonious combina- 
tions all the purely instinctive motions of the system, 
and enables the will, emanating from cerebral influ- 
ences, to put designs into execution. 
Third. The medulla oblongata keeps the gate 
through which the mandates of the mind pass forth, 52 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
and the obedient responses of the muscles, or the 
complaints of any diseased organs inform the con- 
sciousness of their condition. 
Fourth. The cerebro-spinal nerves, with their dual 
functions of motion and sensation, provoke the mus- 
cles to act, and report faithfully back to the brain the 
sensations which all such actions have produced. 
Fifth. The pneumogastric and spinal accessory 
nerves, together with the whole array of the sym- 
pathetic system, pierce into the dark and hidden 
places removed from the exercise of the will; but 
still they cannot escape from the duty of reporting 
their condition upon the little fibres of the cerebro- 
spinal system with which they are connected, and 
this again sounds the alarm in the tones of pain 
through the cerebral hemispheres, where it reports 
itself, with the accompanying demand upon the 
physician's art to restore the equilibrium which any 
suffering organ has lost. 
The nervous fluid is compared by many authorita- 
tive writers to electric action. The author makes 
this claim, and thereupon bases her system of Electro- 
Therapeutics. Moreover, claiming that the nervous 
system makes a correct record of all diseases, and all 
the conditions under which the organism is or may 
be laboring, she asserts that it can locate and disclose 
the exact extent of the degeneration which has beset 
hidden organs, internal tissues, or tumors imbedded in 
secret places; making a chart upon the brain, which 
the author's discovery of Electro-Cranial Diagnosis 
can delineate if properly addressed by intelligent 
and informed practitioners. CHAPTER III. 
ORGANS OF GENERATION. 
The pelvis, or basin, situated in the adult about 
the middle of the body, is, as before stated, a large 
bony cavity, open above and below, and contains a 
portion of the intestines and the urinary and genital 
organs; serving as well for the strong points of ar- 
ticulations of the lower limbs, the attachment of 
their muscles, and the accomplishment of their move- 
ments. It is composed of four flat, broad, unequally 
thick bones, which are different in shape, size, and 
association, touching and articulated at some part of 
their surface, and closely united by extensions of 
muscular fibres or ligamentous fasciae. 
The pelvis supports the vertebral column behind, 
and is sustained in front by the ossa femorum, or 
thigh bone. 
The sacrum and coccyx form the median line of 
the junction of the posterior pelvic bones, and the 
two anterior bones are united before and at the 
sides-called illio. (See Figs. 15 and 16.) 
The chief office of the pelvis seems to be, in the 
female, the protection of the foetus, and the parts 
inservient to reproduction. 
The organs of reproduction, differing in the male 
and female, bear a singular resemblance in the pecu- 
53 54 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
liar affections to which they are susceptible, and have 
compensative parts, as will be hereafter explained. 
In the female the parts of generation are compli- 
cated. Those inservient to copulation are the vulva 
and vagina; others to conception, and the protection 
of the foetus for a determined time, as the uterus, situ- 
ated between the bladder and rectum. The uterus is 
flattened on. the front surface, and is nearly an inch 
in thickness; it is two inches broad at the fundus, or 
base, and becomes narrower towards the vagina, and 
is called at its termination the cervix or neck, to 
distinguish it from the rest of the organ, called the 
body-corpus uteri. At the point where the body 
of the uterus is continuous below with the neck, it 
is constricted, forming the internal orifice. (Seo 
Fig. 13.) 
The appendages of the uterus are six in number, 
-i.e., two Fallopian tubes, the two ovaries, and the 
two round ligaments. These structures, nerves, 
blood-vessels, and some muscular fibres are inclosed 
in two folds of the peritoneum, which constitutes 
the broad ligaments. Their position is as follows: 
in front are the round ligaments; the Fallopian tubes 
occupy the free margin of the broad ligaments; the 
ovaries and their ligaments are behind and below the 
Fallopian tubes. (See Fig. 12, No. 1.) 
The Fallopian tubes convey the ova from the ova- 
ries to the cavity of the uterus, situated in the free 
margin of the broad ligaments, extending from each 
superior angle of the uterus to the sides of the 
pelvis. The length of each tube is about four inches; 
the aperture or canal is exceedingly minute; com- THE OVARIES. 
55 
mencing at the connection with the uterus, it gradu- 
ally widens and terminates in a bell-like orifice with 
a series of fringe-like processes termed fimbriae, one 
of which is connected with the outer end of the 
ovary, as may be seen in Fig. 12, No. 1. 
The ovaries are oval-shaped, elongated bodies, one 
on each side of the uterus, in the back part of the 
broad ligament, under and back of the Fallopian 
tubes. 
The ovaries are connected to the uterus by liga- 
ments, associated with their inner extremity ; and at 
the outer extremity, to the above-mentioned fimbri- 
ated extremity of the Fallopian tubes by a short 
cord or ligament; in the posterior part to the broad 
ligament. 
Each of the ovaries is about an inch and a half in 
length, and three-quarters of an inch in width, and 
about one-third of an inch thick-their weight from 
one to two drachms. Imbedded in the tissue of 
the internal surface of the ovaries are the Graafian 
vesicles, containing the ova. The fluid contained in 
these vesicles is albuminous, and holds the ovum. 
The Graafian vesicles gradually moving, work out to 
the surface of the ovaries, burst, and liberate the 
fluid and ova, passing into the Fallopian tubes ; the 
fimbriated extremities are supposed to grasp the 
ovaries, and hence the mature ova are conducted 
through the tube into the Fallopian tubes, and con- 
veyed to the uterus, and at regular periods are 
eliminated from the uterus, producing menstruation, 
unless the ovum is fecundated. (Fig. 12, No. 2.) 
The two round ligaments of the uterus are two 56 
ELECTR O- THE RAPE UTICS. 
round cords, composed of tissue, nerves, vessels, and 
fibres, between four and five inches long, situated be- 
low and in front of the Fallopian tubes, between 
layers of the broad ligaments. They commence on 
each side at the superior angle of the uterus, pass 
forward through the internal abdominal ring, along 
the inguinal canal, to the labia majora, or lips of the 
vulva. 
The menstrual flow is a kind of capillary discharge, 
and is supplied, according to authorized physiolo- 
gists, from the uterine mucous membrane, and is the 
consequence, and, at the same time, the natural ter- 
mination of the periodical congestion of the accessory 
parts.- Vide Dalton's Physiology. 
The peculiai- correspondence, and yet marked dif- 
ference, in the male and female organs of generation, 
has frequently been commented upon by physiolo- 
gists. A celebrated writer has avowed that the idio- 
syncrasies of sex bore such strong analogy that the 
male was only the female turned inside out, for the 
ovaries and uterus in the female corresponded to 
the testes and prostate glands in the male (see Fig. 
14); and so the author has found in this system of 
Electro-Therapeutics, that the peculiar abdominal 
weight, caused from overstrained ligaments holding 
the genito-urinary organs in position, was to be ad- 
dressed in a similar way in both sexes: and whereas 
the male is more subject to prolapse of the bladder 
than is the female, by reason of the incumbent weight 
and strain upon the organs, the uterus in the female 
is the organ for compensative displacements. 
The weight and pulling of connective tissues and THE GENITO-URINARY ORGANS. 
57 
deep fascia extending beyond and above the perito- 
neum, yet a part of such, produce a peculiarly no- 
ticeable distressed tone of depression in the voice, 
and the unmistakable lassitude in both sexes, when 
any displacement or pressure exists in the genito- 
urinary organs; hence the importance in these organs 
for health, and that the ligaments and muscles be 
firm and unrelaxed. 
Many of the weakening difficulties which drain 
the vitality of both sexes are of the same nature, and 
must be treated in similar manner. For instance, 
leucorrhoea in the female and seminal emissions from 
the male bear so strong an analogy they should 
meet with the same constitutional treatments in 
both sexes. CHAPTER IV. 
ANATOMICAL AND PHYSIOLOGICAL ILLUSTRATIONS. 
The purpose of this chapter is merely to illustrate 
such organs, and circulatory, nervous, and other sys- 
tems as are especially and peculiarly dealt with by 
the author in her method of Electro-Therapeutics. 
To her publishers, also to Dr. John Dalton's and 
Dr. Henry Gray's publisher, Mr. Henry C. Lea, the 
author has occasion to extend thanks for their cour- 
tesy in allowing copies from the engravings in their 
respective works upon Human Physiology and Hu- 
man Anatomy. 
To those seeking a fuller knowledge, the works 
upon anatomy and physiology of Gray and Dalton 
are highly commended as explicit and authoritative. 
58 CEREBRUM, ETC. 
59 
BASE OF BRAIN. 
Fig. 1. 
1. Anterior lobes of the cerebrum. 
2. Middle lobes. 3. Posterior lobes. 
4, 5. Anterior and posterior extremi- 
ties of the great longitudinal 
fissure. 
6. Sylvian fissure. 
7. Anterior perforated space. 
8. Infundibulum. 
9. Mammillary eminences. 
10. Posterior perforated space. 
11. Crura of the cerebrum. 
12. Pons. 13. Medulla oblongata. 
14. Pyramidal bodies. 
14*. Decussation of the pyramids. 
15. Olivary body. 
16. Kestiform body. 
17. Hemispheres of the cerebellum. 
18. Vermiform process at the bottom 
of the fissure separating the 
latter. 
19. Crus of the cerebellum. 
20. Pneumogastric lobule of the cere- 
bellum. 
21. Fissure which accommodates the 
olfactory nerve, 22. 
23. Bulb of the olfactory nerve. 
24. Optic commissure 
25. Oculo-motor nerve. 
26. Pathetic nerve. 
27. Trifacial nerve. 
28. Abducent nerve. 
29. Facial nerve. 30. Auditory nerve. 
31. Glosso-pharyngeal nerve. 
32. Pneumogastric nerve. 
33. Accessory nerve. 
34. Hypoglossal nerve. 60 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
SECTION OF THE BRAIN ALONG THE GREAT LONGI- 
TUDINAL FISSURE. 
Fig. 2. 
1. Medulla oblongata. 
2. Pons. 
3. Crus of the cerebrum. 
4. Arborescent appearance in section 
of the fundamental portion of 
, the cerebellum. 
5. Left hemisphere of the cerebellum. 
6. Inner surface of the left hemi- 
sphere of the cerebrum. 
7. Corpus callosum. 
8. Pellucid septum. 
9. Fornix. 
10. Anterior crus of the fornix de- 
scending to join the correspond- 
ing mammillary eminence. 
11. Fissure through which the inter- 
posed velum (12) is introduced 
into the third ventricle. 
13. Pineal gland. 
14. Its peduncle. 
15. Rests on the thalamus within the 
third ventricle. 
1G. Posterior commissure of the latter. 
17. Middle commissure. 
18. Anterior commissure. 
19. Foramen of communication be- 
tween the third and lateral ven- 
tricles. 
20. Optic nerve. 
21. Pituitary body. 
22. Infundibulum. 
23. Mammillary eminence. 
24. Oculo-motor nerve. 
25. Posterior perforated space. 
26. Fourth ventricle. 
27. Valve of the brain. 
28. Quadrigeminal body. 
29. Entrance from the third to the 
fourth ventricle. 
30. 31, 32. Anterior, middle, and pos- 
terior lobes of the cerebrum. PNEUMOGASTRIC NERVE. 
61 
PNEUMOGASTRIC NERVE WITH ITS PRINCIPAL 
BRANCHES. 
1. Pharyngeal branch. 
2. Superior laryngeal branch. 
3. Inferior laryngeal. 
4. Pulmonary branches. 
5. Stomach. 
6. Liver. 
Although this great nerve-at its . 
origin sensitive-when ramified into 
its tributaries is considered extremely 
dull and comparatively non-sensitivo, 
it contributes in its distribution of 
nervous force to both muscular coats 
and mucous membranes of the organs 
to which it relates. Its origin in the 
middle of the back portion of the me- 
dulla oblongata, and its direct distri- 
bution to four vital organs,-namely, 
the heart, lungs, stomach, and liver,-render it im- 
portant. 
Fig. 8. 62 
ELECTRO- TH ERAPE UT1CS. 
CEREBRO SPINAL SYSTEM OF MAN. 
Fig. 4. 
1. Cerebrum. 
2. Cerebellum. 
3. 
3. 
3. 
Spinal cord 
and nerves. 
4. 
4. 
Brachial nerves. 
5.' 
5. 
Sacral nerves. 
The spinal cord is 
cylindrical, and run- 
ning from one end of 
the spinal canal to 
the other, and con- 
nected at its anterior 
extremity with the 
ganglia of the brain, 
it is divided, by an 
anterior and posterior 
median fissure, into 
two lateral halves, 
which still remain 
connected with each 
other by a central 
mass or commissure. 
Its inner portions are occupied by a gray matter, 
which forms a continuous ganglionic chain, running 
from one extremity of the cord to the other; its outer 
portions are composed of white substance, the fila- 
ments of which run for the most part in a longitudi- 
nal direction, connecting the different parts of the SPINAL CORD. 
63 
cord with each other, and the cord itself with the 
ganglia of the brain. 
The pairs of nerves given off from the spinal cord 
are larger where the nerves are distributed to the 
arms and legs; for instance, the cervical nerves 
which supply the arms, and the sacral nerves which 
supply the legs, are larger than the dorsal and lum- 
bar nerves. By examination of Fig. 4, the philosophy 
of placing the electricity on the cervical vertebra to 
affect the arms and shoulders can be comprehended. 
Moreover; considering that the cerebro-spinal system, 
consisting as it does of a series of ganglia sending 
out nerves to the corresponding parts of the body 
and the spinal cord, supplies the integument and 
muscles of neck, trunk, and extremities with the 
ganglia of the brain, besides supplying the corre- 
sponding parts of the head, presiding over the organs 
of the special sense, and performing various other 
functions of purely nervous character; the fact that 
the author's system of Electro-Therapeutics is so fre- 
quently addressed to the basilar region, and down 
the length of the vertebral column, as the base upon 
which to work out a cure, is possessed of fundamental 
soundness, and evolved from purely physiological 
laws. 64 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 
According to Dalton's Human Physiology, the 
sympathetic nerve is distributed to organs over 
which the consciousness and will 
have no immediate control. It 
serves as a medium of reflex ac- 
tion between the sensitive and mo- 
tor part of the digestive, excretory, 
and generative apparatuses; and 
it is certain that it also takes part 
in the reflex actions in which the 
cerebro-spinal system is at the 
same time interested. There are, 
accordingly, three different kinds 
of reflex action taking place 
wholly or partially through the 
sympathetic system, which may 
be observed in the living body. 
1. Reflex actions taking place 
from the internal organs through 
the sympathetic and cerebro-spinal systems, to the 
voluntary muscles and sensitive surfaces. The con- 
vulsions of young children are often owing to irri- 
tation of indigested food in the intestinal canal. 
Attacks of indigestion are also known to produce 
temporary amaurosis, double lesion, strabismus, and 
even hemiplegia. Nausea and a diminished or ca- 
pricious appetite are often prominent symptoms of 
early pregnancy, induced by the peculiar condition 
of the uterine mucous membrane. 
Fig. 5 No. 1. SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 
65 
2. Reflex action taking place from the sensitive sur- 
faces, through the eerebro-spinal and sympathetic sys- 
tems, to the involuntary muscles and secreting organs. 
Imprudent exposure of the integument to cold and 
wet will often induce diarrhoea. Mental and moral 
impressions, conveyed through the spinal senses, 
will affect the motions of the heart and disturb the 
processes of digestion and secretion. Terror, or an 
absorbing interest of any kind, will produce a dila- 
tation of the pupil, and communicate in this way a 
peculiarly wild and unusual expression to the eye. 
Disagreeable sights, odors, or even unpleasant occur- 
rences, are capable of hastening or arresting the 
menstrual discharge, or of inducing premature de- 
livery. 
3. Reflex actions taking place through the sympa- 
thetic system, from one part of the internal organs 
to another. The contact of food with the mucous 
membrane of the small intestine excites a peristaltic 
movement of the muscular coat. The mutual action 
of digestive, urinary, and internal generative organs 
upon each other takes place through the medium of 
the sympathetic ganglia and their nerves. The vari- 
ations of the capillary circulation in different abdom- 
inal viscera, corresponding with the state of activity 
oi' repose of their associate organs, are to be referred 
to a similar nervous influence. These phenomena 
are not accompanied by any consciousness on the 
part of the individual, nor by any apparent inter- 
vention of the eerebro-spinal system. 
The author here must subjoin that the co-operation 
and sympathy existent between these great sympa- 66 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
thetic, ganglionic, and cerebro-spinal systems-in 
fact, the totality of forces and nervous intelligences 
making man-has rendered her discovery of cranial 
diagnosis but a translation of causes, whose effects 
the physiologists have often attested but never here- 
tofore explained. However, the author cannot re- 
frain from again expressing her gratitude that Dalton 
and others have rendered the path so clear by their 
delineation of revealed nature in their exhaustive 
works. 
SYMPATHETIC NERVE, ACCORDING TO GRAY'S 
ANATOMY 
Fig. 5-No. 2. 
1. Carotid plexus. 
2. Superior cervical ganglion. 
3. Middle cervical ganglion. 
4. Inferior cervical ganglion. 
5. Pharyngeal branches. 
6. Cardiac branches. 
7. Deep cardiac plexus. 
8. Superficial cardiac plexus. 
9. Dorsal ganglia. 
10. Dorsal ganglia. 
11. Solar plexus. 
12. Aortic plexus. 
13. Hypogastric plexus. 
14. Inferior hypogastric. 
15. Sacral ganglia. 
16. Lumbar ganglia. TRACHEA, LUNGS, AND HEART. 
67 
FRONT VIEW OF THE TRACHEA, LUNGS, AND HEART. 
Fig. 6. 
1. Larynx. 
2. Crico-thyroid muscle. 
3. Trachea. 
4. 5, 6. Upper, middle, and lower 
lobes of the right lung. 
7, 8. Upper and lower lobes of the 
left lung; the anterior part of 
both lungs is drawn aside by 
hooks so as to expose to view (9) 
the heart contained within its 
pericardium. 
10. Anterior mediastinal space, the 
line on each side indicating the 
position at which the pleurie are 
reflected from the pericardium 
to the front wall of the thorax. 
11. Left subclavian artery. 
12. Left common carotid. 
13. Right common carotid. 
14. Right subclavian. 
15. Left innominate vein. 
Ifi. Right innominate vein. 
17, 18. Left subclavian and internal 
jugular veins. 
19, 20. Right internal jugular and sub- 
clavian veins. 
21. Root of the lung. 68 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
THE EIGHTH PAIR OF NERVES. 
Course of distribution of the eighth pair of nerves, 
consisting of three nerves,-i.e., glosso-pharyngeal, 
pneumogastric, and spinal accessory. 
Fig. 7. 
1. Glosso-pharyngeal. 
2. Pneumogastric. 
3. Spinal accessory. 
4. Stylo-glossus. 
6. Sterno-mastoid. 
6. Jugular vein. 
7. Internal carotid. 
8. Stylopharyngeal. 
9. Hyoglossus. 
10. Common carotid. 
11. Trapezius. 
12. Subclavian. 
13. Thyroid body. 
14. Super-laryngeal. 
15. External laryngeal. 
16. Inferior laryngeal. 
17. Cardiac. 
18. Arch of the aorta. 
19. Pulmonary branches. 
20. Diaphragm. 
21. Left pneumogastric. 
22. Anterior surface of stomach. FRONT VIEW OF THORAX. 
69 
FRONT VIEW OF THE THORAX. 
The thorax is bounded in front by the sternum, 
the six upper costal cartilages, the ribs, and inter- 
costal muscles; at the sides, by the ribs and inter- 
costal muscles; and behind, by the same structures 
and the dorsal portion of the vertebral column. 
Fig. 8. 
1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 
7. 
11. Superior cava. 
12. Aorta. 
13. Right auricle. 
15. Stomach. 
16. Transverse colon. 
17. Liver. 
True, or sternum ribs. 
8. 
9. 
io. 
Three false, or short ribs. 
Two floating ribs. 
The thorax is a conical framework, formed partly 
of bones, and partly of the soft tissues by which they 70 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE UTICS. 
are connected together. It is supported, and its back 
part is formed by the middle, ox* dorsal, region of the 
spine. It is narrow above, broad below, flattened 
before and behind, and somewhat cordiform on a 
transverse section. 
The superior opening of the thorax is bounded on 
each side by the first rib; in front, by the upper 
border of the sternum; and behind, by the first dor- 
sal vertebra. It is broader from side to side than 
from before backward; and its direction is backward 
and upward. 
The lower opening, or base, is bounded in front by 
the ensiform cartilage; behind, by the last dorsal 
vertebra; and on each side of the last rib, the dia- 
phragm fills the intervening space. Its direction 
is obliquely downward and backward, so that the 
cavity of the thorax is much deepex* on the pos- 
terior than on the anterior wall. It is wider trans- 
versely than from before backward. Its outei' sur- 
face is convex; but it is more flattened at the centre 
than at the sides. Its floor is higher on the right 
than on the left side, corresponding to the upper 
border of the fifth costal cartilage on the right side; 
and to the corresponding part of the sixth cartilage 
on the left side. 
The parts which pass through the upper opening 
of the thorax are, from before backward, the sterno- 
hyoid and the sterno-thyroid muscles, the remains 
of the thymus gland, the trachea, oesophagus, thoracic 
duct, and the longus colli muscles on each side; on 
the sides, the arteria innominata, the left carotid and 
left subclavian arteries, the internal mammary and REFLECTIONS OF THE PERITONEUM. 
71 
superior intercostal arteries, the right and left venae 
innominatae, and the inferior thyroid veins, the pneu- 
mogastric, sympathetic, phrenic, and cardiac nerves, 
the anterior branch of the first dorsal nerve, and the 
recurrent laryngeal nerve of the left side. The apex 
of each lung, covered by the pleura, also projects 
through this aperture, a little above the margin of 
the first rib. 
The viscera contained in the thorax are: the heart, 
enclosed in its membranous bag; the pericardium; 
and the lungs, invested by the pleurae. 
THE REFLECTIONS OF THE PERITONEUM. 
1. Upper segment of the sacrum. 
2. First lumbar vertebra. 
3. Dorsal vertebrae. 
4. Diaphragm. 
5. Liver. 
6. Stomach. 
7. Transverse colon. 
8. Small intestine. 
9. Duodenum. 
10. Pancreas. 
11. Rectum. 
12. Vagina and uterus. 
13. Urinary bladder. 
14. Pubis. 
15. Greater cavity of the peritoneum. 
16. Lesser cavity. 
17. Section of a lateral ligament of the 
liver. 
18. Gastro-hepatic omentum: the ar- 
row indicates the communication, 
at the right border of the latter, 
of the great and lesser cavities 
of the peritoneum. 
19. Great omentum. 
20. Transverse mesocolon. 
21. Mesentery. 
22. Recto-uterine pouch. 
23. Vesico-uterine pouch. 
24. Portion of peritoneum lining the 
anterior wall of the abdomen. 
Fig. 9. 72 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
ALIMENTARY CANAL, STOMACH, SPLEEN, AND BOWELS. 
Fig. 10. 
a. (Esophagus. 
1. Stomach. 
2. Duodenum. 
3. Small intestine. 
4. Termination of the ileum. 
5. Caecum. 
6. Vermiform appendix. 
7. Ascending colon. 
8. Transverse colon. 
9. Descending colon. 
10. Sigmoid flexure of the colon. 
11. Bectum. 
12. Spleen. 
b. Anus. 
From the tongue to the 
anus is a consecutive ca- 
nal with a similar mu- 
cous lining. The author 
has found in states of 
constipation, where there 
existed congestion of the 
alimentary canal, a most 
efficacious electric treat- 
ment by placing the 
spatula, or tongue-instru- 
ment, on the tongue,- 
positive pole; and an 
electrode at the anus,- 
negative pole. See treatment for Constipation. LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF A KIDNEY. 
73 
LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF A KIDNEY. 
1. Cortical substance. 
2. Renal pyramid. 
3. Renal papillse. 
4. Pelvis. 
5. Ureter. - 
6. Renal artery. 
7. Renal vein. 
8. Branches of the latter vessels 
in the sinus of the kidney. 
Fig. 11. 
The kidneys are two 
glandular organs deep- 
ly situated in the lum- 
bar region; lying one 
on each side of the 
vertebral column, the 
right a little higher 
than the left. They 
are opposite the upper 
two or three lumbar 
and the last dorsal vertebrae, inclining toward each 
other above, and are maintained in this position by 
their vessels, together with a quantity of loose areo- 
lar tissue usually containing much fat. Their ante- 
rior surface is more convex than the posterior, and 
their upper extremity is larger than the lower, and 
has attached to it the supra-renal body. 
The right kidney in front is in contact with the 
liver, the descending portion of the duodenum, and 
the ascending colon ; the left with the spleen, pan- 
creas, stomach, and descending colon. 
The kidneys are smooth, dark red, compressed oval 
bodies with a notch on the inner side ; the form being 
so characteristic that similar-shaped bodies are com- 74 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
monly called kidney-shaped, or reniform. They vary 
in size, but ordinarily measure about four inches in 
length, two inches in breadth, and one inch in thick- 
ness, and weigh about four ounces. 
THE UTERUS AND APPENDAGES. 
Fig. 12-No. 1. 
1. Uterus, with its peritoneal cover- 
ing partially retained. 
2. Its fundus. 
3. Its neck, with the fore part of the 
attachment of the vagina re- 
moved. 
4. Mouth of the uterus. 
5. Interior of the vagina. 
6. Broad ligament, removed on the 
opposite side. 
7. Position of the ovary behind the 
broad ligament. 
8. Round ligament. 
9. Oviduct, or Fallopian tube. 
10. Its fimbriated extremity. 
11. Ovary. 
12. Ovarian ligament. 
13. Process connecting the fimbriated 
extremity with the ovary. 
14. Cut border of the broad ligament. THE OVARIES. 
75 
THE OVARIES. 
This cut represents the left ovary, and is about the 
same size as in the human body. 
Fig. 12-No. 2. 
1. Broad ligament. 
2. Fallopian tube, or oviduct. 
3. Its canal. 
4. Its fimbriated extremity. 
5. Mouth of the latter, or pavilion. 
6. Process attached to the ovary. 
7. 8. Ovarian ligament. 
9. Orifice from which an ovum re- 
cently escaped. 
10. A cicatrix. 
11. Parovarium. 
12. Remains of the duct of Muller. 
From a virgin of about eighteen 
years of age. 76 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
SECTION OF FEMALE PELVIS SHOWING POSITION OF 
VISCERA. 
Fig. 13. 
1. Sacrum. 
2. Coccyx. 
3. Pubic symphysis. 
4. Rectum. 
5. One of its valvular folds. 
6. Anus. 
7. Uterus. 
8. Vagina. 
9. Right labium. 
10. Kight nympha. 
11. Clitoris, attached by the suspensory 
ligament to the front of the pubic 
symphysis. 
12. Glans. 
13. Prepuce. 
14. Urethra. 
15. Entrance of the vagina. 
16. Bladder. MALE PELVIS AND ITS CONTENTS. 
77 
SIDE VIEW OF MALE PELVIS AND ITS CONTENTS. 
Fig. 14. 
1. The right pubis sawed through. 
2. Sacrum. 
3. Bladder. 
4. Its summit. 
5. Its fundus. 
6. Right ureter. 
7. Neck of the bladder. 
8. Attachment of the pelvic fascia. 
9. Prostate gland. 
10. Membranous portion of the ure- 
thra. 
11. Triangular ligament. 
12. Suburethral gland between the 
two layers of the latter 
13. 14. Spongy body. 
15. Right cavernous body. 
16. Sigmoid flexure of colon. 
17. Recto-vesical fold of peritoneum. 
18. Rectum, with its muscular coat 
seen. 
19. Right seminal vesicle. 
20. Spermatic duct. 
21. Pelvic fascia descending to the 
rectum. 
22. Anal elevator muscle. 
23. Anal sphincter. 
24. Union of the superficial perineal 
fascia with the triangular liga- 
ment or deep fascia. 
25. Peritoneum passing from the sum- 
mit of the bladder to the ante- 
rior abdominal wall. 78 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
LIGAMENTS OF THE PELVIS AND HIP-JOINT. 
Fig. 15. 
1. Lower part of the anterior 
vertebral ligament. 
2. Pubic symphysis. 
3. Ilio-lumbar ligament. 
4. Sacro-iliac symphysis, with the 
anterior sacro-iliac ligament. 
5. Obturator membrane. 
6. Edge of the tendon of the ex- 
ternal oblique muscle of the 
abdomen, technically named 
Poupart's ligament. 
7. Extension of the latter along 
the pectineal line named 
Gimbernat's ligament. 
8. Capsular ligament of the hip- 
joint. 
9. A strong accessory band of the 
latter ligament. FEMALE PELVIS. 
79 
FRONT VIEW OF A FEMALE PELVIS. 
Fig. 16. 
1. Last lumbar vertebra. 
2. Intervertebral ligaments. 
3. Sacrum, the figure being placed on 
its promontory. 
4. Transverse lines indicating the 
original separation of the sacrum 
into five vertebral segments. 
5. End of the coccyx. 
6. Iliac fossa. 
7. 8. Anterior superior, and inferior 
spinous processes. 
9. Acetabulum. 
10. Its notch on the inner side. 
11. Body of the ischium. 
12. Tuberosity of the ischium. 
13. Spine of the ischium, seen through 
the obturator foramen. 
14. Body of the pubis. 
15. Symphysis of the pubis. 
16. Arch of the pubis. 
17. Upper part of the body of the 
pubis. 
18. Spine of the pubis. 
19. Pectineal line. 
20. Ilio-pubic eminence. 
21. Great sacro-sciatic notch. 80 
ELECTRO- TH ER APE UTICS. 
LYMPHATICS AND LACTEALS. 
Lymphatic vessels are found in almost every part 
of the organism, arising at the surface of membranes 
and in the tissue of organs; they 
carry into the veins the lymph 
from respective parts. The lym- 
phatics are of two orders,-i.e., 
superficial and deep seated; they 
often cross each other in their tor- 
tuous course, and their anastomoses 
are very numerous. Without a 
very definite knowledge of the re- 
mote arrangements of the vessels, 
we can only say that all the lym- 
phatics of the body ultimately dis- 
charge themselves at the junction 
of the subclavian and internal jug- 
ular veins. 
The lacteals are the absorbants 
which originate in the small intes- 
tines, and supply the mammary glands with milk 
during the period of gestation. During digestion 
these vessels contain a transparent, colorless lymph. 
Whilst intestinal absorption is progressing after a 
meal containing fatty ingredients, the lacteals may 
be seen as white opaque vessels, distended with milky 
chyle; but the presence of chyle is only transitory. 
The nutritive materials soon pass by catalyctic trans- 
formation into other forms, and become assimilated 
to the pre-existing elements of the circulating fluids, 
and belong to the great system of nutrition, absorp- 
tion, re-absorption, secretion, and elimination. 
Fig. 17. PROPORTIONS OF BLOOD. 
81 
Normal temperature of adult 98° to 100°. 
AVERAGE PULSATION PER MINUTE: 
At birth 130 to 140 
Puberty 80 to 85 
Adult . 70 to 75 
Old age 50 to 65 
PROPORTIONS OF BLOOD. 
Average weight of blood, in proportion to entire 
weight of body, is as 1 to 8, consequently the body 
of a man weighing 145 pounds will contain about 18 
pounds of blood. 
According to another authority: 
Blood arterial, 15 to 20 pounds. 
Proportion of arterial blood to venous, 4 to 9. 
The average proportion of each organic element in 
1000 parts of healthy blood, according to Le Cann, 
and MM. Andrae and Gavarret: fibrin, 3; red cor- 
puscles, 127 ; solid matter of serum, 80; water, 790; 
but in inflammation the amount of fibrin may be in- 
creased to 10, and the albumen diminished, as in 
Bright's disease of the kidneys, etc.; and in fevers, 
etc., the fibrin diminishes in quantity. 
DIMENSIONS OF ORGANS. 
The average weight of each organ in the adult, 
according to Quain, is as follows: 
Heart, male 11 ounces. 
" female 9 " 
Brain, male 49J " 
" female 44 « 82 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
Spinal cord 1 to If ounces. 
Liver 50 to 60 " 
Pancreas 2J to 3| " 
Spleen 5 to 7 " 
Lungs, male 45 ounces. 
" female 32 " 
Thyroid cartilage 1 to 2 ounces. 
Kidneys 4j " 
Supra-renal capsules 2 drachms. 
Prostate 6 " 
Testes t to 1 ounce. 
Unimpregnated uterus 7 to 12 drachms. 
According to other authors the capacity and size 
of various organs: 
Gall-Bladder, about 4 inches long. 
" " capacity 1| fluid-ounces. 
Spleen 4 to 5 inches long. 
" 2 to 3 inches wide. 
" 1£ inches thick. 
Kidneys 3 to 5 inches long. 
" 2 to 3 inches wide. 
" 1 inch, and over, thick. 
EXUDATION AND ABSORPTION OF THE LYMPHATIC 
SYSTEM. 
According to Dalton the total quantity of all the 
fluids secreted and reabsorbed during 24 hours in- 
dicates the activity with which endosmosis and exos- 
mosis goes on in the living body. In the following 
table, the quantities are all calculated for a man 
weighing 140 pounds. EXUDATION AND ABSORPTION. 
83 
Fluids Transuded and Reabsorbed 
Saliva 1280 grammes. 
Gastric juice 3000 " 
Bile 1000 " 
Pancreatic juice 800 " 
Lymph 2000 " 
Total 8080 
A quantity of the animal fluids, averaging from 14 
to 18 pounds (12 per cent, of the bodily weight), 
transude through the internal membranes and are 
restored to the blood in the course of a day. 
This will in part demonstrate to the thoughtful the 
necessity of keeping the alimentary system in a 
healthy state of nutrition, and will likewise prove 
that the ingredients of the digestive secretions affect 
the blood. It is the intimate relation and co-ordi- 
nation of every atom of the component parts of the 
human organism which requires differential treat- 
ment and care in order to preserve the normal con- 
dition of health and development, and which de- 
mands that the vital changes constantly going on 
must be re-supplied. 
Dalton estimates that the renovation of the body 
by the nutritive process equalizes the entire quantity 
of the material assimilated and that decomposed by 
the living body. The food taken into the alimentary 
canal absorbed by the blood after digestion, with the 
quantity of oxygen appropriated from the atmosphere 
in respiration, and the amount of carbonic acid evolved 
in the breath, with that of the various excretory sub- 84 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
stances discharged from the body; are equal in vol- 
ume. The following table shows in an approximative 
manner the quantity of these different ingredients 
of ingesta and egesta: 
Absorbed in 24 hours. 
Pounds. 
Oxygen 1.470 
Water 4.535 
Albuminous matter305 
Starch660 
Fat220 
Salts040 
Total 7.230 
Discharged during 24 hours. 
Pounds. 
Carbonic acid 1.630 
Aqueous vapor 1.555 
Perspiration 1.930 
Water of the urine 2.020 
Urea and salts137 
Faeces... 358 
Total 7.230 
The average amount of faeces discharged in 24 
hours is from 4 to 6 ounces, when the amount of 
solid food taken may have been 45 ounces. 
The average amount of urine secreted in 24 hours 
is 52| fluid-ounces. 
In a healthy human subject of average weight (140 
pounds) a little more than seven pounds are thus dis- 
charged and absorbed. 
For the benefit of those who practise the Cranial 
Diagnosis the author inserts the following table of 
the nerves: CRANIAL NERVES. 
85 
TABLE OF THE CRANIAL NERVES. 
1. First nerve.Filaments to the nose. 
2. Second nerveTo retina of the eyeball. 
3. Third nerve......To muscles of the orbit. 
4. Fourth nerveTo superior oblique muscle. 
Meningeal. 
Lachrymal 
Lachrymal. 
Palpebral. 
Supra-orbital. 
Supra-trochlear. 
Ophthalmic 
Frontal 
To lent, ganglion. 
Ciliary nerves. 
Infra-trochlear. 
Nasal. 
Ophthalmic, or 
Lenticular gan- 
glion 
Nasal 
Connecting branches 
Ciliary nerves 
To nasal nerve. 
To the third nerve. 
To sympathetic. 
Orbital branch 
Malar. 
Temporal. 
Superior maxil- 
lary 
To Meckel's ganglion. 
Posterior dental anterior. 
Dental infra-orbital. 
Internal branches 
5. Fifth or trifacial nerve. 
Nasal. 
Naso-palatine. 
Meckel's gan- 
glion 
Descending 
Ascending To the orbit. 
Anterior palatine. 
Posterior. 
External. 
Posterior 
Vidian. 
Pharyngeal. 
Small, or muscular part 
Deep temporal. 
Masseteric. 
Buccal. 
Pterygoid. 
Auriculo - tem- 
poral 
Articular, and to me- 
atus, parotid, au- 
ricular, temporal. 
Inferior maxil- 
lary 
Large,or 
sensory 
part.... 
Gustatory 
To submaxillary 
and sublingual 
ganglia. 
To hypoglossal. 
To the tongue. 
Mylo-hyoid. 
Labial. 
Incisor. 
Connecting branches 
Branches for muscles 
Inferior dental. 
To Jacobson's nerve. 
To the fifth and 
sympathetic. 
Otic ganglion 
To the gustatory 
chorda tympani, 
and sympathetic. 
Submaxillary 
ganglion 
Connecting branches 
Branches to the glands and the mucous membrane 
of the mouth. ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
86 
6. Sixtli nerveTo external rectus. 
Connecting 
branches... 
To join auditory. 
To Meckel's ganglion. 
Tympanic and sympathetic nerves. 
The chorda tympani. 
7. Seventh nerve. 
Posterior auricular. 
Digastric branch. 
Stylo-hyoid branch. 
Portio dura.. 
Branches for 
distribution. 
Temporal. 
Malar. 
Infra-orbital. 
Temporo-facial 
Cervico-facial 
Buccal. 
Supra-maxillary. 
Infra-maxillary. 
To the portio dura. 
Nerve to cochlea. 
Nerve to vestibule. 
To tl i e common sac. 
To the saccule. 
To the semicircu- 
lar canals. 
Portio mollis 
Connecting 
branches... 
To vagus. 
To sympathetic. 
Joins otic ganglion. 
Supplies tympan- 
um. 
Glosso-phar- 
yngeal 
Jacobson's nerve. 
To carotid artery. 
To the pharynx. 
Tonsillitic branches. 
Muscular. 
Lingual. 
Branches for 
distribution. 
Connecting 
branches... 
To glosso-pharyngeal. 
Sympathetic and auricular nerves. 
To the hypoglossal. 
8. Eighth nerve. 
Pharyngeal nerve. 
External laryngeal 
Ascending to the 
mucous mem- 
brane. 
Descending to join 
the inferior lar- 
yngeal. 
Superior laryngeal. 
Pneumo- 
gastric 
Branches for 
distribution. 
Cardiac nerves. 
Cardiac. 
(Esophageal. 
Bracheal. 
To constrictor and 
muscles of larynx. 
To join superior 
laryngeal. 
Inferior laryngeal. 
Spinal acces- 
sory 
Connecting 
branches... 
To pneumogastric. 
To the cervical plexus. 
Branches for 
distribution. 
To sterno-mastoideus and trapezius. SPINAL AND SYMPATHETIC NERVES. 
87 
To the pneumogas- 
tric nerve. 
To the sympathetic. 
To loop of atlas. 
To gustatory nerve. 
9. Ninth, or hypoglossal 
nerve 
Connecting branches 
Branches for distribution. 
Descendens noni thy- 
ro-hyoid nerve. 
To the lingual mus- 
cles and tongue. 
TABLE OF THE SPINAL AND SYMPATHETIC NERVES 
OF THE HEAD AND NECK. 
Spinal Nebves. 
Superficial as- 
cending 
Small occipital nerve. 
Great auricular. 
Superficial cervical. 
The first four 
form the Cer- 
vical plexus, 
which gives 
off 
Superficial de- 
scending 
Supra-acromial. 
Supra-clavicular. 
Supra-sternal. 
The cervical spinal nerves divide into 
To the pneumogastric. 
To the hypoglossal. 
To the sympathetic. 
To rectus major mus- 
cle. 
To diaphragm nerves 
to descendens noni. 
Deep internal.. 
Anterior 
branches. 
To join the spinal ac- 
cessory. 
To the sterno-mastoi- 
deus. 
To the trapezius. 
To the levator anguli 
scapulae. 
The rhomboid nerve. 
To the phrenic nerve. 
Supra-scapular nerve. 
Subclavian branch. 
Posterior thoracic, or 
respiratory. 
To tire scaleui mus- 
cles. 
The last four 
and first dor- 
sal form the 
B rach i a 1 
plexus, 
which gives 
off 
Branches 
above the 
clavicle 
Branches 
below 
Are dissected with the 
upper limb. 
Posterior 
branches. 
Are distributed to the muscles of the back, and give off 
cutaneous nerves. 88 
ELECTRO- THERA PEUTICS. 
Sympathetic Nerve. 
Carotid plexus, 
which gives.... 
Branch to tympanic 
plexus. 
To the vidian. 
To the sixth and fifth 
cranial nerves. 
The sympathetic nerve has in the neck 
Ascending 
branches, 
which unite 
in plexuses. 
To the third cranial 
nerve. 
To the fourth cranial 
nerve. 
To the fifth and len- 
ticular ganglion. 
To the carotid artery 
and branches. 
1. Superior 
cervical 
ganglion 
has 
Cavernous plex- 
us, which gives 
branches 
External branches... 
To join pneumogastric and hy- 
poglossal nerves to the spinal 
nerves. 
Internal branches.... 
Branches to vessels. Nervi molies. 
External branches. To the spinal nerves. 
Pharyngeal branches. 
Superficial cardiac nerve. 
2. Middle 
cervical 
ganglion... 
Internal 
Middle cardiac nerve, to supply 
thyroid body and join the ex- 
ternal laryngeal. 
3. Inferior 
cervical 
ganglion... 
Anterior branches. To the subclavian artery. 
To the spinal nerves forming 
vertebral plexus. 
External 
Internal. Inferior cardiac nerve 
TABLE OF THE SPINAL NERVES OF THE UPPER LIMB. 
Anterior thoracic 
Superficial. 
Deep. 
Brachial plexus gives off below the clavicle. 
Subscapular- 
Superior. 
Inferior. 
Long. 
Circumflex 
Articular. 
Cutaneous. 
To teres minor. 
To deltoid. 
Nerve of Wrisberg. 
Internal cutaneous... 
Small cutaneous. 
Anterior of forearm. 
Posterior of forearm. 
Musculo-cutaneous, 
To coraco-brachialis biceps and brachialis an- 
ticus. 
Cutaneous external of forearm. 
Articular to carpus. 
To pronator teres. 
To muscles of forearm, except flexor ulnaris and 
part of profundus. 
Anterior interosseous. 
Cutaneous palmar. 
To muscles of thumb in part. 
Five digital branches. 
Median SPINAL NERVES. 
89 
Articular to elbow. 
To flexor carpi ulnaris. 
To flexor profundus in part. 
Cutaneous branch of forearm and palm. 
Dorsal cutaneous of the hand. 
Brachial plexus-continued. 
Ulnar 
Superficial palmar di- 
vision 
Deep palmar nerve. 
Communicating two 
digital branches. 
Internal cutaneous. 
To triceps and anconeus. 
External cutaneous. 
To supinator and extensor radialis longus. 
Musculo-spiral. 
Posterior interosseus... 
Muscular. 
Articular. 
Radial 
Cutaneous of back of 
thumb and of first 
two fingers and half 
the next. 
TABLE OF THE SPINAL NERVES IN THE ABDOMEN 
Internal Muscular. 
Lumbar spinal nerves divide into 
Posterior branches. 
External 
Ilio-hypogas- 
tric 
Muscular. 
Cutaneous. 
Cutaneous of the ilium. 
Hypogastric branch. 
Ilio-inguinal... 
To integuments of the groin. 
Anterior branches; 
of these the four 
first end in the 
lumbar plexus, * 
which supplies... 
External cuta- 
neous 
Genito-crural.. 
To integuments of the thigh. 
Genital branch. 
Crural branch. 
Branches in- 
side the pel- 
vis 
To the iliacus 
muscle. 
To the femo- 
ral artery. 
Anterior cru- 
ral 
Branches out- 
side the pel- 
vis 
Are noticed in 
the thigh. 
Other offsets 
are described 
in the thigh. 
Obturator Accessory 
* The lumbo-sacral gives off the superior gluteal nerve. 90 
ELECTRO- THERAPEUTICS. 
Sacral spinal nerves divide into 
Posterior branches 
unite together 
and give off 
Muscular and cutaneous filaments. 
The anterior branches of the four superior 
unite with the lumbo-sacral in the sacral 
plexus, and furnish 
Branches 
inside 
the pel- 
vis 
Visceral. 
To levator ani. 
To obturator internus. 
To the pysiformis. 
Inferior haemor- 
rhoidal. 
Superficial peri- 
nieal (anterior 
and posterior) 
muscular. 
To the bulb. 
Dorsal of the 
penis. 
Pudic 
Branches 
outside 
the pel- 
vis 
Inferior haemorrhoidal (sometimes). 
To the superior 
gemellus 
To the inferior 
gemellus and 
the quadratus 
articular 
Small sciatic 
Great sciatic 
These are de- 
scribed in the 
thigh. 
TABLE OF THE SYMPATHETIC NERVE OF THE 
ABDOMEN. 
Solar plexus or prevertebral centre of 
the abdomen, furnishes the 
following plexuses: 
Diaphragmatic. 
Coronary plexus. 
Pyloric. 
Right gastro- 
epiploic. 
Pancreatic- 
duodenal. 
Cystic. 
Coeliac 
Hepatic 
Left-gastro- 
epiploic. 
Pancreatic. 
Superior mesen- 
teric 
Eplenic.... 
Offsets to small and large intes- 
tines. 
Suprarenal. 
Renal Spermatic plexus, filaments to the. 
Aortic Hypogastric. 
Spermatic. 
Inferior mesen- 
teric 
Offsets to the large intestine. 
Superior heemorrhoidal. 
Hypogastric plexus 
ends in the pel- 
vic plexus on 
each side, which 
gives the follow- 
ing plexuses: 
Inferior heemorrhoidal. 
Prostatic. 
Cavernous. 
Deferential. 
To vesiculae seminales. 
Vesical 
Uterine. 
Vaginal. PNEUMOGASTRIC NERVE. 
91 
External branches. 
' To the lumbar and sacral spinal 
nerves. 
Gangliated cord of 
the sympathetic 
nerve in the ab- 
domen supplies... 
To aortic plexus. 
To hypogastric plexus. 
To join round middle sacral artery 
between the cords on the coccyx 
in the ganglion impar. 
Internal 
Great splanchnic 
nerves. 
This receives 
Part of small 
splanchnic. 
This is joined 
above by...' 
' The aortic plexus. 
Filaments from the 
L lumbar ganglia. 
Offset of pneumo- 
gastric. 
PNEUMOGASTRIC NERVE IN THE ABDOMEN. 
Right 
Coronary branches to the back of 
the stomach. 
Filaments to join the coeliac and 
splenic plexuses. 
Pneumogastric 
Left 
Coronary branches to the front 
of the stomach and the hepatic 
plexus. CHAPTER V. 
MEDICAL ELECTRICITY. 
Electricity is one of a great variety of forces, 
all of which are probably of identical essence, viz., 
motion, and are therefore now popularly known as 
" modes of motion." 
Whether electricity is, as many scientists claim, 
the element in which resides the sum of all forces 
and motors, it is a settled fact that natural elec- 
tricity is present in all bodies. Whatever the ulti- 
mate combination of forces may be which produces 
in animate beings the result so vaguely called " life 
principle," the author claims that there are in the 
human system a sufficient number of phenomena 
accompanying nervous and muscular and nervous 
and arterial action to demonstrate that the said 
" life principle" is something analogous to electricity, 
and that this force, properly distributed throughout 
the organism, maintains health, and when disturbed 
results in disease, and when suspended, is death. 
As electric forces of the human organism are 
simply modifications of those which vitalize nature 
at large, it follows that any excess or diminution 
in their quantity, or any impoverishment of their 
quality, must result in a disordered condition of 
the organism. 
Vital forces, in health and disease, are but modes MEDICAL ELECTRICITY. 
93 
of motion. Thus electricity and vital force are 
assimilated. 
Curative and pathogenic agents of all kinds, elec- 
tricity included, are such by virtue of the forces or 
modes of molecular motion, which they are able to 
excite in the living organism,-i.e., in the sphere of 
vital force. 
Curative and pathogenic agents aside from hygi- 
enic agents, and such like, differ from each other 
only in consequence of their force-waves; being 
homologous, or heterologous with objective forces. 
The homologous co-operate in maintaining health 
and in curing disease; the heterologous impair 
health and prevent cure. 
Electricity, in its many modifications, may be so 
administered as to be thus homologous to the organ- 
ism as a whole, as well as locally ; and, on the other 
hand, so as to be heterologous; hence, may be both 
curative and pathogenic. 
Graduation of quantity and tension of the elec- 
trical currents ; the choice of the currents them- 
selves ; a minute subdivision or otherwise of such 
currents, by slow or rapid interruptions; the dis- 
criminating application of the negative and positive 
poles ; and the direction and course of the currents, 
are the ordinary means of rendering the use of this 
agent curative in disease. And whatever be the 
electric-curative, it may be relied on as certain that 
a misuse of the same agent will result unfortunately, 
and with detriment to health. 
The word quantity is often confounded with the 
word primary, as applied to currents; and the word 94 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
intensity is often confounded with the word second- 
ary. This is because we usually see the primary 
current,-i.e., that known as voltaic or galvanic and 
coming directly from the cups-obviously active only 
when the amount of generating surface and the re- 
sultant amount of electricity are very considerable; 
its flow being quiescent. But the secondary or 
" induced current,"-obtained by means of a coil 
of fine wire simply brought near to the primary, and 
known also as faradic, from Faraday, who described 
it,-is generally seen in a state of concentrated and 
precise mobility which enables it to pass with a 
sort of momentum through matter which would 
only absorb, as it were, the more indefinitely and 
sluggishly moving primary current. The two differ- 
ing somewhat as do a conical bullet from a rifle, and 
the charge of small shot from a fowling-piece. But 
the primary current gets tension from a subdivision 
of the pair of primary plates 'into co-operative 
series; and the secondary current gets both amount 
and measurably the condition called quantity, by 
changing mere matters of mechanism, and the 
character of the conducting media. 
Using the word " quantity" rightly, we mean that 
this is a condition in which either a large or a small 
amount of electricity is indifferent in regard to any 
given line of polarization ; hence diffuses itself near 
and around its point of liberation, and readily be- 
comes transformed by obstacles into other forces, as 
in the heating of a wire, which forces the electricity 
suddenly into concentration. 
Of " intensity," in like manner, we say that it is PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CURRENTS. 
95 
also a condition; the-large or small amount of- 
electricity is concentrated ; drawn, as it were, from 
a nebulous diffusion into the form of a thunder-bolt, 
and thus made intensely polar, and so capable of 
passing, in comparatively tenuous lines, through in- 
tervening matter, instead of over it, and only into it. 
From the foregoing, we shall see why we must 
still use the primary current in most cases requiring 
the condition named quantity; and the secondary 
current in most cases requiring the condition called 
intensity; without forgetting that the primary cur- 
rent may be had in high tension, or that the sec- 
ondary current may be had in connection with great 
amount, provided the coils be not destroyed in its 
passage. 
All these variations have an individuality as well 
as a therapeutic value of their own. Thus the pri- 
mary current, applied to tumors, is highly electro- 
lytic,-having the power to decompose morbid mat- 
ter.* It affects healthy muscles, on the other hand, 
very little; but the secondary affects muscles very 
much (the amount aside). 
Muscles with eccentric paralysis, as from lead, on 
the contrary, are very apt to be responsive, more or 
less, to the primary, not at all to the secondary cur- 
rent. Electrical gymnastics restore such muscles and 
their nerves; using always the current which most 
affects them, and changing as their approach to 
health alters their susceptibility. 
* This is especially marked in the current produced by the silver 
helix recently invented and patented by the author. 96 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
Healthy nerve-trunks feel it very little, but to it 
neuralgia is most amenable, as is also the function 
of the optic nerve. 
Ordinary primary current batteries, however, to be 
effective must be bulky and expensive; and judging 
from the practical success of the system herein de- 
tailed, almost needless ; cures being rapidly obtained 
in curable cases by simpler and more portable, as 
well as less costly apparatus; a point on which 
superiority may justly be claimed for the system 
itself. 
Acute lesions or acute morbid processes, even of 
the brain and spinal cord, are no contra-indications 
for the proper use of electricity as a curative. In 
this, of course, the author is aware that she is con- 
tradicted by most practitioners, and yet can but reit- 
erate the statement from the abundant teachings of a 
long and varied experience. 
Except for purposes of rapid cauterization (com- 
paratively but rarely needed, even for the separa- 
tion of pedunculated tumors, as will bo seen under 
that head, in this volume), the combination batteries 
of the author are quite adequate to all the exigencies 
of Electro-Therapeutics. These batteries consist of 
zinc and carbon plates (immersed in a solution), 
with a system of helices, whereby the tension of 
the resulting currents is modified, as every factor 
in every current must modify the current itself; 
and the primary current is also combined with the 
secondary in actual administration in greatly differ- 
ent degrees. 
Hence, according to the posts (lettered from A to PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CURRENTS. 
97 
F and to H, respectively, also the silver helix) to 
which the conductors are attached, one may vary 
the nature of the resulting current very much. 
These batteries have also a special mechanism in a 
sliding cylinder or piston for regulating the strength. 
Grose's, Bunsen's and Daniell's batteries are simply 
modifications intended to secure permanent and 
steady activity. 
The different qualities of the several currents of 
the combination battery render them homologous to 
the forces inherent in the various and different tissues 
of the body, as well as to various morbid products, 
and even to extraneous and pathogenetic materials 
finding place and working mischief therein. Hence 
by properly individualizing the cure of disease and 
the currents of electricity, all curable diseases, and 
many called incurable, whether dynamic merely, or 
substantial and organic, are amenable to Electro- 
Therapeutics. The several currents, like analogous 
drugs, may. however, stimulate each other under 
varying conditions of the vital factor. 
Even with such careful selection of the appropriate 
currents, excessive use of the same, either in strength, 
frequency, or duration of treatment, may produce or 
aggravate the very symptoms which the same cur- 
rents, used with due caution according to the direc- 
tions herein given, will cure. 
For instance, a certain current being applied 
strong through a metal surface on the skin for a 
length of time, develops a burn at the negative. 
But a short application of the same current, weak, 
and with a wet nankin between the metal and the 98 
ELECTRO- TH CRAPE VTICS. 
skin, is a perfect curative for burns. And so on 
through the whole field of morbid irritations. 
Diseases are found practically to consist of local 
or general conditions, or both ; and however similax* 
their names, and even their symptoms or functional 
manifestations, ox* indeed their organic lesions, may 
differ widely in different persons, or in the same 
person at different times and stages. 
In general we may say the difference may be com- 
monly found connected on the one hand with irritative, 
and on the other band with paretic states. Locally, 
and in previously healthy persons, the irritative state 
predominates and calls for a specific method,-that 
of functional regulation, first of all, with concomitant 
nutritive influences,-in electric treatment. 
In the sphere of the general system, in very many 
cases, the same is true; yet, in other cases and after 
exhausting or relaxing influences, local or general, 
the paretic state predominates, and calls for a differ- 
ent application of the same currents,-that of nutri- 
tive regulation with concomitant functional effect. 
The mere presence of electricity has some influ- 
ence in both these ways, but the specific stimulating 
functional influence prevails in the direct, or down- 
ward running currents; the sedative and nutritive 
in the reverse, or upward running currents; count- 
ing the positive pole as that which gives the flow, 
and the negative as that which receives it in the mo- 
lecular movement which completes the electric arc. 
In the vast majority of cases the downward cur- 
rents are to be chosen. These may run on the track 
of the nerves or athwart them, according as a ner- ADMINISTRATION BY ELECTRODES. 
99 
vous or purely organic action is wanted; or rather 
according as the cerebro-spinal or the sympathetic 
nerves are to be addressed; or according as the ven- 
ous or arterial circulation may be assailed. In a 
few cases, as in haemorrhoids, diarrhoea, and espe- 
cially paralysis proper, the negative of paretic condi- 
tions is to be met by currents, of electricity given in 
reverse directions,-that is, the negative pole placed 
superior in position to the positive pole. 
Various electrodes (flat appliances made of three 
metals so combined as to produce in themselves a 
silent electric current*) may be used as the cases 
require. About eight of different dimensions (see 
diagrams) being necessary. These the operator at- 
taches, by means of the small groove on the under 
side, to one end of each conducting cord; the other 
ends are inserted in the posts of the battery. Two 
electrodes of some description must be used, as it is 
necessary the circuit should be closed between the 
positive and negative poles before the electric cur- 
rent from the battery flows. These electrodes should 
always be covered with heavy linen towelling bags 
or cases, thoroughly wet w'ith warm water on the 
side to be placed next the patient. 
The aim is always to include or involve the 
whole site of the morbid process of disease, so far as 
may be possible, between the electrodes. For par- 
ticular purposes, the round nickel-plated electrodes, 
* The metals used in the author's patented electrodes are of a pecu- 
liar alloy and combination, and to this arrangement great importance 
is attached as preventing the passage of metallic molecules from the 
battery into the body. 100 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
two of which are furnished with each battery, may 
be employed, covered or not with a thin sponge, 
always wet. When it is to be administered through 
the person of the operator, which makes the elec- 
tricity highly electro-magnetic, the current should pass 
mainly from left to right. Excess causes debility to 
the operator, antidoted by passing the same current 
from right to left; upward and downward are also 
mutually antidotal. The maplewood sponge-cup, of 
about two and one-half inches diameter, with a 
handle some six inches long (see cut), is held in the 
left hand of the operator or patient, as the case may 
be, the right being used to give off the positive to 
the patient; although the practice of conveying elec- 
tricity through the operator to the patient is consid- 
ered, as a rule, exceedingly prejudicial to the former, 
and the same benefits can be obtained by the direct 
use of the sponge-cup on the patient. This sponge- 
cup is very useful in the treatment of numerous mal- 
adies. Besides these, many forms of electrodes may 
with ingenuity be extemporized when peculiarities in 
cases demand special contrivances. A great variety of 
appliances are handsomely made and sold by dealers 
in surgical and electrical apparatuses, which every 
practitioner should possess (see diagrams), many of 
which prove indispensable for the treatment of inter- 
nal parts, as the bladder, uterus, rectum, nose, ear, etc. 
The glass eye-cup and the metallic brush are included. 
A foot-tub is requisite for various purposes, also a 
basin (ordinary toilet appurtenances can be utilized), 
and a number of pieces of rubber cloth, of different 
sizes, for protection of the clothing against dampness. MODE OF ADDRESSING TREATMENT. 
101 
Dry application to the skin is made for a purely 
cutaneous effect. Deep action demands moisture 
either by means of wet-sponge or cloths. Slight 
pressure induces deep and penetrating action. 
The distance between the poles being increased 
diminishes the effect at any one point between them. 
The strength of the current should have some refer- 
ence thereto, and can be regulated by the sliding 
cylinder. 
If possible little children should first be made ac- 
customed to the apparatus in action, and to the elec- 
trodes upon the person before any currents are ad- 
ministered ; and should be treated very mildly at the 
first actual passage of the electric current, if the case 
is not too urgent to consult these points. The suc- 
cessful physician invites the confidence and com- 
posure of the patient, instead of assailing the disease 
with sovereign indifference, regardless of the patient's 
idiosyncrasies. 
Posture is often important. Displacements, all 
pelvic troubles, and' some cases of debility require 
recumbency. When the negative is directed to the 
lower extremities, as often occurs, the feet may be 
placed with the negative in the foot-tub with hot 
water, or on an electrode; or a long electrode may be 
laid on a rubber cloth on the bed or lounge, beneath 
the ankles of both legs. The effects are similar in a 
general way. Of course the positive is assigned its 
proper position on the patient in accordance with the 
requirements of the disease being administered to. 
A most important special method is the electric 
vapor bath. Its use recurs constantly in the course 102 
ELECTR O- THERA PE UTICS. 
of practice, and is considered almost indispensable, 
and as greatly accelerating the desired effect by re- 
storing normal circulation, and by cleansing the pores 
inducing wholesome cutaneous action. Outside of 
an establishment, it can be made available for home 
purposes, by employing the portable apparatus herein 
described, and illustrated by diagram. 
A wooden closet or cabinet commodious enough to 
stand up in, and broad and deep enough to allow free 
action of the arms and legs, the bottom lined with 
zinc to catch the condensed vapor and the water. 
A latticed seat is adjusted at the back part of the in- 
terior of the cabinet opposite the door, and this is 
always covered with a small crash towel to prevent 
the hot vapor from coming too freely about the 
thighs and spine. A foot-tub supplies hot water for 
the feet. A bowl containing cold water, and a small 
towel with which to cool the head, or when a sense 
of suffocation seems to ensue, to breathe through. A 
side window or aperture through which the arm of 
the operator may pass freely, is on the left of the 
bath, over which is hung a curtain from the inside 
to prevent exposure of the patient and keep the 
vapor from rapid escape, as well as for warding off 
any draughts of cold air. Beneath the window at 
the forward part of the cabinet is a shelf, upon which 
the operator's battery is safely set. The conductors 
used where any moisture exists, are covered with 
pure rubber tubing, to protect them against damage. 
A portable steam-boiler, heated by a gas-stove, or so 
made as to fit any stove as a teakettle does, with 
rubber tubing or an iron pipe to conduct the vapor THE VAPOR BATH. 
103 
to the bath-cabinet, can be regulated with perfect 
safety, if judgment is exercised in keeping the boiler 
supplied with sufficient water to generate the vapor 
as rapidly as exhausted, and in keeping enough 
water in it to prevent collapse; which only could 
result from overheating the empty boiler. 
The bath should be thoroughly heated before the 
patient enters, and all qualms as to suffocating will 
disappear as soon as perspiration ensues. A gentle 
friction can be effected by rubbing, either with the 
palm of the hand or with a crash towel, on the chest, 
legs, arms, neck, and face, and the scurf skin will 
become detached in an astounding manner. The 
temperature should range from 90 to 120 degrees. 
Occasionally a patient may experience excellent re- 
sults by a higher temperature. The period of vapor- 
izing should not exceed twenty-five minutes,-about 
ten minutes after perspiration commences. The 
electricity is administered -the negative with round 
electrode in the foot-tub, or, as sometimes ordered, 
in No. 7 electrode on the seat, covered with a wet 
towel for the patient to sit upon; and the posi- 
tive in the sponge-cup passed down the spine slowly 
from the base of brain, diverging only when reach- 
ing the lumbar region, when the sponge-cup may be 
passed obliquely from the median line of the spine 
to one hip, then to the other. The patient must sit 
forward on the seat, that the arm of the operator 
may have free action and admit of lifting the sponge- 
cup off the patient, when an interrupted return from 
the coccyx to basilai' is made; for again it is urged 
by the author, that the electrization should always 104 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
be given (except when some peculiar emergency de- 
mands reversal) from the base of brain down the 
spine; or-if given on the epigastric region-as di- 
rected. In some cases the patient can be more con- 
veniently reached if standing. 
The patient should sponge off in tepid or quite 
cool water, and rub thoroughly in the bath-cabinet 
after the vapor has been shut off. Some patients 
allow the attendant to thoroughly rub them with 
coarse crash towels, then emerge, don their clothing 
rapidly, and exercising due care to avoid draughts, 
may go out as soon as cooled off sufficiently to denote 
reaction. For the first attempts with the vapor-bath, 
it will be advisable to shun lowering weather and 
general negative conditions of the atmosphere. 
Instead of producing a debilitating effect, as the 
uninformed might anticipate, when one has taken a 
brief rest after the fatigue of dressing the effect 
is truly exhilarating. The author personally can 
commend the efficacy of the vapor-bath when weari- 
ness and cold are settling upon the physician exposed 
to inclement weather. Frequently a vapor appara- 
tus has been most ingeniously devised in an emer- 
gency. 
It is remarked that the dynamic and molecular 
movements in bodies traversed by electric currents 
tend to pursue the routes of such currents. The 
platinum point, for instance, upon which the trem- 
bler plays in vibrating, has been found excavated 
after prolonged use, and a corresponding little me- 
tallic bead deposited on the plate below. So, also, 
after a treatment, mercury has been found in the CAUTION IN MANIPULATION. 
105 
foot-tub, with the negative. And the thermal flow 
wdll soon be noted in the feet, when the same pole is 
applied, as well as increased circulation of the blood. 
For this reason, morbid material should invariably 
be invited to an eliminating surface or organ, as the 
feet or skin, or the alimentary mucous tract. 
For a like reason, the greatest caution is necessary 
when manipulating about the head, eyes, or chest. 
The brain and lungs are not a little intolerant of 
electricity; and as to the primary current, the optic 
nerve also. The cerebrum should be guarded against 
all rash treatment; but the basilar region of the 
occiput (base of brain) is the favorite locality for 
the positive pole. Upward and reverse currents 
may be needed in paretic states. Faintness and 
nausea sometimes signalize depiction of the brain, 
during the flow of a downward current. Giddiness 
is a fair warning of mischief, and changing the cur- 
rent is often antidotal. The manipulations of the 
chest are very considerably limited to the median 
line, front and back; in fact, the direct applications 
over the lungs are confined to the breast-bone and 
the spinal column. 
ILLUSTRATIONS OF APPLIANCES USED 
BY AUTHOR. 
The following cuts represent the comparative sizes 
and shapes of the electrodes for general use, and will 
hereafter be alluded to by numbers. 106 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE U TICS. 
TABLE OF COMPARATIVE SIZES OF PATENTED COMBI- 
NATION ELECTRODES. 
No. Inches. 
1 
2 
4 3>i X 
No. Inches. 
5 2 X 
r==== 
8 COMBINATION ELECTRODES. 
107 
SPONGE-CUP. 108 
ELECTRO- Til ERA PE UT1CS. 
PORTABLE VAPOR BATH CABINET AND BOILER. THE COMBINATION BATTERIES. 
109 
Dr. Elizabeth J. French's Combination Bat- 
tery, No. 1, has five differently conditioned coils in 
the helices, arranged to use in various connections, 
producing fifteen different qualities or currents of 
electricity, as follows: A-B, A-C, A-D, A-E, A-F, 
B-C, B-D, B-E, B-F, C-D, C-E, C-F, D-E, D-F, 
and E-F. 
The common electrical machines are made on the 
principle of simply creating power. They have only 
two helices and two currents, the inner helix being 
always a necessity for producing the current on the 
outer helix ; and they have too often been considered 
valuable.in proportion only as they produced pain. 
How would such a rule apply in buying a musical 
instrument? What would one think of a person 110 
ELECTRO- TH ERAPE UTICS. 
who selected a piano solely from the amount of pain 
its noise would give the ear, or for the finish of the 
case ? Do not all persons carefully regard the qual- 
ity of the music it is capable of offering to the human 
ear? Also, what would the most costly piano be 
worth if its strings were not tuned in accordance 
with the philosophy of the octaves, diapason, and dia- 
pente, within the degrees recognized by the human 
ear? How important it is, then, that an electrical 
machine for remedial uses should have the pitch of 
its currents not only sufficiently definite and varied, 
but also harmonized to meet the wants of the vital ner- 
vous system when used for the treatment of disease. 
Dr. Elizabeth J. Drench's Combination Bat- 
tery, No. 2, has seven differently conditioned coils THE COMBINATION BATTERIES. 
111 
and combined metals in the helices, arranged to pro- 
duce twenty-eight different grades of electrical cur- 
rents, as follows: A-B, A-C, A-D, A-E, A-F, A-G, 
A-H, B-C, B-D, B-E, B-F, B-G, B-H, C-D, C-E, 
C-F, C-G, C-H, D-E, D-F, D-G, D-H, E-F, E-G, 
E-H, F-G, F-H, and G-H. 
Dr. Elizabeth J. French's Combination Bat- 
tery, No. 3, arranged to produce twenty-eight dif- 
ferent grades of current, but much more complete 
than No. 2, and provided, besides, with the rapid 
vibrator, with Flemming's slow interrupting rheo- 
toine, and commutator, or pole-changer, etc. 112 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
Dr. Elizabeth J. French's Combination Bat- 
tery, No. 4, is similar to No. 3, but has her latest 
patent, the silver helix in addition. 
CARE OF THE BATTERY. 
The solution for the batteries consists of one and 
three-quarters (If) ounces bichromate of potassa, 
three-quarters (f) of an ounce of saltpetre dissolved 
in twenty-seven (27) ounces of hot water, in an 
earthenware vessel. When cold, add three (3) fluid- 
ounces commercial sulphuric acid, and one-quarter 
(I) ounce bisulphate of mercury (avoirdupois). 
In filling and emptying the cell do not remove the 
top; as doing so gives needless trouble and renders 
the carbons liable to be broken. Use the central 
aperture. Do not fill the cell above the lower part 
of the curve of the neck, and never use hot or warm 
solution. 
Caution.-The battery-fluid will eat and destroy 
any fabric with which it comes in contact, unless 
immediately sponged out with pure water, and the 
material moistened in a solution of aqua ammonia, 
which will restore the color. It is wise to keep a 
small bottle in the case. The person using the bat- 
tery should avoid breathing the emanations which 
are emitted from the open-cup. 
TO START THE BATTERY. 
Place the cell in its receptacle, immerse the zinc 
plate with its connecting clamp through the aper- 
ture, and connect the clamp and the binding-post of 
the carbons on the left with the two binding-posts HOW TO USE A BATTERY. 
113 
of the instrument by means of the wires. See 
that the zinc does not touch either of the carbons in 
the cell by tilting to one side."®iS 
The immersed surface of the zinc plate may be 
increased or diminished by changing the position 
of its clamp up or down, thus increasing or dimin- 
ishing at pleasure the quantity of electricity evolved. 
Before the lower half of the zinc is entirely eaten 
away, it may be turned in the clamp and the other 
half immersed, thus utilizing the whole plate. 
When removing the zinc from either the rubber-cup 
or the battery-cell, be careful that no mercury or fluid 
drops on any part of the apparatus; the acid will 
stain the wood and eat off the nickel-plating, and, 
if allowed to dry under or around the hydrostat, 
will crystallize and prevent its being fluid-tight. Al- 
ways leave the cell open a few minutes after using, 
to permit the escape of the hydrogen gas generated 
during action. This gas must escape in some way, 
and if the hydrostat be screwed down immediately, 
the confined gas will force its way up between the 
carbons and the brass frame to which they are at- 
tached, and the fluid will follow by capillary attrac- 
tion through the air-spaces thus made. 
To prevent irregular working of the battery the 
zinc should be kept well amalgamated,-i.e., well 
covered with mercury. For this purpose some bi- 
sulphate of mercury is added to the solution, which 
obviates the necessity of keeping quicksilver in the 
rubber cup. Always replace the zinc in the rubber 
cup after using the battery. 
If the trembler, or interrupter, should not start 114 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UT1CS. 
itself, a slight touch of the finger will set it in 
motion. If the battery stops during application, 
it may be started again by shaking the zinc to re- 
move the hydrogen gas from the surface of the 
negative plates, when that causes the stoppage. 
The rubber on the hydrostat may be turned 
around occasionally in order to present a new and 
closer surface to the edges of the aperture. In re- 
placing a broken carbon with a new one, use sealing- 
wax to make the aperture fluid-tight. 
When the battery-fluid grows weaker with use, or 
becomes decomposed (of a greenish-black color), it 
should be renewed. Also, when the current becomes 
very weak it is usually an indication that the fluid 
needs to be renewed, or the zinc reamalgamated. 
The greatest care should be exercised to keep the 
battery as clean as possible, in order to insure its 
perfect working. The metallic parts especially 
should be kept scrupulously free from all dust, dirt, 
and oxidation. PART II. 
THE RATIONALE OF CURE. 
ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS. 
The office of electricity as a diagnostic is only be- 
ginning to be appreciated. Indeed, no less a practi- 
tioner than Doctor Tibbitts, author of a book on 
medical electricity, limits this office far more closely 
than the facts warrant, viz., to the mere distinc- 
tions between the several forms of paralysis, by the 
comparative effects of galvanic and faradic currents. 
These are indeed of capital importance, both in diag- 
nosis and treatment, and may as well be stated here 
in brief, after which a wider range of view may be 
profitably taken. To begin with, muscles and nerves 
are normally responsive, to some extent, to all varie- 
ties of electricity. Deficient or excessive response 
argues a corresponding nutritive and functional 
activity. 
The object, then, is to obtain the vital response to 
the currents, in the forms known as electro-sensibility 
and electro-contractility. 
The activity of the battery being always known, 
the vital response is measured, either by similar por- 
tions of the patient's sound parts, or those of another 
similar person. The ball of the thumb is a good 
115 116 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UT1CS. 
test-point, and the operator ought always to test 
any current first upon himself. 
LOCAL ORGANIC DIAGNOSIS. 
Irritation and paresis of organs are sought for, by 
placing the poles successively over them. Sensibil- 
ity and contractility are increased with irritation; 
decreased with paresis. Of course, the current 
must be so directed as to traverse the organ exam- 
ined. The former is sometimes spoken of as a posi- 
tive state; the latter as negative, and they require 
the influence of opposite poles and currents; the 
former from the part, or through it; the latter, to it. 
Local irritation, not very deeply seated, often dis- 
plays, after a few minutes, circumscribed cutaneous 
redness; this is often seen upon the spine, after ap- 
plying the sponge-electrode. (Electric currents ap- 
plied through dry metal may produce similar evi- 
dences of irritation anywhere.) 
SPINAL DIAGNOSIS. 
The negative pole being at the feet; the positive, 
with sponge-electrode, on the spine; tender or insen- 
sible spots may be found. The former may be due 
to local trouble, easily obvious to examination by 
electricity-even with wet sponge-in the produc- 
tion of cutaneous redness. If the tenderness arises 
from other than local trouble, the cause will proba- 
bly be discovered in the outlying viscera, etc.; as ascer- 
tained, for instance, by Keen's Flowers' Nerve Charts. 
Insensibility may also be either purely local, or sym- THE AUTHOR'S DISCOVERY. 
117 
pathetic. The conditions indicate the curative ap- 
plications. 
CRANIAL DIAGNOSIS. 
In like manner, but more marvellously, it has 
been abundantly shown in the long experience of 
the author that different localities about the head 
also correspond with internal viscera, etc.; and that 
even the precise nature of the trouble can, by the 
different sensations elicited by the electric touch, be 
defined with an accuracy quite transcending the or- 
dinary diagnostic methods, and at a stage in which 
disease utterly eludes those methods, in many cases. 
All attempts heretofore to make known this really 
important discovery have subjected the author to 
abuse, as might be expected. But, waiving all such 
considerations, the discoverer hopes to put it within 
the power of every scientist or physician to avail 
himself of its aid, as soon as the proper charts can 
be perfected; assured that whilst pride may scoff, as 
always, yet wisdom shall still be justified of her chil- 
dren. This system of Cranial Diagnosis, by which 
the character of disease and the locality of the parts 
affected can be determined with great certainty, is 
taught only by its discoverer, the author, and by 
her daughters. So positively has its efficacy been 
confirmed by many years of experience, that the 
author desires to impress upon those administering 
electricity as a curative agent, the importance of 
relying upon the unerring indications resulting from 
her method, in preference to accepting as accurate 
any presumption or indication of disease not cor- 
roborated by the Cranial Diagnosis. 118 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE VT1CS. 
DIFFERENCE IN ELECTRICAL CURRENTS. 
Each of the twenty-eight currents of the com- 
bination battery has a different physiological effect, 
which the experience of every-day practice has dem- 
onstrated, and in many of which differences are 
easily distinguished by the senses. The eight posts 
are marked from left to right alphabetically,-A, B, 
C, D, E, F, G, H. Of these the first four are con- 
nected with the copper wires of the helices, E and F 
with the iron wires, G and H with the brass wire. 
It is claimed that different and better results can be 
obtained in practice from this variety of currents 
than by the ordinary methods. Some of the leading 
properties of these currents may be enumerated as 
follows: 
A-B, magnetic-anodyne and soothing current. 
A-C, nerve-current, sedative, anaesthetic current,- 
for nervousness, pain, soreness, paralysis, etc. 
A-D, muscle-current, forcing, eliminating, or run- 
ning-off current,-used always in the vapor-bath, 
also to complete many treatments. 
A-E, shock 1-applied where there is insensibility 
to other currents, in cases of fainting, spasms, or 
convulsions. 
A-F, emollient current,-applicable to mucous 
membranes and tissues, especially beneficial in affec- 
tions of the throat. 
A-G, alterative current, also tissue-tonic,-used in 
dropsical and anaemic conditions. 
A-H, arterial stimulant and circulatory current,- 
arousing from inertia'and relieving the apoplectic 
tendency. QUALITIES OF THE CURRENTS. 
119 
B-C, blood-cun-ent, and ordinary styptic, when 
reversed ; acts on the sanguified functions,-used for 
humoral taints, etc. 
B-D, febrifuge, breaking-up, anti-congestive cur- 
rent,-having a special affinity for the general tissue 
framework, ligamentous tissues, etc. 
B-E, main styptic current, when reversed, anti- 
phlogistic,-used direct. 
B-F, astringent current,-especially adapted to 
the destruction of the virulence of cancers and ex- 
tirpation of tumors. 
B-G, powerful antiphlogistic current,-used in 
connection with B-E and D-G currents. 
B-H, diaphoretic current,-used to relieve high 
internal inflammation, by inducing perspiration and 
carrying it off through the pores of the skin. 
C-D, permeating current,-its use is indicated for 
internal purulent accumulations, in connection with 
B-D and C-G currents. 
C-E, absorbent current, including lymphatics and 
lacteals ; warming current, in coldness of surface and 
substance without chilliness. 
C-F, cerebral stimulant current, arousing from 
benumbed life into action,-used in comatose condi- 
tions. 
C-G, penetrating anti-congestive current,-used in 
connection with B-D and C-D currents, for fevers, 
tumors, and sprains. 
C-H, disintegrating current,-applicable to can- 
cers, tumors, and all morbid growths. 
D-E, warming and digestive current,-used in con- 
nection with D-G current, for indigestion, ague, etc. 120 
ELECTRO- THERA PE VTICS. 
D-F, excito-motor stimulant current,-for paraly- 
sis, also tumors. 
D-G, liver-tonic current,-used for morbid liver, 
indigestion, dyspepsia, ague, etc., in connection with 
B-D and D-E currents. 
D-H, powerful general tonic current. 
E-F, eye and ear nerve-tonic current,-used for 
defective vision, deafness, catarrh, etc. 
E-G, nerve-stimulant current,-used in depletion 
from over-work or anxiety, hysteria, sensory paraly- 
sis, etc. 
E-H, antispasmodic current,-used for chorea, 
nervous chill, etc. 
F-G, mild general tonic current,-used to com- 
mence the building up of the system after continued 
fevers, long illnesses, the removal of cancers, tumors, 
etc. 
F-H, paretic, nutritive current,-its use is indi- 
cated in all inactive, paralyzed parts, from debility. 
G-H, antiseptic current,-used for suppuration 
and ulceration, external and internal, also in cuta- 
neous affections. 
The recently-patented silver helix (producing 
an electric current through a silver wire) is con- 
tained only in the author's No. 4 Battery, and in- 
variably benefits special nervous disorders, such as 
rheumatism, neuralgia, etc., and its use is indicated 
in all cases where a calmative is necessary to control 
pain. It will be found especially useful to the prac- 
titioner in the disintegration of tumors and in pa- 
ralysis. GENERAL RULES. 
121 
MANIPULATIONS-PARTICULAR MALADIES. 
Treatments are to be repeated as needed: acute 
cases every half to three hours until better; chronic 
cases, at first daily or oftener,-afterwards less often. 
It is a mistake, sometimes made, to suppose that 
either pole may be applied indifferently to a diseased 
part, or that the direction of the current is of no con- 
sequence, or that the variety of currents here in- 
sisted on is unreal, or is a mere difference of strength. 
True, in the electro-muscular gymnastics, in cases of 
paralytic wasting, so fully elucidated by Duchenne, 
the individual muscles, being acted on by simple 
localized currents, primary or secondary, may re- 
spond to these, and as they proceed indifferently, 
from whatever direction ; but in every other case, 
especially in allaying inflammation, and the correc- 
tion of morbid tissue,-change resulting therefrom,- 
the precise rules as to poles, direction, and choice 
of currents, as hereinafter laid down, are of prime 
IMPORTANCE. 
This statement must be made emphatic as to the 
discriminating and individualizing use of the combi- 
nation battery. And just here it must be remarked, 
first, that every general rule herein given involves a 
principle of extended applicability; and, secondly, 
that individual cases, which are never identical, must 
always afford full scope for a wise and skilful varia- 
tion of these general directions, in order to attain 
the full curative result. 
The properties accredited to the several currents 
of this battery are to a good extent appreciable by 122 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
the senses,-e.g., the action of A-C on the sensory, 
and of A-D on the motor tissues, etc. Much clinical 
experience corroborates these and other qualities as- 
cribed to these diverse combinations, of quantity and 
tension, and of the primary and secondary currents. 
In the beginning of electric practice it is quite 
possible, as in other methods of treatment, that dis- 
appointments may be met with. In every such case 
it will be well to reconsider the plan, and in so doing, 
discover the fault,-which will often be found in the 
scheme or execution of the treatment itself. Fre- 
quently the patient may have transgressed, and 
with the aid of cranial diagnosis, or otherwise, the 
cause must be ascertained. Consider also whether 
the manipulations were not of too long duration. 
Aggravation of original, and even additional, symp- 
toms often proceed from this cause alone. Ten 
minutes, twenty minutes,-rarely over thirty min- 
utes,-will be the proper time. Fatigue is ominous 
of a bad effect. The patients must not delude them- 
selves with the idea that a long treatment is propor- 
tionately more effectual. 
Treatments should be given in the manner and 
for the time directed. The battery cannot be used 
carelessly, without great danger. 
Excessive strength of the current is to be avoided. 
Increasing the distance between the electrodes, light 
pressure, the regulation of the cylinder, control 
this. Generally the feelings are a good guide,- 
keeping outside of the limits of actual pain. 
Never give treatment over the lungs (back or 
front) or the front of the head. SPECIFIC DIRECTIONS. 
123 
Be careful to place the strings in the posts lettered 
as directed, and not in others. 
In no case should a treatment be given on an 
empty stomach, if possible to avoid it,-even eat- 
ing a cracker will suffice. Attention should also be 
given to evacuate the bladder before the applica- 
tion. 
A general rule is, that the currents, when not 
otherwise distinctly stated, are to be given " direct," 
-that is, down the nerves, or downward in some 
other way, the positive pole above the negative; or 
through and through, as from the back to the 
stomach, or from stomach to back. 
Always bear in mind that the left-hand letter as 
one stands facing the battery is positive to every 
letter below it on the right. 
GENERAL TREATMENT. 
No. 5 electrode from base of brain down the spine 
in A, No. 8 electrode on the abdomen, short point 
down in D, fifteen minutes. Change to No. 6 elec- 
trode across the lower part of back in A, No. 7 elec- 
trode under the feet in H, fifteen minutes. 
THE RUNNING-OFF TREATMENT. 
This is a most valuable treatment to be adminis- 
tered in chronic cases of every description, or long- 
continued illness, once a week in connection with 
the special applications. 
Place No. 6 electrode across the liver (around the 
right side) in B, No. 7 electrode under the feet in D, 124 
EL E CTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
ten minutes, then change to A-D for fifteen. The 
foot-bath may be substituted for No. 7 electrode. 
GENERAL TONIC. 
Substitute E-G for A-D and D-H for A-H, and 
manipulate as directed for general treatment. 
SCROFULOSIS. 
This is to be corrected by a persistent daily treat- 
ment with the " blood-current" B-C. 
First. Bound electrode between the hands in B, 
and No. 4 electrode over stomach in C, twenty min- 
utes. 
Second. No. 6 electrode over stomach in C, No. 7 
electrode under the ankles or feet in D, as strong 
as can be borne, twenty minutes. Use G-H current 
in the same manner alternate days. The vapor-bath 
(see directions) should be used frequently. All im- 
purities of the blood may be benefited in a similar 
way. 
SUSPENDED ANIMATION. 
No. 1 electrode at base of brain in A (wet the 
hair thoroughly, as it is a non-conductor when dry), 
No. 6 electrode under the feet or the calves of legs 
in D. While the current is running, the cylinder 
is to be frequently and at regular intervals quickly 
drawn out and returned, giving repeated vibrations 
in this way, if the battery has no vibrator. When 
response is obtained, place No. 6 electrode across 
stomach in B, and No. 4 electrode at base of spine 
in D. Also F-G in the same manner. Afterwards 
elsewhere, if especially indicated. The time of the SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
125 
application must be left to the discretion of the 
operator. In some instances-drowning especially 
-the patient is to be placed with the face down- 
ward, the electrodes fastened on with wet towels or 
bandages. 
SHOCK-COLLAPSE. 
Treat as for suspended animation, using also A-E, 
base of brain to the feet. In all cases, when the 
patient responds sufficiently to complain of coldness, 
apply the " warming current" C-E, as for chills. 
CHILLS OR INTERMITTENT FEVER. 
First. No. 4 electrode over the stomach in C, and 
No. 6 electrode under ankles in D or E, for twenty- 
five minutes, the current strong enough to be agree- 
able. Repeat this daily just before the chill is coming 
on; alternate with C and F. 
Second. If stupor follows the chill, give one hour 
after the above treatment the following: No. 4 elec- 
trode across small of back in B, and No. 6 electrode 
across the liver, stomach, and spleen in D, for fifteen 
minutes. 
Third. If nervousness and sleeplessness follow 
chills, use round electrode between hands in A, and 
round electrode in hot foot-bath in C, change to C-E 
same electrodes, in the same positions, for fifteen 
minutes in all. 
CHILLS-OF ALL OTHER KINDS. 
The proper currents are C-E and E-II. 
First. No. 5 electrode, base of brain, on spine down- 126 
ELECTR O- THERA PE UT1CS. 
ward in C, No. 6 electrode across the stomach in E. 
If a decided improvement is noted continue for twenty 
minutes. If, however, no perceptible effect is pro- 
duced in five minutes, apply B-D twenty minutes. 
Second. No. 5 electrode, base of brain, on spine 
downward in E, No. 7 electrode under the feet in H, 
twenty minutes. 
Both of these applications may be completed by 
placing the round electrode between the hands in 
C, having the other electrode on the stomach or 
spine in E, five minutes. Apply C-G also in the 
same manner. 
CONGESTIVE CHILLS. 
First. No. 5 electrode, base of brain, on spine 
downward in B, No. 6 electrode across abdomen in 
D, until improvement in the congestion ; then use 
C-E for B-D until normal temperature is restored. 
(This treatment may be continued for an hour.) 
Second. If the congestion is cephalic, or of the 
brain, with chill, apply No. 5 electrode, base of brain, 
on spine downward in B, No. 7 electrode under 
the feet in D, twenty to thirty minutes. Use C-G 
also. 
Third. If the congestion is pulmonic, or of the 
lungs, round electrode in hot foot-bath in D, No. 5 
electrode from base of brain, on spine downward in 
B, ten minutes; change No. 5 electrode, same posi- 
tion, to C ; place No. 6 electrode across upper abdo- 
men in E, ten to fifteen minutes. 
Fourth. If the congestion is of the kidneys, place 
No. 5 electrode from coccyx upward on the spine in SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
127 
B, No. 6 electrode across the liver and stomach, 
slanting slightly downward towards the left in D, 
twenty or thirty minutes. (The electrode is placed 
in this latter position frequently to implicate the 
large bowel with the liver and stomach during the 
same application.) 
Fifth. If the congestion is gastro-enteric, or of the 
stomach and bowels, apply No. 8 electrode over the 
abdomen in D, No. 2 electrode, base of brain in A, 
ten minutes ; change to No. 4 electrode over the 
stomach in C, No. 7 electrode under the feet in G, 
ten minutes. 
FEVER. 
Slight fever from colds, etc. The first and uni- 
versal aim is to " break it." This may often be 
accomplished within twenty minutes; rarely need 
it take more than forty minutes. The patient 
should be in bed. Then apply No. 5 electrode, 
base of brain, on spine downward in B, No. 7 
electrode, under the feet in C, or the foot-bath, in 
bed (see directions), with the B-G current, may be 
used advantageously ten to fifteen minutes. If not 
better at the expiration of this time, change to B-D 
current, and continue until successful. In any event 
end with A-C current for five minutes. 
If the case is not serious, allow a little respite. If 
local affections exist, and the case is urgent, proceed 
at once to treat them according to the nature of the 
symptoms, as directed under the appropriate beads. 
Repeat these treatments as often as required by 
the return of symptoms, every few hours, or once 128 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE UTICS. 
or twice a day, more or less, as in all other acute 
cases. 
In preparing the electrodes used in the applica- 
tions for fever, cloths saturated in very hot salt-water 
are necessary. 
In some cases the following routine may be re- 
quired : 
First. No. 5 electrode, base of brain, downward on 
spine in B; No. 7 electrode under calves of legs in 
H. In five or ten minutes a moisture may be ex- 
pected to appear on the surface of the body, and a 
more reasonable pulse. Then change to B-C cur- 
rent, ten minutes. 
Second. No. 5 electrode from throat on breast-bone 
downward in B; No. 3 electrode between the kid- 
neys on the spine; thus implicating organs in the 
current, which are often in fault, in C, fifteen min- 
utes. This will reduce the pulse almost to the nor- 
mal standard ; and during the process the patient 
may go to sleep. The conducting strings may now 
be simply detached from the machine, and the sleep 
encouraged. On waking, or on the rise of the fever, 
in serious cases, as yellow fever, etc., re-attach. 
Third. If the head aches after treatment, apply 
No. 4 electrode on the pit of stomach in D, the 
sponge-cup or No. 1 electrode to the base of brain in 
B, five to ten minutes. An extra conducting cord 
may be at hand in all such cases if thought more 
convenient, not displacing the one going to the spine, 
which may remain simply inert. 
If any other organs are involved, the digestive 
system having already been acted upon, occupy a SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
129 
few minutes at the close of the treatment with an 
application suited thereto; making in all a course of 
thirty minutes. 
INTERMITTENT FEVER. 
Treat the paroxysm (chill and fever) according to 
directions previously given, diagnose the local causes 
accurately, and proceed to treat them accordingly. 
The electric vapor-bath will hasten the cure, as it 
frequently does in many other acute and chronic dis- 
eases. If correctly managed the paroxysm seldom 
occurs more than once. 
REMITTENT FEVER. 
Treat the fever as usual, afterwards the local affec- 
tions, which are rarely obscure, and lastly the gen- 
eral debility, so commonly its sequel. With good 
nursing, and such repetition of treatment as the 
symptoms may demand, a speedy recovery may be 
expected. 
Malignant remittent, congestive remittent, and 
typho-malarial fevers require similar treatment, but 
more frequent repetition, in order to break up at 
once the morbid state. The local congestions re- 
semble those observed in congestive chills (see direc- 
tions). The difference may lie simply in the febrile 
heat, which, though unequal, may be high over most 
of the body. 
CONTINUED FEVERS-TYPHOID. 
Typhoid and typhus. Treat as in other fevers, 
then the local troubles, such as ulceration, diarrhoea, 130 
ELECTRO- THERAPE VTICS. 
hemorrhage, etc., as for the same maladies otherwise 
caused. The vapor-bath is to be guardedly employed, 
if needed, remembering the debility existing in these 
cases, and given with a mild tonic current (F-G), 
not to exceed ten minutes. 
Ulceration of the bowels in fevers. 
Apply No. 6 electrode across abdomen, just cover- 
ing the navel, in B, No. 5 electrode on the spine from 
coccyx up in D, fifteen minutes, then, for any sore- 
ness (see note), ten minutes. Repeat once or twice 
a day, meeting other symptoms, if needful, at any 
time during the second daily treatment, but aim in 
every manipulation to implicate the affected parts. 
Hemorrhage of the bowels in fevers. 
No. 2 electrode at the base of spine in B, sponge- 
cup or No. 4 electrode over the right iliac region 
(the flank enclosing the small intestines), in C, this 
being the supposed origin of the flow. 
The principle of this application to be observed in 
all kinds of hemorrhage. B-E, reversed, and F-H, 
however, being potent in paretic conditions of the 
blood-vessels. 
YELLOW FEVER. 
Have apartment disinfected and as thoroughly 
ventilated as possible. Keep the patient warm. 
Sponge-cup rubbed over liver and gall-bladder to 
the stomach in B, No. 4 electrode between the 
kidneys in D, fifteen minutes; change immediately 
No. 4 electrode over stomach in D, No. 8 electrode 
on the back from coccyx, long point up, in E, ten 
minutes ; also place feet in hot foot-bath, with round SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
131 
electrode in D; sponge-cup in B, knead the bowels, 
fifteen minutes. The treatments must be persisted 
in, and perspiration induced by the use of B-IL 
Hot applications constantly made to the stomach 
and bowels, and the mouth swabbed out with a 
solution of chlorate of potassa. The bowels should 
be evacuated as soon as possible, and an enema of 
the white of eggs and sulphate of zinc, weak solu- 
tion, administered after each movement. 
ERUPTIVE FEVERS. 
In all these fevers the treatment is of two parts, 
whose underlying principles are identical, viz.: 
First. General anti-congestive. 
Second. Local. 
For initial chills, collapse, or convulsions, treat as 
in like conditions otherwise caused. 
For fever, as before directed. Then, 
For local affections, according to symptoms, as 
directed under their respective headings. The elec- 
tric vapor-bath is extremely beneficial in both general 
and local symptoms. 
. SCARLET FEVER. 
When the throat is very much ulcerated, a gargle 
should be used frequently of lemon-juice and alum, 
and a crumb of chlorate of potassa kept in the 
mouth constantly to keep the putrid condition al- 
layed, then the treatment should be antiphlogistic. 
First. Place No. 4 electrode across the stomach in 
B, No. 8 electrode from coccyx up, on back in D, 
fifteen minutes; then remove D from back to under 132 
ELECTRO- THERA PEUTICS. 
the feet, ten minutes. No. 1 electrode, base of brain 
in A, a convenient large electrode placed under the 
hands in C, ten minutes. Perspiration should be in- 
duced as speedily as possible, and the body greased, 
thoroughly and constantly, with cocoanut oil, if it 
can be procured. 
If the throat becomes very sore, apply the spatula 
electrode to the tongue in F, the sponge-cup in A, 
rubbed forward on both sides of the throat, five min- 
utes each side. 
Treatments every hour until change for the better, 
unless the patient sleeps. Quiet, and an even temper- 
ature, must be observed in the apartment of patient. 
Children in household kept out of the room, and 
sanitary measures taken to prevent contagion. 
MEASLES. 
When the first symptoms, watery eyes, rasping 
cough, and fever, appear, regulate the temperature 
of the room to about seventy-five degrees, avoiding 
draughts. 
Place No. 1 electrode to base of brain in B, and 
No. 5 electrode on the lower part of spine in C, 
fifteen minutes; then place No. 1 electrode on throat 
in A, and No. 6 electrode under feet in C, strong 
enough to be felt by patient, fifteen minutes. Re- 
peat this treatment three times daily. Alternate 
with B-D and C-E in the same manner. 
CATARRHAL FEVER. 
First. The electric vapor-bath with A-D current, 
administered as usual, which may dispose at once of SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
133 
the whole trouble. Repeat once daily. If any local 
affection remains treat accordingly, at another period 
of the same day, extending intervals as improve- 
ments go on. 
Should the pyrexial (feverish) symptoms be very 
severe, supersede the above with the treatment 
suited to them. 
RHEUMATIC FEVER-ACUTE RHEUMATISM. 
If the fever-symptoms are present, reduce them as 
already directed. The more conspicuous troubles 
are then to be treated without exhausting the pa- 
tient by a too lengthy and continuous manipulation. 
Therefore, after sufficient rest, a careful diagnosis 
should be made, to determine the existence or not 
of visceral lesion, particularly of the heart and the 
liver. Such lesions, when ascertained, are next to 
be dealt with, as indicated from time to time. 
In this affection, one is easily tempted to do too 
much at once, as each affected region successively 
seems to demand full treatment; and it will therefore 
be all-important to proceed with patience, and fre- 
quently to recur to such general treatments-tonic or 
soothing-as may be indicated; or even to give anti- 
dotal currents in reverse, avoiding a direction from 
badly-affected joints, etc., to the central vital organs. 
Nourishment must also be cared for. Neglect of 
dietetic measures is certain to lead to bad results, 
not only in this disease, but in all others. The physi- 
cian who is guilty of it will soon find himself dis- 
gusted with electro-therapeutics. 134 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
Manipulate rheumatism of the upper extremities 
as follows: 
First. D, round electrode, in a basin, with the 
hands immersed, or, the hands laid on a prepared 
electrode, on a rubber cloth on the knees or else- 
where, according to convenience; B, in sponge-cup, 
to be moved repeatedly over the affected region, al- 
ways downward, twenty minutes. Repeat as needed. 
After three such treatments, in a bad case, it will be 
required to use A-D in like manner, for the last half 
of the time of each manipulation ; ten minutes being 
a fair time for each limb. Alternate with 
Second. No. 5 electrode on spinal column between 
shoulders in B, and No. 6 electrode across liver in D 
or G-, for twenty minutes; then take No. 5 from the 
back into the hands for ten minutes longer. 
The lower extremities are to be treated in a simi- 
lar manner; the feet resting on a large electrode, or 
in a foot-tub, with the electrode immersed. 
The spine may be treated, if involved, thus: 
Third. Place a sponge containing electrode at the 
coccyx, or held for the upper spine in the hands in 
D; No. 5 electrode on the spine, extending over the 
affected region in B ; or, if necessary, use the sponge- 
cup, moving from above downwards repeatedly, fif- 
teen to twenty minutes; or No. 4 electrode across 
small of back in B, and No. 7 electrode under feet in 
D, for twenty-five minutes; then change to A-C for 
ten minutes; also use D-F, or E-G- currents. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
135 
CHRONIC RHEUMATISM. 
(See Affections of Joints.) 
Lumbago, Myalgia, Muscular Rheumatism, etc. 
B-D, fifteen minutes ; A-D, ten minutes; varying, 
if much tenderness, with A-C. Negative, applied 
to the coccyx, the hand, or the foot. Positive, in 
sponge-cup, moved downward over the affected 
part, avoiding the lungs. Use the electric vapor- 
bath frequently. 
The silver helix current is most beneficial in 
all rheumatic affections, and should be applied with 
the brush (see diagram) in the negative, stroking 
downward, and always away from the vital organs. 
The positive,* placed in a proper position as dictated 
by good judgment in accordance with the location 
of the pain. A five or ten minutes' treatment with 
this current may be used daily in conjunction with 
any of the preceding ones directed for this disease. 
SCIATICA. 
Treat with the same currents as in acute rheu- 
matism, varying the manipulations so as to operate 
mainly on the tract of the affected nerve and its 
distributions, and using the electric vapor-bath fre- 
quently. In all of these diseases treat the complex 
symptoms met with in the order of the severity of 
the distress to which they give rise. 
* The posts of the silver helix are only lettered P for positive 
and N for negative. 136 
ELECTRO- THERA PEUTICS. 
NUMBNESS AND HEAVINESS OF THE LEGS." 
No. 6 electrode over one hip, then the other, ten 
minutes each in B. No. 7 electrode under the feet 
in D, twenty minutes. Also use D-F in the same 
manner. 
CEREBRO-SPINAL MENINGITIS-SPOTTED FEVER. 
Treat for chill and fever as usual. 
First. No. 5 electrode from base of brain down the 
spine in B, round electrode covered with sponge 
pressed against the coccyx in E, fifteen minutes. 
Second. No. 2 electrode at base of brain in B. No. 
5 electrode on spine, from coccyx extending up in C, 
twenty minutes; every second day, if practicable, 
administer vapor-bath-not too hot, or too long- 
with round electrode in D in the foot-bath, sponge- 
cup in A from base of brain down the spine. 
SEVERE INFLAMMATIONS IN GENERAL. 
Inflammation must be rapidly overcome by the 
use of the proper currents mildly administered, usu- 
ally more or less complication may be expected; in 
which case the several symptoms must be succes- 
sively or, if practicable, simultaneously met. 
Thus, for example, we will suppose a bad case of 
dyspepsia, with haemorrhoids, to be aggravated into 
a violent inflammatory condition. The typical course 
of treatment for such a case would be, as usual, to 
attack the most distressing part first. Proceed thus: 
First. Introduce the rectal electrode well lubri- 
cated with glycerine or fine soap (as all similar SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
137 
electrodes should be) into the rectum in E, No. 4 
electrode on the small of back in B, ten minutes, 
to reduce the piles. 
Second. No. 8 electrode over abdomen in G, No. 
4 electrode on the small of back in B, ten minutes, 
the cloths being wet in water as hot as can be borne. 
B-H may be used instead of the preceding current 
in most severe cases. 
Third. No. 4 electrode on the small of back in E, 
No. 5 electrode from breast-bone downward in B, 
ten minutes. C-G may also be used, same electrodes 
and same positions. Then rest, repeating as often 
as soreness* or aggravating symptoms recur. 
SLEEPLESSNESS. 
For sleeplessness, the electric vapor-bath will prove 
most efficacious, or lacking this, when organic affec- 
tions are not the manifest cause, use the following 
treatment: sponge-cup or No. 5 electrode from base 
of brain downward in B, No. 6 electrode under the 
knees, or across loins below kidneys, in E, fifteen 
minutes. A more simple method is from the base 
of brain in A, to the hands in C, fifteen minutes. 
NERVOUSNESS. 
Although a mere symptom, this often renders indi- 
viduals who may suffer from diseases of varied char- 
* If, after electrical treatment, in any case soreness appears to 
have been induced, a few minutes' treatment with A-C current,- 
usually applied A, base of brain, or on upper part of spine,-C across 
abdomen, or lower part of spine, or to the feet, with suitable electrodes, 
will antidote it. 138 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
acter exceedingly uncomfortable, and is thus preju- 
dicial to speedy recovery. It may appear as local 
or general irritability, or may even be a product of 
active electrization, disturbing the functional equili- 
brium. In such cases use round electrode in A be- 
tween the hands, No. 6 electrode over stomach in C, 
five to fifteen minutes. Any faulty electrization 
should of course be remedied, either by changing to 
the proper current or different locations. 
If a child is cross and irritable, place No. 5 elec- 
trode on spine from the base of brain downwards in 
A, and No. 7 electrode under feet in B, ten minutes, 
change B to hands five minutes. Irritability in 
adult, A-C instead of the preceding current, five or 
ten minutes longer duration. In abdominal discom- 
fort, No. 5 electrode on spine from waist up in D, 
No. 6 electrode across abdomen in B, ten minutes, in 
either case end with A base of brain, C in hands five 
minutes. 
VERTIGO. 
The cranial diagnosis will enable the physician to 
proceed with confidence. The cause of this trouble 
is frequently gastric derangement, or it may be due 
to cerebral or other nervous affections. If gastric, 
treat as for dyspepsia. 
If cerebral, place 
First. No. 5 electrode on spine from base of brain 
downward in B, No. 6 electrode over stomach, liver, 
and spleen in D, ten to fifteen minutes, remove No. 6 
electrode to hands five minutes, alternate with 
Second. No. 5 electrode on spine from coccyx up- SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
139 
ward in A, No. 6 electrode across abdomen in H ten 
minutes, then remove No. 6 electrode to under the 
feet or ankles ten minutes. By this treatment the 
pressure of the blood will be removed from the head 
and circulation equalized. A vapor-bath once or 
twice a week may often prove beneficial for the 
same purpose. Frequent use of these treatments 
will be found necessary until improvement becomes 
marked. 
STUPOR. 
If in a child or very nervous person, use No. 2 
electrode the base of brain in C, No. 6 electrode in 
F under the calves of legs or the feet ten to fifteen 
minutes. If in a usually robust adult, A-E in the 
same manner. 
HEADACHE-NERVOUS, GASTRIC, ETC. 
Nervous headache. 
First. Apply No. 2 electrode the base of brain in 
A, round electrode between the hands in C, ten to 
fifteen minutes. After two or three treatments, 
which may be taken hourly, apply 
Second. No. 5 electrode on the spine from base of 
brain downward in E, No. 4 electrode on lower part 
of spine in G ten to fifteen minutes. If nervousness 
of the lower limbs remains, run this same current 
from the lower part of back to feet for a few minutes. 
If very decided soothing measures be demanded, 
and especially if sleeplessness be a prominent com- 
plication, give special attention to it by using, 
First. No. 5 electrode on the spine, from base of 140 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
brain downward, in A, No. 7 electrode under the 
feet in C, ten or fifteen minutes. 
Second. No. 6 electrode across the epigastrium in 
C, No. 4 electrode on the spine, small of back, in 
E, ten to fifteen minutes, transfer C to round elec- 
trode, held between the hands five minutes. 
Abbreviate if not needed in full. Be sure, in all 
cases of visceral disease, to " implicate" in the flow 
of the current the morbid organs. 
Many cases of nervous headache need only twenty 
minutes' treatment, half the time from base of brain 
to the feet, then base of brain, to the hands. 
The practitioner, always aiming at a radical cure, 
should seek the cause, and remove it. Headaches, as 
a rule, are not a disease. 
SICK HEADACHE. 
Treatment should rarely begin at the head, but 
rather address the stomach. 
First. For relief. No. 2 electrode lower end of 
breast-bone in B, No. 4 electrode across lower part of 
back just below the waist in D ten minutes, transfer 
B to base of brain five minutes. 
Second. (See general treatment.) 
For radical cure, treat daily for one week accord- 
ing to the preceding directions, then vary, as fol- 
lows : 
First. No. 2 electrode base of brain in B, No. 4 
electrode small of back in D, twenty minutes, then 
transfer D to the hands five minutes. 
Second. No. 4 electrode over the stomach in A, 
No. 7 electrode under the feet in D, ten minutes; SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
141 
change A to E, and D to G, ten minutes. Alternate 
and change the treatments with discretion. 
Where the sick headache is constitutional, the 
vapor-bath can be used with great benefit twice a 
week, applying the electricity over the liver and 
spleen, always manipulating below the true ribs, so 
as to avoid the lungs. 
Temporary relief from headache. The round elec- 
trode in A held in each hand alternately. Holding 
the sponge-cup in the disengaged hand at the base 
of brain in C or D as can be borne, stroke slowly 
from three to five minutes up the back of the neck, 
on either side or centre, the hair at the base of 
brain being thoroughly wet. The treatment may 
be administered by an operator, the patient hold- 
ing the round electrode between the palms of the 
hands. 
Another very successful treatment for headache is 
as follows: No. 5 electrode on back of head, an inch 
or two over the growth of hair, which must be wet, 
down the back of neck and spine in C, No. 6 elec- 
trode across liver and stomach in E, as strong as can 
be borne with comfort, twenty minutes. 
For persons subject to frequent headaches this 
will be found most successful, and should be used 
on recurrence, in connection with the daily treat- 
ments indicated by the condition of the patient. 
Another treatment: No. 3 electrode from hair 
down spine in D, No. 4 electrode lower end of spine 
in F, fifteen minutes. If the patient is extremely 
nervous and sleepless, transfer F to a foot-bath for 
ten minutes longer. If the headache arises from the 142 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE UTICS. 
stomach, No. 4 electrode across the stomach in C, E 
in foot-bath. 
ELECTRIC FOOT-BATH. 
This method is attended by very favorable results 
in many complaints, such as headache, rheumatism, 
and kidney disease, of a stubborn character and long 
standing. Place No. 6 electrode across the liver, 
stomach, and spleen in A, round electrode in the 
fbot-tub with D, twenty to twenty-five minutes, the 
water as hot as can be borne, with about half a tea- 
cupful of salt. B-II current in the same manner. 
FOOT-BATH IN BED. 
The patient must lie on the back with the feet 
drawn up, so that the foot-tub when placed in bed 
will be directly under the bend of the knees. Place 
No. 6 electrode across the abdomen in B, round elec- 
trode in D in the water, which should be very hot 
and salt. This will be found a most efficacious 
method of inducing perspiration in severe colds and 
in fevers. 
INTEMPERANCE. 
In whatever state the man or woman is in whom 
the passion for drink has grown to be a habit, inva- 
riably the stomach is either in a condition of inflam- 
matory fever or partial paralysis. In these attending 
states of misery the alimentary canal, covered with 
poisonous canker, offers continually renewed prompt- 
ings to drink. In the author's experience with such 
cases the following treatment has proved almost in- 
fallible : SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
143 
Place No. 4 electrode up and down over stomach 
in B, and sponge-cup pressed against base of brain 
in D, ten to fifteen minutes, strong as can be borne; 
change from base of brain to between the hands 
five minutes, not too strong, alternate with E for 
B, and H for D, electrodes to be placed as above. 
Let the patient eat dry cracker during treatment, 
and carry crackers to eat whenever thirsty. At 
meals drink little or no water, but take a cup of 
strong coffee, sweetened to taste, but without milk. 
Eat bread toasted very brown, and abstain from 
every drink but coffee. Continue treatment twice 
daily for seven or eight days until strength is felt in 
the personal resistance, then less frequently until 
cured. 
NARCOTIC POISONING. 
An emetic should be administered. If vomiting is 
not induced in five minutes, place No. 4 electrode 
directly on pit of stomach in A, No. 5 electrode be- 
low the lungs on spine in D, vibrating the cylinder 
until successful. Then place an electrode at lower 
end of spine in C, and one between the bands in A, 
five minutes. 
If symptoms of sinking or faintness occur, place A 
at base of brain and E at feet, and prevent the patient 
sleeping. Send for physician immediately. 
CHRONIC NARCOTISM. 
In these cases the blood requires most persistent 
treatment. 
First. No. 1 electrode around the front of throat 
in B, No. 2 electrode at the coccyx in D, fifteen 144 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
minutes, complete the treatment by removing the 
electrode in D to pit of stomach, ten minutes. 
Second. Every alternate day a running-off treat- 
ment (see directions), or electric foot-bath with No. 
5 electrode base of brain on spine downward in B, 
round electrode in D in the foot-tub, ten minutes; 
then remove B from back, and place No. 6 electrode 
over liver, stomach, and spleen in A. D remaining 
in the water (which should be kept hot) ten minutes 
longer. 
Third. No. 5 electrode on the spine from the waist 
upward in D. No. 6 electrode across lower abdomen 
in F, twenty-five minutes. 
Fourth. Vapor-bath, adding A-C, for nervousness, 
within an hour, which also prevents taking cold. 
(Time should be taken after any bath, for the tem- 
perature of the body to become assimilated to the 
surrounding air, before going abroad.) Apply from 
hands to the middle part of spine ten minutes. 
POISONED WOUNDS. 
Poisoned wounds should be treated in the same 
manner as ulcers. (See directions.) 
The Bites of Rabid Animals. 
First. No. 5 electrode girdling the body or limb 
above the wound in B, the sponge-cup in D, rubbing 
down to and off at the wound twenty minutes; then 
A-D, ten minutes. 
Second. Use G-II and A-D in the same manner, 
the patient may, if able, manipulate the treatment 
of the limb, if an upper limb, by holding the round 
electrode in the hand of the injured side in the nega- SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
145 
tive, stroking the sponge-cup in the positive, from 
the shoulder down to the wound. If a lower limb, 
place the negative under the feet, or in a foot-bath, 
stroking with the sponge-cup in the positive from the 
hip down to the injury, ten minutes. 
Third. The vapor-bath. Repeat treatment every 
half-hour, or as needed, until the effect of the poison 
is neutralized. (See Antidotes, in Appendix.) 
Another course of treatment: • 
First. During the paroxysm, treat as for epileptic 
convulsions-with A-D and A-E currents. 
Second. If the patient be clammy, administer the 
vapor-bath, using C-E instead of the usual cur- 
rent. 
Third. B-D, positive, from the base of brain or 
the muscles and viscera most involved; negative, to 
the cicatrix, with a large sponge. 
Fourth. For nervous excitability, No. 2 electrode 
base of brain in A, No. 4 electrode on lower part of 
spine in C, or to the hands if a less extensive in- 
fluence is required. Three or four treatments at 
short intervals should be given before any improve- 
ment may be expected. 
For a Snake-bite, wash in tobacco-juice, and treat 
similarly. 
MINERAL AND IRRITANT POISONINGS. 
In some respects, the treatment resembles that for 
narcotic poisoning, but the manipulations should 
consume a longer time. Strong emetics and chem- 
ical antidotes should not be neglected. 
First. For the resulting soreness and inflammation, 146 
ELECTRO- TH ER APE UTICS. 
A-C; or if the surface is cold, C-E and E-G, apply- 
ing either alternately fifteen to twenty minutes. No. 
2 electrode base of brain in C or E, No. 5 electrode 
from breast-bone downward over stomach and navel, 
or on the spine from coccyx upward in E or G twenty 
to twenty-five minutes. The vapor-bath should be 
administered. 
Chronic symptoms. Use the same currents, also 
No. 2 electrode base of brain in A, No. 4 electrode 
on stomach in II fifteen minutes, then No. 1 elec- 
trode around the front of throat in A, No. 7 electrode 
placed on a stool or chair for the patient to sit upon, 
in F ten minutes. Every second day vapor-bath or 
electric foot-bath A-D current. This treatment pre- 
supposes organic lesion. If only soreness or coldness 
is present, use the proper currents as directed. Any 
local developments should be treated intermediately. 
NEURALGIA AND TOOTHACHE. 
If in the face, No. 1 electrode at base of brain in C, 
the sponge-cup stroked backward or downward over 
the face in E, or the current may be given through 
the operator, using the hand instead of sponge-cup. 
If no better in five minutes, change C to A, and E to 
C, for five minutes. Applications may be made at 
intervals of half an hour. 
If twitching pains, give E-II. 
If jumping pains, give A-C, afterward C-E. 
If the teeth feel sensitive and the gums are in- 
flamed, use spatula in the mouth in G, No. 2 base of 
brain in C, five minutes. 
If pus form, B or G near it outside; D or H upon SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
147 
it inside, to hasten pointing and discharge. This ef- 
fected, heal with the aid of C-E; the negative on a 
wet napkin over the suppurating region, the positive 
above it. 
HYSTERIA. 
A careful (cranial) diagnosis is first to be insti- 
tuted, that the real foci of morbid action may be 
detected, and treated without delay. One of the 
most frequent causes of this painful disorder is de- 
rangement of the generative organs. Mechanical 
displacements demand the first consideration. Con- 
gestions menstrual, digestive, or spinal will also need 
care. 
For the relief of the paroxysm. 
First. No. 5 electrode base of brain down spinal 
column in A, No. 6 electrode across liver, stomach, 
and spleen in D, quite strong, ten minutes, then No. 
1 electrode base of brain in A, No. 6 electrode under 
the hands in C, ten minutes. After a few minutes' 
rest, if the patient is no better, use 
Second. No. 8 electrode on lower part of back, 
long point between the kidneys in E, No. 6 electrode 
across the abdomen or under the feet in A, ten min- 
utes. When the paroxysm contracts the trachea, 
the electricity may be passed through the operator, 
using C, and placing No. 2 electrode at base of brain 
in E. Great firmness is necessary in the management 
of the patient, and the operator's composure will be 
reassuring and of more benefit at first than the hur- 
ried application. 148 
ELECTRO- THERAPE VTICS. 
CHOREA. 
Much of the treatment for this affection consists 
of reversed currents. Here, too, various local troubles 
demand special attention from time to time. The 
local treatments should be given as follows. 
In all nervous diseases the kidneys must receive 
especial attention, as their action is always faulty, 
and actual congestion of the kidneys and stomach a 
sequelae. 
First. No. 4 electrode, upper part of stomach, to 
implicate the oesophagus, in B, No. 6 electrode 
across the lower part of abdomen (the bladder is 
affected by this) in G, ten minutes. 
Second. No. 6 electrode across upper part of ab- 
domen, over the navel, in D, No. 5 electrode be- 
tween kidneys, on spine, in B, ten minutes. 
Third. Every fourth day an electric foot-bath 
should be administered in the usual way. 
If any acute symptoms arise during the course of 
treatment, five minutes may be added to the length 
of the application in which to treat it. 
Loss of appetite may be treated as for dyspepsia. 
(See directions, second treatment.) 
Stuttering, dumbness, and similar affections, ap- 
ply No. 1 electrode to base of brain in C, No. 2 elec- 
trode, or the operator's hand, may be used around 
the muscles and nerves of the throat in A, ten min- 
utes, E-G and E-H currents also. 
The special symptoms being duly cared for, pro- 
ceed with the chorea proper, varying the process 
thus: SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
149 
First. The patient should lie upon the back. No. 5 
electrode from the base of brain on the spine down- 
ward in C, No. 6 electrode under the calves of 
the legs in A, for ten minutes; then remove No. 5 
electrode from the base of brain and place it across 
the stomach (to implicate the diaphragm) ten min- 
utes. 
Second. No. 5 electrode between the shoulders, on 
the spine, downward in H, No. 6 electrode across the 
lower abdomen in E, fifteen minutes; then remove 
No. 6 electrode in E to the feet for ten minutes. 
The round electrodes held in the hands, in E-G, 
five minutes; can be used to complete either of the 
preceding applications. 
Third. No. 6 electrode under the calves of legs in 
E, No. 5 electrode from coccyx up between the kid- 
neys in H, ten minutes. Transfer No. 5 electrode to 
base of brain, on spine downward, in A, No. 6 elec- 
trode to under calves of legs in C, ten minutes. 
Transfer No. 6 electrode in C to under the hands five 
minutes. 
Fourth. The vapor-bath, with No. 7 electrode 
placed under the towel on the seat in D, round elec- 
trode in the foot-bath in A, first having applied the 
sponge-cup down the spine in B in the usual way. 
Two or three hours after the bath use No. 3 elec- 
trode between kidneys in E, No. 2 electrode on the 
upper part of the spine, below the back of neck, in 
G, fifteen minutes. 
Repeat the direct applications for a child every 
day, for an adult twice a day, until better. Local 
affections may be treated in the interval. 150 
ELECTRO- THERA PE VTICS. 
CONVULSIONS-EPILEPTIC, INFANTILE, PUERPERAL, 
HYDROPHOBIC, TETANIC. 
Epilepsy proximately depends on unbalanced cir- 
culation, this being due to pressure somewhere, in 
the cerebro-spinal or other nervous tissue, even upon 
the cerebro-spinal mass itself, as in the region of the 
foramen magnum, or elsewhere, in the form of indu- 
rated tissue, usually below the medulla oblongata, 
impeding its free movement in the canal. 
The first effort must be to dispose of this collection 
of morbid matter. The second effort to correct a 
multitude of local troubles, which are liable to concur 
with the main affection, especially of the throat, bron- 
chi, nasal passages, and stomach, all of which seem 
to get better or worse as the general malady changes. 
During the spasm, apply No. 2 electrode to base 
of brain in A, No. 6 electrode on the soles of the feet 
very hot in D, as strong as the operator's judgment 
dictates, until patient seems better. Change A to 
No. 4 electrode, and place between the hands; or if 
the patient is incapable of holding it, apply instead 
from the lower part of breast-bone, twenty minutes ; 
follow in half or three-quarters of an hour with A-C, 
or C-E, in the same way; the former, if the surface 
generally is warm; the latter, if cold, especially the 
extremities. 
Chronic epilepsy: 
First. Seat the patient on No. 7 electrode in G, 
sponge-cup to be rubbed from base of brain to end 
of spine in E, ten minutes; change to A-D current 
ten minutes longer. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
151 
Second. Patient recumbent, No. 5 electrode on 
spine from waist upward in G, No. 6 electrode across 
the liver, stomach, and spleen in F, ten minutes; 
change No. 5 electrode in the same position to A, 
No. 8 electrode on the upper abdomen, the long point 
extending up to the breast-bone in D or H, ten min- 
utes longer. 
Frequent application of A-C from base of brain to 
the hands, or the round electrodes, held one in each 
hand, will be found most beneficial. 
The electric vapor-bath is highly commended after 
the third daily treatment, and should be administered 
very light the first time. Alternate these treatments, 
giving special attention to the general health. 
Convulsions (infantile). The application should 
be made through very hot wet compress, placed on 
the stomach and abdomen. 
If the child is teething, No. 3 electrode from base 
of brain downward in C, No. 4 electrode across the 
abdomen over the navel in G ; if the convulsion does 
not seem to yield in five minutes, change No. 4 elec- 
trode to the upper part of stomach from the breast- 
bone downward, ten to fifteen minutes longer, mak- 
ing the compress hotter at the same time. After the 
spasm is subdued, treat as for inflammation of the 
gums. (See directions, Neuralgia and Toothache.) 
If other causes than teething be found, treat ac- 
cordingly. (Compare Epilepsy.) 152 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
PUERPERAL ECLAMPSIA. 
(Convulsions during Pregnancy.} 
Treat as for epilepsy, until the convulsion and 
cerebral congestion subside; then : 
First. Apply No. 4 electrode small of back on the 
spine in B, No. 6 electrode across upper abdomen in 
D, twenty minutes. 
Second. No. 6 electrode over the abdomen from 
stomach downward in F, No. 5 electrode from coc- 
cyx upward on spine in D, twenty minutes. Alter- 
nated daily or during recurrence of spasm. 
HYDROPHOBIA. 
Treat as for convulsions. (See directions, Bites 
of Rabid Animals.) 
TETANUS. 
(Lockjaw.} 
First. Apply No. 5 electrode base of brain, on 
spine downward, in D, No. 6 electrode from breast- 
bone downward, over abdomen, in A, twenty min- 
utes. Change A to the sponge-cup, stroke around 
the jaw, commencing under the ear, five minutes 
each side. 
Second. No. 2 electrode the base of brain in F, No. 
4 electrode in the hands in D, ten minutes. Change 
D to sponge-cup, and stroke around the jaw, as in 
the preceding treatment, ten minutes. 
Third. Apply C-E, warming and soothing as for 
shock and chills. (See directions.) SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
153 
PREVENTION OF MISCARRIAGE. 
The author has met with remarkable success in 
carrying women beyond critical periods of gestation, 
which, previous to treatment, had always proved fatal 
to the foetus, using the following applications : 
First. No. 6 electrode across the lower part of back 
in E, No. 8 electrode very low on the abdomen, short 
point downward in C, twenty-five to thirty minutes. 
Second. No. 4 electrode on the upper part of the 
stomach in B, No. 5 electrode between the kidneys 
on spine in D, ten minutes (to prevent vomiting). 
Third. No. 6 electrode across the lower part of 
the back in A, No. 8 electrode on the abdomen, long 
point on the stomach in D, twenty-five to thirty 
minutes. Alternate daily first and third treatment 
for six weeks before the critical time, and through 
the month, then twice a week will be sufficient until 
confinement, unless complicated symptoms arise. 
When immediate miscarriage seems imminent from 
some sudden injury, the patient should assume a 
recumbent position immediately, and suitable elec- 
trodes in size and form selected, one applied over the 
part injured in B, the other above the injury in D, 
twenty-five minutes or longer, if required. Conclude 
the treatment with No. 2 electrode at the base of 
brain in A, No. 6 electrode under the hands in C, five 
minutes longer, then follow the previous directions. 
LABOR ASSISTED. 
During the pains No. 5 electrode across upper 
abdomen in A, the sponge-cup pressed against the 154 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE VTICS. 
pubic region, or No. 6 electrode across lower part of 
back in D. Used through term of delivery. After 
delivery use No. 7 electrode across abdomen in G, 
No. 8 electrode from coccyx, long point upward, in 
A, thirty minutes. Use C-E current to soothe and 
A-C current to restore proper nerve action. 
APOPLEXY. 
First. Apply No. 5 electrode base of brain down- 
ward on the spine in A, No. 6 electrode lower limbs 
or feet in II, until consciousness returns; then use 
B-C current in the same manner for fifteen minutes. 
If froth appears at the mouth, a gastric complica- 
tion may be inferred; then apply No. 6 electrode over 
the liver, stomach, and spleen in B, No. 4 electrode 
across lower part of back in D, twenty-five minutes. 
If simply a moist mouth, run the same current B 
base of brain D, in the hands. 
Manipulate with the several directions given, using 
the current quite strong, and timing them very much 
by their effect. 
After the more urgent apoplectic symptoms are 
subdued, the patient may remain more or less paraly- 
tic, when the following treatment is to be pursued, 
not forgetting to guard against the congestive effects 
sometimes wrought by reversed currents, yet not 
being thereby deterred from their careful and thera- 
peutic adjustment and use: 
PARALYSIS. 
In paralysis, whether general or partial, after the 
acute symptoms are improved, the first step is to SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
155 
ascertain if any lesion exists, and endeavor to over- 
come it. In doing this it will suffice to alternate 
the treatment of the paralysis with the following: 
For the lesion : 
First. Nos. 4 or 5 electrode as indicated by the 
position in which it is to be placed, which should be 
below the organ or part requiring treatment, con- 
nected with the positive post of the silver helix, 
the sponge-cup or brush stroked gently and quickly 
over the affected part toward the electrode below 
connected with the negative post fifteen minutes. 
Second. Apply D-F and F-H currents in the same 
manner. 
Third. The vapor-bath, or electric foot-bath, should 
be administered at least once a week with the usual 
current. 
Paralysis proper concerns the nerves of motion, 
of sensation, of nutrition, and other organic functions 
variously; in other words, all the nerves of animal 
and of organic life, with the corresponding muscles 
and organs of sense. The special symptoms present 
such features as belong to the particular nerve-regions 
involved. 
The treatment here recommended is scarcely to be 
put in comparison with the old method of galvanism, 
which is extensively handled in nearly all works on 
medical electricity, as the currents of the combi- 
nation battery differ from all others in the qualifica- 
tions effected by the peculiar arrangement of the 
helices. 
For all forms of paralysis two general rules are 
to be observed; 156 
ELECTR 0- TH ER A PE UTICS. 
Rule first. The currents are most effective when 
broken at regular intervals by hand or by mechan- 
ism. Those not having batteries with the rapid 
vibrator, or Flemming's slow interrupting rheotome, 
can produce the desired effect by the cylinder, which 
may be at regular intervals suddenly drawn out and 
returned, thereby causing slight shocks and func- 
tional responses. 
Rule second. The currents are usually to be given 
REVERSED. 
The application may be general, of the whole 
body or a limb, or local, of a single nerve or muscle. 
In the last case the nerve is isolated at some super- 
ficial portion of its course, the sponge-cup being 
placed here; the other electrode at its distribution ; 
or the electrodes are placed at opposite ends of a 
single muscle, or very small discs may be placed at 
short distances, upon successive portions of its ex- 
tent. Electric gymnastics effect much in stimulating 
nutrition of wasted parts, and in the restoration of 
functional activity, with A-C and D-F. 
The patient must be exhorted to constantly re- 
peated kinesipathic or other voluntary motions, di- 
rected to the paralyzed parts. On the other hand, 
whatever part is affected, the first evidence of re- 
turning power is often a serious temptation to ex- 
haustive effort, which is injurious, and the danger 
of which must never be lost sight of. Furthermore, 
the patient often becomes inattentive to treatment 
when a fair amount of improvement has been effected, 
but may be confidently assured that during long in- 
tervals of treatment improvement is stationary. The SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
157 
applications must be regular, until complete restora- 
tion is effected. 
Having already given the points for localized 
treatment, it remains only to give those for a whole 
limb or other region. If in the upper part of the 
body, the cheek, tongue, larynx, arm, or hand, apply 
along the paralyzed tract the negative with the 
brush, sponge-cup, spatula, or the operator's hand ; 
place the positive upon the roots of the correspond- 
ing nerves, in the spine, graduating the current to 
the electro-sensibility and electro-contractility of the 
patient, using the silver helix, or A-C, E-F, and 
F-H currents, ten or fifteen minutes, or until some 
slight sensation or motion is perceptible, administer- 
ing frequent but not very long applications of this 
kind, never over twenty minutes. 
If the parts are deficient in animal heat, use C-E 
current from the base of brain to the throat, or the 
hands. 
Paralysis of the lower extremities is to be managed 
on very similar principles, if no visceral paralysis, as 
of the bladder, rectum, or anus, is present. Often, 
however, it coexists, owing to lumbar or other injury. 
For this apply No. 6 electrode or the brush along 
the perineum in F. The sponge-cup upon the 
nerve-roots in D, vibrating as directed, for fifteen 
or twenty minutes. Or, if the sphincters are par- 
ticularly affected, introduce the rectal instrument 
into the rectum, or the rubber insulated bladder elec- 
trode to the neck of the bladder in A, No. 5 electrode 
on the spine between the kidneys in D, five or ten 
minutes' treatments, alternate days. 158 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
For the lower limbs. Apply No. 7 electrode under 
the feet, in the positive, the brush to be stroked up- 
ward in the negative, attached to the silver helix, 
ten or fifteen minutes each leg, or until some slight 
response is received; then place No. 4 electrode 
across lower part of back in the positive, No. 7 elec- 
trode still under the feet, in the negative, five minutes 
longer; A-C, D-F, and F-1I currents may be used 
in the same way, the arms or any portion of the 
body treated in a similar manner. The vapor-bath 
is highly efficacious administered twice a week. Par- 
ticular attention should be given to the circulation. 
MYOGRAPHIA-SCRIVENER'S PALSY-WRITER'S SPASM. 
The cause of this distressing malady is indicated 
by its name,-i.e., an overtax upon the nerves and 
muscles brought into play whilst writing. And the 
old notion that it originated because the writer used 
steel pens, and that the metal was the cause, has 
been exploded; the true cause is an overtax, and 
the treatment should be addressed to the cervical 
nerves and general stimulation of the entire cerebro- 
spinal system in the following method : 
First. No. 5 electrode from base of brain down- 
ward on the spine, implicating the cervical nerves in 
C, No. 4 electrode from coccyx upward on the spine 
in A, ten minutes; change No. 4 electrode to the 
affected hand in C, No. 5 electrode on the upper part 
of spine in F fifteen minutes. 
Second. The brush may be used effectually to 
excite cutaneous action, brushed up the arm in H, SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
159 
No. 5 electrode on the spine as before, in F, ten min- 
utes,-daily treatment. 
Local Congestions, Inflammations, and Allied 
Diseases. 
INFLAMMATION OF THE BRAIN. 
First. Wet the hair of the patient so as to make it 
conduct the electric current to some extent. Keep 
the fingers of the right hand thoroughly wet, so as 
to manipulate the head, running them under and 
through the hair, and much of the time moving 
about, as in the rubbing of tonsorial shampooers, 
from the frontal region all over the head, except the 
base of the brain, where No. 2 electrode is placed in 
C, the sponge-cup held in the operator's hand in A, 
three to five minutes each application. 
Second. No. 5 electrode base of brain, on spine, 
downward in B, No. 6 electrode across the liver, 
stomach, and spleen in G-, twenty to twenty-five 
minutes. 
Third. No. 5 electrode on the spine from the waist 
upward in A, No. 7 electrode under the feet, or the 
round electrode in the foot-bath in D, fifteen minutes. 
Fourth. No. 4 electrode small of back in B, No. 6 
electrode under calves of legs in D, fifteen or twenty 
minutes. Use C-E current from base of brain in the 
positive, to the hands in the negative, five or ten min- 
utes to complete either of these treatments. 
The applications may be repeated every two hours 
in severe cases. 
Special attention should be given to any now 
symptoms arising, and local treatment administered. 160 
ELECTRO- TH ER APE UT1CS. 
AFFECTIONS OF THE EYES. 
Disordered vision. 
First. Place the round electrode in the hands of 
the patient in A, the sponge-cup on the eye or eyes 
if both are affected, in C or D, very mild in strength 
(using A-C current for sensory, and A-D current 
for motory affections). 
Second. Wet the hair at the back of the head, 
and use a sponge-cup or cylinder electrode enclosed 
in a sponge at the base of brain in C, stroking up- 
ward an inch or two on the head, using the current 
strong enough to produce a lifting sensation in the 
scalp, a sponge-cup held by the patient with a light 
pressure on the eyes alternately in D, three to five 
minutes each eye. 
Weak eyes. In weakness of the nerves or ten- 
dency to paralysis of the nerves, 
First. Apply sponge-cup lightly on the eye, rub- 
bing outward in A, No. 3 electrode back of the neck 
on the spine in C, not strong enough to produce 
pain. 
Second. Alternate this every other day with F-H 
current. 
Conjunctivitis. 
First. The eye-cup filled with warm water or milk 
(the face must be held downward; the eye may be 
opened in the cup) in C, No. 2 electrode or the 
sponge-cup at the base of brain in B, five minutes. 
If both eyes are affected, change the water, rinse the 
cup, refill it for the other eye, and apply as before. 
Second. Use C-E current in the same manner. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
161 
Third. No. 3 electrode back of head on spine in E, 
the round electrode between the hands in F, five 
minutes, to conclude either of the preceding applica- 
tions when the inflammation is almost cured. 
A nursing infant may be treated while at the 
breast; the mother holding the positive in her hand; 
the operator the negative, with soft sponge electrode, 
with which the eye is to be gently sponged. 
Lachrymal obstruction. Manipulate as for nasal 
catarrh. (See directions.) In obstinate cases the 
small olive or disc may be applied as closely as pos- 
sible over the tear-sac in C, the nasal electrode within 
the nasal passage in D, five minutes; then A-D cur- 
rent five minutes, very mild. If soreness supervene, 
substitute A-C current and C-E current until it is 
subdued. Other variations will occur to the mind 
of the expert. If, for instance, the obstruction be 
evidently low in the duct, the negative may be ap- 
plied with the nasal electrode, and the positive at 
the base of brain a judicious length of time. 
OTITIS-EARACHE. 
For applications to the ear, a speculum-electrode 
of hard rubber is preferred, at the end of which is 
affixed a small bit of fine sponge, to be protruded 
after introduction into the external passage; and, 
not till then, attached to the battery. 
Ear-speculum in D, No. 2 electrode base of brain 
in B, mildly, twenty minutes; substitute C-E cur- 
rent if soreness appears, until relieved. 
Gathering in the ear. 
Syringe twice a day with warm water, holding the 162 
ELECTR 0- THE RAPE UTICS. 
ear downward. Then insert the ear-speculum as 
before directed in B, No. 3 electrode around the side 
of the neck nearest the affected ear in A, five min- 
utes ; change, placing the sponge-cup over the ear 
in E, No. 2 electrode base of brain in B, five minutes. 
Repeat as required, using C-E (soothing) current 
occasionally. 
Deafness. 
The treatment for nasal catarrh may be indicated 
-or that for chronic tonsillitis; besides which, for 
the ear-tissues themselves, follow the preceding di- 
rections: also ear-speculum in B, No. 5 electrode base 
of brain downward on the spine in D, seven to ten 
minutes, very mildly. 
NASAL CATARRH. 
If dry catarrh, treat thus: 
First. Sponge-cup on bridge of the nose in B, No. 
5 electrode base of brain downward on the spine in 
D, five minutes; change to No. 1 electrode around 
the front of throat in A, No. 4 electrode across 
stomach in F, ten minutes. 
Second. The operator holding an electrode in the 
left hand, may place the thumb and forefinger of the 
right hand on the upper part of the nose between 
the eyes in A, No. 3 electrode on the breast-bone in 
D, five minutes; change to No. 2 electrode base of 
brain in A, an electrode between the hands in C, ten 
minutes. 
A new treatment which recent trial has proved 
most beneficial follows: 
Third. No. 3 or No. 5 electrode back of neck from SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
163 
the hair downward in D. Sponge-cup in C, resting 
half a minute on bridge of the nose, and then stroked 
over the eyes outward, keeping the sponge under the 
arch of the brow, five minutes each eye. Conditional, 
on extension of the catarrh to the throat, complete 
the treatment with the sponge-cup stroked around 
the throat and downward over the breast-bone in 
B, No. 4 electrode small of back on the spine in D, 
ten minutes. 
Fourth. Conditional, on theanterior passages being 
the principal seat of disease, use the nasal electrode 
therein, with E, No. 2 electrode base of brain in C, 
five or ten minutes. 
Nasal polypus. 
First. To induce a discharge use the bodkin similar 
to the nasal electrode with a sponge wrapped and tied 
around the end, applied within the nasal passage to 
the polypus in H, No. 2 electrode base of brain in C, 
ten minutes. Alternate with A-D current ten min- 
utes in the same manner. 
Second. After two or three applications a fine 
silver wire may be placed around the polypus in 
D, A at the base of brain ten minutes ; the tumor 
will probably become detached during the second or 
third application; when it discharges, use No. 2 elec- 
trode base of brain in A, sponge-cup base of nose, 
between the eyes, in D, ten minutes. 
Bleeding of the nose. 
The round electrode or sponge-cup between the 
hands in A, No. 1 electrode at the base of brain in C. 
If not relieved in five minutes change to E-F cur- 
rent, holding the hands over the head. 164 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE UTICS. 
TONSILLITIS, PHARYNGITIS, ETC. 
First. The spatula electrode covered with a wet 
cloth on the centre of the tongue in D, No. 1 elec- 
trode around the back of neck in B, ten minutes. 
Repeat as required, once a day at least during acute 
attacks; then, 
Second. Sponge-cup. on the front of throat in C, 
No. 3 electrode on the breast-bone in D, ten minutes. 
If the throat will not tolerate the sponge-cup, the 
operator's hand may be used instead. 
The vapor-bath frequently administered at first 
affords great relief and hastens the cure. 
SORE THROAT. 
Sponge-cup or No. 1 electrode base of brain in B, 
No. 2 electrode front of throat in C or D, as can be 
borne. In violent attacks, use A instead of B, and 
increase length and frequency of applications. 
DIPHTHERIA. 
First. If very severe, place No. 2 electrode back 
of neck in B, No. 1 electrode around the front of 
throat in D, twenty minutes to an hour if necessary. 
Second. When rested, proceed as for tonsillitis. 
(See directions.) An excellent remedy is found in 
the following prescription used as a gargle: two fluid- 
ounces of camphor water, one drachm of chlorate 
of potassa diluted in tepid water,-use every two 
hours. 
ENLARGED TONSILS. 
If acute, 
First. No. 3 electrode on the breast-bone in D, SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
165 
apply through the operator, with the hand placed 
on the external enlargement in B, ten minutes. 
Second. No. 2 electrode base of brain in A, sponge- 
cup externally over tonsils in C, five minutes each 
side. 
Third. No. 2 electrode base of brain in B, the 
spatula on the tongue in D, ten minutes. 
Fourth. No. 1 electrode back of neck in C, elec- 
trode between the hands in E, ten minutes. 
If chronic, 
First. Use the fourth treatment as for an acute 
attack, but continue twenty minutes. Repeat four 
or five times, or until an impression is made, which 
will certainly be marked by soreness, then treat for 
soreness. (See note.) 
Second. No. 3 electrode between the shoulders on 
the spine in C, the sponge-cup stroking forward over 
one tonsil then the other in A, ten minutes each. 
WHOOPING-COUGH. 
No. 1 electrode base of brain in A, No. 4 electrode 
across stomach in C, fifteen minutes; then change 
No. 1 to throat in B, No. 4 or 6 across the liver, 
stomach, and spleen in D, ten minutes. Repeat at 
intervals. 
PAROTIS-MUMPS. 
First. No. 1 electrode base of the brain in B, No. 
2 electrode or sponge-cup on swelling in D, ten min- 
utes. If soreness, change No. 1 electrode to A and 
sponge-cup to C, five minutes more. If the soreness 
becomes extreme, apply sponge-cup to the swelling 166 
E LECTR 0- THERA PE VTICS. 
in A, No. 3 electrode on the breast-bone in B, five 
minutes. 
Second. General treatment. (See directions.) 
Third. If metastasis occur to the brain, No. 2 
electrode base of brain in A, No. 4 electrode across 
the lower part of back in D, ten minutes. Repeat. 
Fourth. If to the mammary glands in the female, 
place No. 2 electrode on the opposite side of the 
breast from the swelling in C, the sponge-cup on the 
swelling in E, ten minutes. General treatment also. 
(See directions.) 
Fifth. If to the testicles in the male, place the 
round electrode in a hot sitz-bath in D, the sponge- 
cup stroked down the spine from base of brain in A, 
ten minutes. Repeat three times daily. 
Sixth. If gastric trouble supervenes, manipulate 
as for gastritis. (See directions.) 
GOITRE. 
First. No. 3 electrode base of brain or between 
the shoulders on spine in B, No. 2 electrode covered 
with a sponge upon the enlargement in D, ten to 
fifteen minutes. Alternate with C-D, treatments 
twice a day. 
The size of the goitre will probably soon lessen, 
and thereupon soreness may occur; relieve with 
A-C current used in the same manner. 
Second. No. 5 electrode from the nape of neck 
downward on the spine in B, sponge-cup moved 
about over the enlargement with a rocking or 
kneading motion in D, ten to fifteen minutes. Al- 
ternate with A-D current in the same manner. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
167 
Each treatment is to be continued about ten min- 
utes, the currents being as strong as can be borne 
without discomfort. The patient may be suffering 
under some prolapsed condition of visceral organs, 
in which case they must be classified and specially 
treated. Frequent inhalations of carbolated iodine 
are recommended. 
LARYNGITIS AND CROUP J ALSO HOARSENESS. 
First. Sponge-cup upon larynx in B, No. 4 elec- 
trode across lower part of back in D, strong, fifteen 
minutes, eight or ten times daily when the case is 
bad; and the throat can be gargled with a weak solu- 
tion of bichromate of potassium, two or three times 
daily. 
Second. No. 1 electrode base of brain in A, B, or C, 
as can be borne, No. 4 electrode across the stomach 
in D, ten minutes. Change No. 2 electrode to the 
front of throat in B, No. 6 electrode across the lower 
part of back or to the feet in D, ten minutes. Use 
C-E current in the same manner. 
For hoarseness. 
First. The vapor-bath if practicable, using sponge- 
cup around the throat and down the spine in B, No. 
7 electrode on the bath-seat for the patient to sit 
upon in D. 
Second. No. 5 electrode from the waist upward 
on spine in F, No. 2 electrode, or sponge-cup, around 
the front of throat in A, five to ten minutes. 168 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
TRACHEITIS. 
First. No. 3 electrode around the throat close to 
the inferior maxilla (lower jaw) in A, No. 5 elec- 
trode from the nape of neck on the spine downward 
in C, ten or fifteen minutes. 
Second. No. 2 electrode around the throat as low 
as possible in C, No. 5 electrode on the spine from 
coccyx upward in E,.ten to fifteen minutes. 
General treatments are recommended, and, also, 
the vapor-bath. 
BRONCHITIS. 
Acute and chronic. 
First. No. 5 electrode base of brain, on the spine, 
downward in A, No. 3 electrode, or sponge-cup, 
lower part of throat, down the breast-bone, in C, 
fifteen minutes. This implicates the bronchial tract. 
Second. No. 5 electrode base of brain, on spine, 
downward in C, No. 6 electrode from lower part of 
breast-bone, extending downward in E, ten to fifteen 
minutes. 
Third. B-D and A-F currents, applied as in the 
preceding treatment. 
Fourth. The vapor-bath should be administered at 
least twice a week, if possible. 
ASTHMA. 
Manipulate as for bronchitis. Diagnose thor- 
oughly, and treat collateral troubles, which are al- 
most certain to be found. 
Inhalations of ozone are highly recommended. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
169 
INFLUENZA-COLD IN THE HEAD. 
First. Place No. 1 electrode base of brain in A, 
No. 4 electrode across stomach in C, ten minutes. 
Second. No. 5 electrode from base of brain, on the 
spine, downward in B, No. 6 electrode across the 
stomach, liver, and spleen in D, fifteen minutes. 
Third. No. 1 electrode on throat in C, No. 2 elec- 
trode back of neck in E, ten minutes. 
Manipulate as for nasal catarrh. (See directions.) 
PHTHISIS-CONSUMPTION. 
In all pulmonary diseases observe the general 
rule, viz., never place the electrodes over the lungs or 
kidney; confine the manipulations to the median line, 
front or back, or above or below the position of the 
lungs or the kidneys. 
First. Place No. 5 electrode (bent to lie close) 
along the front of the throat, extending downward 
over the breast-bone in A, No. 4 electrode on the 
lower part of spine in F. B-D current may be used 
in the same manner, when the patient can endure it 
without pain. 
Second. Manipulate as for bronchitis. Use the 
"running-off" and general treatments. (See direc- 
tions.) 
For the cough, place No. 6 electrode from the end 
of breast-bone downward in C, No. 5 electrode be- 
tween the shoulders downward in E, ten minutes or 
longer. No. 1 electrode across the front of throat 
in A, No. 3 electrode on the back of neck from the 
hair downward in C, ten or fifteen minutes. 170 
ELECTR O- THERA PE UTICS. 
The kidneys require special attention, as these or- 
gans are frequently implicated in consumption (see 
directions for kidney treatment), and regard all other 
local symptoms, such as suppression of menstruation, 
etc., which should receive immediate attention. 
The vapor-baths are usually beneficial. 
PNEUMONIA. 
First. To reduce the fever (see directions), if pos- 
sible, administering the foot-bath in bed. 
Second. No. 5 electrode from back of neck, on 
spine, downward in B, No. 6 electrode across the 
liver, stomach, and spleen in D, twenty to thirty 
minutes. 
Third. No. 6 electrode from the breast-bone down- 
ward over the abdomen in A, No. 8 electrode on the 
lower part of back, the long point between the kid- 
neys, in D, twenty to thirty minutes. C-G same 
manner. 
Fourth. Administer as for consumption. (See first 
treatment.) If the patient is nervous and sleepless 
(see directions), treat accordingly. Use tonics as 
recovering. 
PLEURISY. 
First. No. 5 electrode between the shoulders, on 
the spine, downward in B, No. 6 electrode around 
the lower edge of the affected side of the thorax 
in D, fifteen minutes; transfer No. 6 electrode to the 
lower end of breast-bone extending downward in D, 
fifteen minutes longer. 
Second. No. 5 electrode lower end of spine up- 
ward in G, the sponge-cup placed on the upper part SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
171 
of breast-bone stroked downward to the outer edge 
of the ribs and round the affected side in B, continu- 
ously for ten or fifteen minutes. 
Third. No. 5 electrode from the base of brain, on 
spine, downward in A, No. 6 electrode across the 
liver, stomach, and spleen in C, fifteen minutes to 
relieve pain and soreness. 
Fourth. Administer a vapor-bath or general treat- 
ment. (See directions.) As the inflammation sub- 
sides, use B-E current in second treatment instead 
of B-G. 
DISEASES OF THE HEART. 
Carditis, endocarditis, and pericarditis receive simi- 
lar treatment; manipulate as for pleurisy of the left 
side. 
Cardiac paroxysms yield at once to the following 
manipulations : 
First. No. 3 electrode back of neck from the hair 
downward in B, No. 5 electrode around the lower 
edge of left thorax in C, twenty to thirty minutes. 
Second. No. 5 electrode on the middle part of 
spine in A, No. 6 electrode around the left side below 
the lung in II, fifteen minutes. 
Chronic heart disease receives treatment accord- 
ing to the preceding directions, also a course of 
general treatment, as well as No. 5 electrode from 
base of brain, on spine, downward in B, No. 6 elec- 
trode across upper abdomen in D ten minutes; 
transfer No. 6 electrode across the lower part of 
back in D ten to fifteen minutes; also give attention 
to the circulation. 172 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
GENERAL CIRCULATION. 
First. No. 5 electrode on the middle part of spine 
in A, No. 8 electrode long point from lower end of 
breast-bone in II, twenty minutes; change to D-E 
current in the same manner ten minutes longer, then 
transfer the negative to hands or feet five minutes 
to complete the treatment. 
Second. No. 4 electrode small of back in D, No. 6 
electrode across the abdomen in H, fifteen minutes; 
then place the hands on B and the feet on C ten 
minutes. 
PARETIC DIAPHRAGM.- 
This is attended with weak and sinking sensations, 
etc., from prolapsus of the viscera of the abdominal 
cavity, and is the result of mechanical as well as 
constitutional faults. 
Among these may be mentioned much standing, 
lounging in bad positions, going up and down stairs, 
overexertion, straining, tight or heavy clothing about 
the waist, the general bad habit of women who trans- 
form the natural short waist into the long waist now 
sought, and dyspepsia, all are causes of this very 
troublesome and often distressing malady. 
First. No. 5 electrode on the middle part of the 
spine in F, No. 4 electrode on the upper part of 
stomach in H, twenty minutes. The silver helix 
may be used in the same. 
Second. No. 6 electrode below thorax in D, No. 5 
electrode between the shoulders, on the spine, in B, 
twenty to thirty minutes. 
Third. Administer the vapor-bath, if possible, seat- SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
173 
ing the patient on No. 7 electrode in D, the sponge- 
cup (used as directed in second treatment for pleu- 
risy) stroked down and round both sides in A, fifteen 
or tw'enty minutes. 
INDIGESTION. 
Take daily treatments after meals. 
First. No. 4 electrode across the stomach in D, 
No. 5 electrode between the kidneys in B, twenty- 
five minutes. Alternate with D-E and D-Gr in the 
same manner. 
Second. No. 5 electrode on the middle of the spine 
in A. No. 6 electrode across the liver, stomach, and 
spleen, with a rocking motion,* in D, or the sponge- 
cup stroked around from both sides to the stomach 
in D, fifteen or twenty minutes. This treatment 
should be used in all cases when, after eating, an ac- 
cumulation of gas causes an oppressive feeling, or a 
sensation of heaviness in the head or eyes. If ac- 
companied by vertigo or dizziness, apply 
Third. No. 6 electrode across the upper abdomen 
in E, No. 2 electrode at the base of brain in C, five 
minutes. 
DYSPEPSIA. 
This most common disease is frequently accompa- 
nied by urinary trouble. Treat, therefore, so as to 
* The rocking motion so frequently directed for paralytic, paretic, 
tumorous conditions, etc., is produced in the following manner: The 
operator adjusts the electrode to the desired location, then places the 
right hand upon it, and, with a firm, gentle motion, removes the press- 
ure of the hand gradually from the wrist to the finger-tips, and from 
the finger-tips to the wrist, continuously and alternately, during the 
allotted time of treatment. 174 
ELECTRO-THERA PE V TICS. 
implicate the kidneys and bladder, also the stomach, 
liver, spleen, and pancreas. 
First. No. 4 electrode from the lower end of breast- 
bone downward over the stomach in B, No. 5 elec- 
trode on the middle part of spine in D, twenty-five 
minutes. Change B to the hands five minutes. 
Second. No. 6 electrode across pit of stomach in 
G, No. 5 electrode from between the shoulders, on 
the spine, downward in C, twenty-five minutes. 
Third. No. 5 electrode over the breast-bone down- 
ward in D, No. 4 electrode small of back in E, 
twenty-five minutes. Particular attention should be 
given to the general health and diet. The following 
treatment for morbid liver should also be adminis- 
tered : 
MORBID LIVER. 
First. No. 6 electrode across the lower part of 
back in B, No. 8 electrode, long point over stomach, 
covering liver and spleen in D, twenty minutes. 
Second. No. 6 electrode around the right side, just 
above the hip, rocked gently by the operator, in D, 
No. 5 electrode between the kidneys in G, ten or fif- 
teen minutes. The current from the silver helix 
may also be administered in this way; then to relieve 
any soreness which would naturally result from this, 
change to A-C current without the rocking mo- 
tion, use B-D current in alternation w'ith D-G cur- 
rent. 
Enlargement of the liver. Administer B-D, C-H, 
and C-E currents, using the vapor-bath with A-D 
current as usual. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
175 
CONSTIPATION. 
First. Place the cylinder-electrode enclosed in a 
wet sponge at the anus in D, the sponge-cup, in B, 
used to manipulate the bowels with a kneading mo- 
tion systematically along the course of the large 
bowel from the right groin upward across the abdo- 
men and down to the left groin, twenty minutes; 
alternate with A-D, No. 6 electrode over the bowels 
in A, D as directed before, twenty minutes. 
Second. The spatula-electrode on the tongue in A, 
the cylinder-electrode enclosed in a sponge at the 
anus in D, ten minutes. 
PILES-HEMORRHOIDS. 
First. The cylinder-electrode enclosed in a wet 
sponge at the anus in A, No. 4 electrode across the 
lower part of back in D, twenty minutes; alternate 
with D-F. 
Second. Introduce the rectal electrode with the 
negative, No. 3 electrode from the waist down the 
spine in the positive, using the following currents 
with judgment: B-D, anticongestive, B-F, astringent, 
A-H, circulatory currents. If there is hemorrhage, 
use C-B, styptic, B-F, astringent, and A-F, emollient 
currents, twenty-five or thirty minutes. The general 
health must receive careful consideration. 
COLIC-TENESMUS-CRAMPS. 
Treat all these on similar principles. 
First. Manipulate as for constipation, A-D, with 
the current reversed, the positive at the outlet of 176 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
the passage, the negative in sponge-cup at its sum- 
mit, moved slowly over the abdomen in D, twenty 
or thirty minutes, or No. 6 electrode placed across 
the abdomen in D. If the cramps are very severe, 
treat as follows: 
Second. Apply hot compress over the abdomen, 
on whi'ch place No. 7 electrode in D, No. 8 electrode 
on the back, long point between the kidneys in B, 
ten to thirty minutes or more, very strong. 
Third. No. 3 electrode from the neck downward 
on the spine in C, No. 4 electrode across the stomach 
in E, fifteen to twenty minutes. 
Fourth. No. 5 electrode on the middle part of 
spine in B, No. 6 electrode over the upper abdomen 
in G, fifteen minutes, then over the lower abdomen 
ten minutes longer. 
Fifth. No. 5 electrode from the base of brain, on 
the spine, in D, No. 6 electrode from stomach down 
over the navel in H, fifteen to thirty minutes. 
Sixth. As the patient convalesces, administer F-G 
as a mild stimulant and use general treatments, fre- 
quent applications of thirty or forty minutes. 
DIARRHCEA AND DYSENTERY. 
First. No. 8 electrode on the abdomen in D, No. 3 
or 4 electrode on the lower part of spine in B, fifteen 
to thirty minutes. 
Second. No. 5 electrode on the lower part of spine 
in A, No. 6 electrode from the groin upward on one 
side of the abdomen in G, ten minutes, then on the 
other side ten minutes longer. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
177 
Third. Manipulate as for piles and hemorrhoids. 
(See first treatment.) 
Fourth. No. 5 electrode from the base of brain 
down the spine in C, No. 4 electrode over the pit of 
stomach in E, fifteen minutes ; then change No. 5 
electrode to the lower part of the spine in H ten 
minutes longer. 
Fifth. The vapor-bath if practicable. Twenty 
drops of myrrh in a wineglassful of water, a table- 
spoonful every half-hour, will frequently stop diar- 
rhoea. 
CHOLERA AND CHOLERA MORBUS. 
During an epidemic, a good preventive will be 
found in the regular use of the electric vapor-bath, 
and having some bran crackers at hand at all times 
with which to meet the first cravings of hunger. 
For the paroxysm administer, as strong as can be 
borne, the following course: 
The great characteristic, despite burning pains, is 
deficiency of gastro-intestinal heat. Therefore apply, 
First. No. 4 electrode from the end of breast-bone 
over the stomach in E, No. 5 electrode between the 
kidneys, on the spine, in C, fifteen to twenty minutes, 
or until better. 
Second. No. 6 electrode over the upper abdomen 
in B, No. 7 electrode under the feet in D, or the 
electric foot-bath may be given in bed with the same 
current continued until perspiration is induced. 
Third. No. 5 electrode from the lower end of 
spine upward in G, No. 6 electrode across the liver, 
stomach, and spleen in B, twenty minutes. 
Fourth. A-D current, the electrodes placed as 178 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
directed in preceding treatment, the application to 
be continued until the pain is eased and the evacua- 
tions arrested. 
The patient should be in bed, well guarded from 
draughts or change of temperature. Now wait for 
developments, and if the disease inclines to persist 
or recur, treat at intervals of one or more hours. 
KIDNEY TREATMENTS. 
Weak or sore kidneys. 
First. No. 5 electrode between the kidneys, on the 
spine, in C, No. 6 electrode across the liver, stomach, 
and spleen in E, twenty-five minutes. 
Second. No. 8 electrode on the back, long point 
between the kidneys in G, No. 6 electrode from the 
pubic region upward in C, twenty-five minutes; alter- 
nate until relieved. 
Prolapsed or floating kidney. 
First. Place No. 5 electrode on the spine, between 
the kidneys, in A, No. 6 electrode across the liver 
in D. The operator should place the index finger of 
the right hand under the electrode, near the centre of 
the liver, then draw the cylinder out and return it 
quickly, when the displaced organ will be distinctly 
felt by the patient and the operator to adjust itself 
by the contraction of the ligaments into its normal 
position; this should be followed by a gentle treat- 
ment with the same current for ten minutes longer. 
An electric belt should be immediately placed upon 
the patient, and worn until complete recovery. 
Second. No. 5 electrode on the middle part of 
the spine in A, No. 6 electrode across the upper part SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
179 
of abdomen in D, fifteen minutes; then place No. 
6 electrode across the middle part of abdomen in D 
fifteen minutes longer. Administer this treatment 
for several days, then alternate with one or the 
other of the treatments for weak or sore kidneys. 
(See directions.) 
ALBUMINURIA. 
Diabetes. 
These two affections are considered together, as 
their pathological history and electro-therapeutic in- 
dications are in some respects similar. Albuminuria 
is more or less identified with certain predisposing 
and exciting causes. Lymphatic women who are 
heavy and careless eaters, consuming condiments 
and stimulants largely; or men who are daring ath- 
letes, who habitually and exhaustively exert their 
whole muscular power, or persons whose profes- 
sions cause similar exhaustion of muscular and ner- 
vous tone, especially where the loins are greatly 
taxed; blows, falls, strains; all these are conditions 
which may be precursory to this diseased state of 
the kidneys. 
The cranial diagnosis may frequently reveal a 
lesion of the region of the kidneys, capable of devel- 
opment into Bright's disease, in advance of chemical 
microscopic tests. The treatments of these conditions 
are similar, as already stated, and consist of manipu- 
lation addressed to the kidneys and to the connect- 
ing viscera, according to the directions given for 
inflammatory conditions. 180 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
DROPSY. 
Dropsy is a frequent sequel of kidney affections, 
as well as the result of many other diseases, and 
requires a most thorough diagnosis to ascertain the 
cause, which should be manipulated in conjunction 
with the following special treatments: 
First. Place No. 7 electrode upon a chair or stool, 
and seat the patient upon it in G, with a large 
sponge-cup in A; stroke down the spine from the 
base of brain to the coccyx repeatedly, occasionally 
giving the sponge-cup an outward movement below 
the kidneys toward the hips; continue for fifteen or 
twenty minutes. 
Second. No. 7 electrode upon a chair or stool in D, 
No. 6 electrode over the liver, stomach, and spleen 
in B, fifteen or twenty minutes. 
Third. No. 7 electrode on a chair or stool in A, 
No. 8 electrode under the feet in D, or the foot-bath 
may be used, fifteen minutes. 
Fourth. No. 8 electrode on the back, the point 
between the kidneys in H, No. 7 electrode over the 
abdomen, with a rocking motion, in B, fifteen min- 
utes. 
Fifth. For oedema of the legs, place No. 7 electrode 
under the feet in E, No. 5 electrode bent to encircle 
the leg in C, and by both of the operator's hands 
drawn gently downward over the legs alternately, 
five or seven minutes each. 
Sixth. The vapor-bath, especially if there is swell- 
ing of the face, or if this is not convenient, No. 5 
electrode from the base of brain down the spine in SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
181 
B, No. 6 electrode across upper abdomen in H, 
fifteen or twenty minutes, or A-D. 
The general health and special symptoms as well 
as diet must receive close attention. 
INCONTINENCE OF URINE. 
This difficulty is frequently caused in children by 
local irritation; the parts should be well and fre- 
quently bathed and the child cautioned against chaf- 
ing the parts by yielding to the desire to rub or 
scratch when burning or irritated. 
In adults it frequently occurs from pressure against 
the bladder, prolapsus of the bladder, straining on the 
urethral ligaments, and again from calculi deposited 
in the fundus and irritating the mucous lining of the 
bladder, and ultimately causing muscular relaxation 
of the mouth of the urethra. 
The plan of electric treatment will be about the 
same in all cases, if there exists no obscure reason 
for the weakness. 
First. No. 2 electrode over the bladder in B, the 
cylinder-electrode wrapped in a sponge against the 
pubes in D, ten minutes. 
Second. No. 4 electrode over the bladder in A, 
No. 5 electrode between the kidneys on the spine in 
C, five or ten minutes; treatments may be adminis- 
tered twice a day. 
If complications exist they should be addressed 
with judgment, for they may be the cause of the 
manifest disease. 
When the urine scalds the skin and causes an 
abrasure, great relief can be obtained by bathing 182 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
with tepid water, then applying glycerine, and lay- 
ing a piece of old black silk well saturated with 
water between the parts. This simple attention will 
frequently afford great relief. 
CYSTITIS. 
Metritis. 
For both these maladies the manipulations are 
the same for men and virgins; married women may 
require the vaginal electrode. The use of the vagi- 
nal electrode for virgins is always to be avoided, as 
effectual treatment can otherwise be obtained in 
nearly all instances, even in uterine inflammation and 
displacement. 
First. No. 4 electrode across the small of the back 
in C, No. 2 electrode on the supra-pubic centre in G-, 
fifteen minutes. 
Second. A-D current applied, as in the preceding 
treatment, fifteen minutes. 
For affections of the urethra, vaginal cavity, of 
cervix, and even of rectum, of a suppurative char- 
acter, adopt the principles involved in the cure of 
uterine ulceration. (See directions which follow.) 
Access to these parts is also attainable by way of 
the rectum and vagina. 
Ovaritis. No. 4 electrode over the affected ovary in 
D, No. 2 or 3 electrode on the opposite side in B, fif- 
teen minutes change to C-D current, ten minutes; or 
No. 4 electrode over the affected side in B, the vagi- 
nal or rectal electrode applied with D, fifteen min- 
utes, A-D ten minutes. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
183 
ULCERATION OF THE GENITO-URINARY PASSAGES, 
RECTUM, ETC. 
In these affections the neck of the bladder, vagina, 
cervix uteri, rectum, etc., are subject to irritation 
and even actual ulceration. In this region such 
conditions are evidenced by great pain in urinating, 
and other well-known symptoms, varying according 
to locality, and the degree of the morbid condition. 
The principle of treatment in all these is the same, 
-what may be called, in electro-therapeutic lan- 
guage, a running-off treatment, commonly applied 
thus (supposing it to be the female bladder): 
First. No. 2 electrode on the super-pubic centre 
in B, D attached to the female catheter, which is to 
be simply engaged in the urethra, gradually increase 
the strength of the current until it becomes as strong 
as can be comfortably borne; continue ten minutes. 
Second. A-D in like manner, but withdrawing the 
catheter to the orifice, and there holding it five 
minutes. 
The male organs require a longer catheter, insu- 
lated or not, at the outer portion by gum tubing. 
If uterine ulceration extend to the fundus, it may 
be characterized by membranous or other extreme 
form of dysmenorrhoea, and by an exquisite sensi- 
tiveness to the contact of instruments, the extent 
of the morbid process may render a considerable 
depth of insertion necessary. 
First. The patient recumbent, the battery at the 
side of the couch, attach a conducting-cord to 
Sims's sound, insulated, all but three inches, but not 184 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
yet connected with the battery; No. 2 electrode 
supra-pubic centre in D. Holding the sound, with 
the right index finger guiding it, carry it to, but 
not yet into, the os. Then with a very gentle 
current connect this conducting-cord with the B 
post, whereby the current is made to flow in re- 
verse, acting as a local anaesthetic. Increase the 
strength as the benumbing effect becomes appar- 
ent, up to the maximum of endurance; now grad- 
ually pass the sound quite to fundus. Once fairly 
located, 
Second. Reverse the current, giving B-D still, but 
from above downward. This is done by simply 
changing the position of the pins of the conduct- 
ing-cord at the battery, without disturbing either 
patient or appliances; continue thus ten minutes, 
then, 
Third. Withdraw the sound to the os, and trans- 
fer the pin of the external conducting-cord to A, 
five minutes; when tolerated, increase treatments to 
thirty minutes in all. 
UTERINE DISPLACEMENTS. 
The causes of these very common but avoidable 
affections are long-waisted dressing and its pernicious 
results; weakening of the muscular system by any 
means; everything that excites unduly, or congests 
the uterus and ovaries; falls, blows, strains; and 
carelessness as to voiding the contents of the bowels 
and bladder. 
These cases, with rarest exceptions, need only ex- 
ternal applications of electricity, to cure them per- SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
185 
fectly. Married women, especially if the parts are 
relaxed by child-bearing, may require, as a prelim- 
inary, manual replacement of the uterus, followed 
immediately by internal treatment. If these manual 
replacements are requisite, let it be remembered that 
in repositing this organ, lateral deviation usually 
forms part of the trouble, whatever its main char- 
acter may be, and that the first corrective movement 
must be lateral also; after which, the median devia- 
tion will much more readily yield. 
The importance of prompt attention to these 
troubles may be estimated by a moment's reflection 
on the fact, that in two-thirds of the tubercular 
cases which occur in young girls, the first symptom 
is some form of uterine difficulty. Then the disor- 
dered stomach, wrong eating, with unhealthy tastes, 
impoverished blood, and phthisis. Early attention 
to uterine troubles, seemingly of the most insignifi- 
cant character, has again and again broken up the 
whole tendency, and saved a life from sinking into 
the inherited grave of a consumptive family. 
The general rule to treat the most distressing 
symptoms first, finds an imperative exception in 
cases of "galloping consumption," traceable to and 
associated with uterine displacement, etc. In all 
such cases the special rule is to treat the uterus first. 
In all these cases the object is by the electric treat- 
ment to tone up the muscles and ligaments and vis- 
cera, so that the organs will remain in their normal 
positions. In virginal cases follow the directions for 
married women, with this exception, that the positive 
is placed upon the small of the back, not in the vagina. 186 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE UTICS. 
In the married, the vaginal instrument is used. 
Here, as in all other internal procedures, it must be 
remembered that the mucous secretion acts in a dis- 
persive manner on electric currents; the reversed 
currents are used in many of these applications. 
First. Have hot and cold water at hand; and 
everything else in good order. Place the battery on 
a stand, near the right of the couch; attach the 
vaginal electrode to A, and let it lie in hot water, 
by way of preparation; before introducing, rub it 
with fine soap or glycerine, also lubricate the index 
finger, throw a sheet over the patient, who should 
raise and flex the left knee, keeping the hands 
down ; examine and correct the displacement; then 
pass the vaginal electrode alongside of the finger to 
the posterior cul-de-sac, or, if there be metritis, to the 
os; as indeed may be done in other cases; withdraw 
the finger, holding the instrument inside in undis- 
turbed position ; place a support firmly under the 
electrode; lower the knee; remove the hand; have 
ready the sponge-cup, attached to the conductor but 
not to the battery, with its handle inside the outer 
sleeve of your right arm, that it may not touch the 
patient's limbs; place the palm on the outside of the 
cup, and carry it up to the left groin ; place the sponge 
well over the ovary; connect to the battery in D; 
make the current as strong as can be borne, then 
quickly return the cylinder with the left hand, which 
will cause active contraction ; continue five to seven 
minutes. 
Second. When, after this time, the contraction has 
nearly ceased, lift the pin from the post, and so dis- SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
187 
connect; reapply sponge to right ovary, reassuring 
the patient, and cautioning her to keep the arms 
down ; and proceed as before; five to seven minutes. 
Third. Disconnect as before, and reapply over the 
uterus itself. 
Do not continue longer at either point than seven 
minutes, nor after contraction ceases. If this be 
neglected, great soreness may ensue, and retard the 
cure, even requiring to be antidoted. 
THE IMPROVED METHOD FOR DISPLACEMENTS. 
First. Place No. 4 electrode, with the operator's 
right hand upon it, over the organ prolapsed in D, 
No. 5 electrode from the coccyx upward on the spine 
in A; attach the conducting-cords to the battery, 
and draw the cylinder out quickly, and return it as 
soon as the operator feels the organ assume its nor- 
mal position. One treatment will accomplish this. 
Second. No. 6 electrode across the abdomen in E, 
and change No. 5 electrode to C, and apply gently for 
twenty minutes. Immediately after the treatment, 
an Electric Abdominal Supporter should be fitted to 
the patient, to be worn during the day for several 
months, and thoroughly aired at night. Daily treat- 
ments should be taken, always a local manipulation 
and usually a general treatment, according to symp- 
toms. 
Not less than four days of consecutive treatment 
must be stipulated for, at the commencement, with 
all old cases, as this is needed to be effective, al- 
though the immediate effect is often very marked 
after a single treatment. 188 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
Now come abundant and imperative cautions,-to 
eschew all lifting, reaching up, stooping, going up 
and down stairs, and sexual intercourse, during three 
or four days, at least from the beginning, and later, 
according to condition. And in combing the hair 
the patient must sit down. These warnings are 
requisite to guard against straining the ligaments 
sustaining the uterus to prevent relapse. 
In cases of very limited time, treatments may be 
given, provided all the cautions be observed scrupu- 
lously, twice a day, for four days. If no haste, once 
daily; when, in about thirty days, a cure may be 
expected, or, in very severe cases, sixty days. 
Much of the final success of the treatment must, 
of course, depend upon a better observance of hygi- 
enic conditions than were probably in vogue with the 
patient prior to consultation. 
OVARIAN WEAKNESS. 
First. No. 4 electrode across the small of the back 
in F, No. 6 electrode across the lower abdomen in G, 
twenty-five minutes. 
Second. No. 8 electrode on the back, with the 
point between the kidneys, in D, No. 6 electrode over 
the abdomen, from the waist downward, in A, fifteen 
minutes; then change to D-H current, ten minutes 
longer. 
WEAKNESS OF UTERUS AND BLADDER. 
No. 5 electrode the middle part of the spine in G, 
No. 4 electrode vertically over bladder and uterus in 
B, fifteen minutes. Change to B-E current, ten 
minutes longer. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
189 
WEAKNESS OF BOWELS. 
No. 6 electrode from the left ovary diagonally up- 
ward to the liver in D, No. 5 electrode on the lower 
part of the spine in F, twenty-five minutes. On al- 
ternate days apply from the right ovary to the 
spleen in the same manner. 
PAINFUL MENSTRUATION. 
The efficacy of electricity is unrivalled for the 
treatment of this painful disorder. 
Daily treatment should be administered for a week 
before the menstrual period. 
First. No. 6 electrode from the bladder to the 
navel in D, No. 5 electrode between the shoulders, 
on the spine, in B, twenty-five minutes. 
Second. No. 6 electrode across the upper abdomen 
in E, No. 5 electrode between the kidneys, on the 
spine, in A, twenty-five minutes. Alternate with the 
first treatment. 
Third. No. 6 electrode across stomach and liver in 
C, No. 4 electrode across ovaries and uterus in D, 
every hour. 
Fourth. For paroxysms of pain use No. 4 elec- 
trode low down across uterus and ovaries (if pain 
is chiefly in one ovary, vertically on that side) in D, 
and No. 5 electrode between the kidneys on the 
lower part of spine in B. The current as strong as 
can be borne, which will ease the pain. The pain can 
be checked by vibrating the cylinder quickly. Treat- 
ment may be continued for a half-hour or more, and 
after fifteen minutes' interval repeated, if necessary. 190 
ELECTRO- THE RAPE UTICS. 
Fifth. No. 4 electrode across the uterus in Gr, No. 
5 electrode on the middle part of spine in C, thirty 
minutes. 
SUPPRESSED MENSTRUATION. 
First. No. 8 electrode on the lower part of back, 
the point upward, in D, No. 6 electrode as low as 
possible across the abdomen in B, thirty minutes. 
Second. No. 6 electrode across the lower abdomen 
in B, the cylinder-electrode in D, placed in a hot 
salt-water foot-bath twenty-five minutes just before 
retiring. 
LEUCORRHCEA. 
First. No. 4 electrode across the small of back in 
D, No. 6 electrode from the navel downward over 
the abdomen in F, twenty-five minutes. 
Second. No. 5 electrode between the kidneys, on 
the spine, in G-, No. 8 electrode on the abdomen in 
H, twenty-five minutes. 
Third. No. 4 electrode across the bladder in C, 
the cylinder electrode, enclosed in a wet sponge, 
placed at the external entrance to the vagina in E, 
fifteen minutes. 
IMPOTENCE. 
The hygienic conditions of cure are well under- 
stood, and cannot be overrated. 
The electric treatment is as follows: 
First. The cylinder electrode, enclosed in a wet 
sponge, placed below the scrotum in B, the sponge- 
cup stroked from the coccyx upward on the spine to 
the kidneys in D, twenty minutes. 
Second. No. 5 electrode, between the shoulders SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
191 
in E, No. 2 electrode on a very large sponge, placed 
over the external genitals in G, twenty minutes. 
Third. No. 4 electrode across the small of back in 
H, No. 4 or 6 electrode across the lower abdomen in 
F, twenty minutes. 
Fourth. No. 3 electrode on the spine, between the 
shoulders, in C, No. 4 electrode lower part of back, 
on the spine in F, twenty minutes. 
Fifth. Administer the vapor-bath. 
GONORRHOEA. 
Have a small basin for the exclusive use of the 
patient, place the negative in the water and insert 
the end of the penis. The positive applied above the 
pubic region, or on the spine, or around the penis. 
First. B-D continued for ten minutes. 
Second. Then change to A-D or G-H, ten min- 
utes. 
A woman should receive similar treatment, only 
using the vaginal electrode. 
Repeat once a day, or oftener, according to the 
urgency of the symptoms, and varying with other 
treatments, if needed, to meet special indications, as 
for fever, etc. 
SYPHILIS. 
Primary Ulcers. 
Manipulate, if much inflamed as in gonorrhoea, 
taking care to submerge the affected portion of the 
surface. But in the more common indolent condi- 
tion, whether of chancre or chancroid, a focalized 
manipulation is preferable. A small sponge may be 192 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UT1CS. 
used in D, No. 4 electrode over the pubic region in 
A, ten minutes, then change to A-D ten minutes 
longer, daily treatment, this should bring about a 
simple healing condition which changes to cicatri- 
zation. (See directions for ulceration and treat ac- 
cordingly.) 
CONSTITUTIONAL SYPHILIS. 
Make frequent use of the electric vapor-bath, 
using in alternate B-D and A-D. In addition, treat 
whatever local symptoms exist. For cutaneous 
syphilis, the bath, with mercurial fumigation of a 
mild sort, is required. For mercurialism combined 
with it, resort to the eliminating treatment. (Vide 
cutaneous diseases, etc.) 
BUBO. 
First. Submerge the penis in carbolated water in 
D, sponge-electrode upon the swelling in B, twenty 
minutes. 
Second. A-D, moving the positive over the swell- 
ing toward the negative below, five minutes. 
Third. If great soreness, use A-C instead. 
HYDROCELE. 
Submerge the scrotum in basin of water; or, place 
a wet sponge on No. 4 electrode and accommodate 
the scrotum in it in D; No. 2 electrode, above in B, 
ten minutes; change B to A, ten minutes longer. 
VARICOCELE. 
First. Patient recumbent; having located the 
veins, place No. 1 electrode on one side of them in SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
193 
B, the sponge-cup on the opposite side in C, ten min- 
utes; change to F-H in the same manner, ten min- 
utes longer. Use A-B and A-C current and treat 
daily. 
VARIX OF THE LEGS. 
Varicose Veins. 
The patient recumbent. 
First. Place No. 5 electrode above the heel, and 
overlying the lower portion of the veins in B, No. 3 
electrode beside the coccyx upward on the same side 
in C, treating the worst side first; then the other; 
ten minutes each. 
Second. No. 5 electrode in E, and place both legs 
at once on it, and then each one separately; the 
sponge-cup in B, stroked upward in the course of 
the veins, the worst leg first, ten minutes each. 
Third. Apply A to the base of brain, C at coccyx, 
five to ten minutes. 
Fourth. Vapor-bath every day in both these affec- 
tions. ' 
ANEURISM. 
If near to bursting, maintain a coating of muci- 
lage of quince-seed upon its surface as a precaution, 
combining with it a little vinegar or lemon-juice, ten 
drops to the ounce. Apply with the handle of a 
silver spoon. One ounce and a half at a time may 
be used. 
Wherever located, the principles of treatment are 
the same. Supposing it to be a protruding, anterior, 
aortic tumor, the patient reclining, apply 
First. No. 3 electrode along the spine in C, below 194 
ELECTRO-THERA PEUTICS. 
the level of the protrusion; operator holding E in the 
left hand, wet two fingers of the right with the acid- 
ulated mucilage, and apply, moving them around the 
upper half of the tumor again and again. Continue 
this manipulation twenty minutes. The first two or 
three minutes should be preparatory to this, using 
only a little tepid water to soften the cuticle and 
favor absorption. 
Other aneurisms are to be treated in a similar 
manner, placing the negative on the lower course of 
the artery. 
Aneurism in delicate situations, as about the orbit, 
require careful manipulation; and for this, the posi- 
tive is to be bound on the right wrist of the operator, 
who uses this hand for manipulation, the negative 
being held upon the carotid. 
Aneurism by anastomosis. Treat as for protrud- 
ing aneurism ; negative on the nearest arterial trunk, 
below; the positive applied by hand or by sponge- 
cup. 
First. Treat daily with B-F, twenty minutes. 
Second. But, should it be characterized by extreme 
hardness, as is scirrhus, supposing it accessible, begin 
with C-E, the " warming and softening" current, 
which is diffusive, and prepares the way for B-D, 
which follows it. Use the former twenty minutes; 
the latter five minutes. 
Repeat this daily for several days, or until there 
is perceptible softening or diminution. 
Third. B-D thirty to forty minutes, next day. 
Fourth. A-D in bath, base of brain to feet, twenty 
minutes. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
195 
Fifth. For subsequent nervous irritability, espe- 
cially after B-D, use A-C; the hands to the coccyx ; 
five to ten minutes. 
A nd give great attention to the general circulation. 
INDURATIONS-TUMORS-CANCERS. 
As a general thing the manipulations for these 
diseases should commence with B-D, the breaking- 
up current, having a special affinity for morbid tissues 
and accumulations; A-D, the eliminative, or running- 
off current, effectual in disposing of morbid matter. 
If the growth is internal, place the positive as near 
the tumor as possible, and the negative near some 
emunctory. But should it be characterized by ex- 
treme hardness, as is scirrhus, begin with C-E, the 
warming and softening current, and C-D, the per- 
meating current, which are diffusive and prepare the 
way for B-D. Repeat these applications daily for 
three days,-C-E or C-D current twenty minutes, 
B-D current fifteen minutes. Then use B-D the 
first half and A-D the last half of a forty-minute 
treatment. The other currents most beneficial are 
C-H, B-F (especially in malignant forms), and the 
current from the silver helix. 
polypus. 
( Vaginal or Uterine.) 
First. Place No. 4 electrode across the supra-pubic 
region in B, the vaginal electrode to the growth, if 
in the vagina, or to the os, if within the uterus, in D, 
twenty minutes. Change to C-H, or the current 
from the silver helix in the same manner, for ten 196 
ELECTRO- THERAPE UTICS. 
minutes longer. Repeat daily for a week if neces- 
sary, then the polypus may readily be detached by 
the following method : 
Second. Place a loop of silver wire around tbo 
polypus, or an ordinay uterine sound may be pressed 
firmly against and drawn slowly around its base, in D, 
No. 4 electrode across the supra-pubic region, slowly 
rocked by the operator, in A, fifteen minutes; or the 
current from the silver helix used in the same 
manner. 
TUMORS. 
First. No. 4 electrode on one side of the tumor in 
B, another No. 4 electrode on the other side in D, 
with the rocking motion, fifteen minutes; transpose 
the current and manipulate in the same manner ten 
to fifteen minutes longer; alternate with the same 
current and the same electrodes placed above and 
below the tumor; administer in precisely the same 
manner. These applications should be made fre- 
quently to destroy the life and growth of the tumor, 
by running the electric current through the mass 
in every direction. The work of disintegration 
commences with, 
Second. No. 6 electrode over the tumor in F, No. 
5 electrode on the lower part of spine in D, thirty 
to forty minutes. 
Third. The current from the silver helix ad- 
ministered as in the preceding treatment. 
Fourth. Use the second treatment as directed 
for ovarian tumors, then the absorbent and running- 
off treatments. 
Fifth. No. 6 electrode over the tumor, with the SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
197 
rocking motion, in E, No. 4 electrode small of back 
in C, fifteen minutes; then change to B-H current in 
the same manner but without the rocking motion. 
Sixth. No. 4 electrode above the external promi- 
nence, slowly rocked, in A, the cylinder electrode 
enclosed in a sponge placed at rectum, or vagina, or 
use the vaginal instrument with D fifteen minutes; 
then remove D to the feet, allowing A to rest on 
the tumor ten minutes longer. 
OVARIAN TUMOR. 
Diagnose thoroughly; if displacement of the uterus 
is discovered, give it immediate attention. (See di- 
rections for displacement.) 
First. Place No. 6 electrode across the external 
prominence in B, the sponge-cup moved with a roll- 
ing or kneading motion around the outer edge of 
the tumor externally in D, fifteen to thirty minutes. 
Second. No. 8 electrode, the short point over the 
supra-pubic region in H, No. 6 electrode across the 
lower part of back in C, twenty-five to thirty-five 
minutes. The current from the silver helix may 
be used in the same manner. 
Third. No. 5 electrode from the coccyx on the 
spine upward in B, No. 6 electrode across the ab- 
domen over the tumor in D, ten minutes; change to 
No. 4 electrode a little above the centre of the ex- 
ternal prominence, slowly rocked by the operator, 
in A, the cylinder electrode enclosed in a sponge 
placed at the entrance to vagina in D, fifteen min- 
utes longer. 
Fourth. If the tumor is attached to the ligament, 198 
ELECTRO- TH ERAPE UT1CS. 
place No. 3 or 4 electrode on the abdomen just 
beyond the circumfluence of the tumor, at the point 
where the nearest approach to the adhesion can be 
found, the edge of the electrode pressed steadily 
between them in D, No. 6 electrode across the lower 
part of back in B, fifteen minutes; then place No. 6 
or 8 electrode over the tumor in E, No. 5 electrode 
on the lower part of spine in C, ten minutes longer. 
CANCERS. 
Cancer of the breast may receive direct treatment 
without fear of injury to the-lungs by making the 
application through the breast from one side to the 
other, as follows: 
First. Place No. 1 electrode, or a sponge-cup, on 
the opposite side of the breast from the enlargement 
in C, another sponge-cup stroking down to the can- 
cer if it is an open one, or down to and off at the 
nipple if unbroken in D, fifteen minutes. Both of 
the sponge-cups may be gently stroked toward the 
nipple, and if a discharge can be induced this way 
a cure is almost certain. 
Second. Use B-D, C-H, A-D, and the current from 
the silver helix alternately, or as indicated by good 
judgment. 
Third. If broken, as with all open wounds, apply 
the negative to the raw surface with a sponge or 
folds of cloth intervening. The positive above, so 
placed as to give the electrical flow over the nerves 
to the growth, with G-H and A-D currents. 
Under this process cancers may rapidly slough, 
but without much hemorrhage. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
199 
Hemorrhages of all kinds are readily stopped by 
A-B direct, or B-C and B-E reversed. 
When the surface presents a perfectly healthy 
ulcerated appearance, use C-E current to heal, as 
with other suppurating cavities. If slow to heal, 
apply a wet cloth over the whole suppurating sur- 
face ; or a sponge containing the negative; the posi- 
tive to the surface near by above, with A-F. 
Injury to the skin by the negative is possible in 
manipulating tumors, hence it should be kept mov- 
ing as much as possible, as already directed, toward 
natural ducts and emunctories, but a suppurating 
surface is itself such. 
In all varieties of cancel* there is a great proba- 
bility of other organs, internal and external lym- 
phatics, etc., participating. These are to be watched, 
and morbid changes timely and actively treated. To 
this end, always promote a tendency to the outlets 
of the body: a similar course to the preceding may 
be pursued for all malignant cancers. 
ERYSIPELAS. 
First. If purely superficial, apply sponge-cup over 
a thoroughly wet, soft linen cloth placed on the 
affected part in E, No. 5 electrode between the 
shoulders, on the spine in C, ten to fifteen minutes. 
The current should be gentle during the manipula- 
tion ; the sponge should be stroked around the ex- 
treme outer limit of the inflammation to prevent its 
spreading. During the intervals of treatment, the 
application to the parts of tepid flaxseed tea or 
cocoanut oil as an emollient will be most beneficial. 200 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
Second. If deep involving the fasciae, use B-C, B-D, 
and A-D currents; the positive upon the affected 
part, and the negative below to draw the inflamma- 
tion downward. 
Third. If phlegmonous, guard against suppura- 
tion, arrest it, and cause re-absorption, if requisite 
and feasible, by localized use of G-H alternately 
■with A-D, frequently repeated, covering the diseased 
tract fully with tepid wet cloth, to which apply the 
negative by a large electrode, tied or held in place; 
positive on outer edge of the affected space, and a 
little above. 
Fourth. If pus has already formed in sufficient 
amount to demand discharge, a suitable spot is 
chosen, and the negative focalized there by means 
of the wire brush, with its ends gathered into a 
compact bunch, thus acting as a gradual cautery, 
which is readily regulated in the extent and depth 
to which it shall act; the positive above, and at a 
short distance only from the other pole, uging B-D, 
B-C, and A-D currents. If sloughs form internally, 
space must be made for their escape. If suppuration 
be widespread, several openings may be required. 
Fifth. If sloughing occur extensively, a fatal issue 
is inevitable, unless checked immediately. Hence it 
demands early preventive attention, wherevei- phleg- 
monous erysipelas attacks a dense structure, such as 
the dorsal fascia, either of the thigh or trunk; the 
course recommended for this form in general being 
the prophylactic in such case. 
The general system, and special organs and func- 
tions, must receive careful attention. SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
201 
FURUNCULUS, OR BOIL-ULCERS-FISTULA-INGROWING 
NAILS - BURNS - PANARITIUM, OR RUN-AROUND - 
FROST-BITE -ABSCESSES - SPRAINS ANTHRAX, OR 
CARBUNCLE-FELON, OR WHITLOW-PUSTULA MA- 
LIGNA. 
However diverse in pathology, all these affections 
require like manipulations with electricity. 
An important condition of permanent success con- 
sists in curing the sympathetic extension of the 
morbid process along the track of the nerve-trunks 
involved. Neglect of this is fruitful of relapse, of 
which a sprain affords marked illustration, and with 
which may be classed also the ordinary subacute 
rheumatic joint. Undue use, after relief, also causes 
much mischief in both these cases. 
Stiffening of the joints requires a persistent after- 
treatment for its relief, in accordance with the direc- 
tion under Defective Joints. 
The typical procedure, in all the above affections, 
is this: 
Place No. 3 or 5 electrode above the affected part 
in B. the sponge-cup stroked downward over the 
part in D, fifteen minutes. .Repeat as needed, using 
C-D and A-D currents also. If it is possible to 
place the affected part in a basin of water with the 
negative, do so; if not, a very wet sponge will an- 
swer quite well. 
Ulcers are very often but symptoms of some con- 
stitutional defect, as scrofula, or of general sclerosis, 
as in old people, etc. Diet and other hygienic con- 
ditions must be observed. 202 
ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 
In other cases, organic or mechanical obstruction 
may exist above the ulcer, and must be discovered 
and corrected, as in varicose ulcer. Aside from such 
indications, use, 
First. Select a suitable electrode in size and 
shape, to place above the sore in B, the sponge-cup 
stroked around and over it in D, fifteen or twenty 
minutes; C-D or A-D fifteen minutes to complete 
the treatment. 
Second. No. 3 electrode immediately above the sore 
in G, cylinder electrode, enclosed in a soft sponge 
wet in a weak solution carbolic acid, placed over it, 
in H, twenty minutes; change to A-D ten minutes 
longer. 
Third. Vapor-bath. 
Internal ulcers, if accessible, should be treated al- 
ways with the negative attached to the internal in- 
strument, and the positive located externally above. 
Fistula. Use first C-D, then B-D and C-E cur- 
rents ; alternate with G-H and A-D currents. After 
each treatment, if the fistula is small and the surface 
well dried, a piece of adhesive plaster may be made 
to adhere to the vaginal aspect, supported by a cot- 
ton-glycerine pessary, thus expediting cicatrization. 
Administer daily applications. 
Carbuncles. Treat as for phlegmonous erysipelas. 
The core, or slough of deep fascia, is to be liberated 
by the wire-brush cautery, as soon as possible (see 
directions erysipelas). In boils there is also a slough 
or core, formed, however, of the superficial fascia. 
The core of the felon is formed of the theca of the 
finger, or of the palmar fascia. SPECIFIC TREA TMENTS. 
203 
Felon. Prepare a bath for the finger of saltpetre 
and turpentine. 
First. No. 3 electrode around the arm, just above 
the wrist, in A; place the finger in the prepared 
solution with the cylinder electrode connected with 
JD, quite strong, twenty-five or thirty minutes. 
Second. No. 3 electrode on the arm in G, No. 1 
electrode placed over a fine soft sponge, wet in the 
solution recommended, held gently on the affected 
part in H, twenty minutes; change to C-E current. 
Bandage the finger and keep it thoroughly wet with 
the solution. If it is necessary to lance the felon, 
the sensation may be deadened by A-C current ap- 
plied above and below it during the operation; im- 
mediately after apply A-D. The patient seldom 
loses a nail, and the tendons of the finger need not 
become indurated or inflexible after this treatment. 
PUSTULA MALIGNA. 
A species of malignant boil. It has been induced 
by the reception of an animal infection into the 
system; is gangrenous, and usually fatal, because 
it evades detection until the entire system has be- 
come inoculated. Immediate and frequent use of 
nitrate of silver to cauterize the pustule, and the 
application of a sponge-cup saturated in a powerful 
solution of carbonate of soda, in D, sponge-cup at 
base of the brain in A, twenty-five minutes. If 
a limb or finger is affected, plunge it in the solution 
with cylinder-electrode in D, sponge-cup or an elec- 
trode placed above in A to prevent the poison, if 
possible, from spreading through the blood. Poul- 204 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
tices of flaxseed sprinkled with a few grains of sul- 
phate of zinc. The author can recommend this course 
of treatment, having cured a very malignant case 
when all hope seemed gone. Application of elec- 
tricity should be made every hour, and the vapor- 
bath administered at once, if possible. 
The currents B-D, C-E, G-H, and A-D may be 
used to advantage. 
These pustules have been caused by the bite of 
a blow-fly which had been feeding on putrid carrion, 
-hence the sting of any winged fly is not too insig- 
nificant to demand and receive immediate attention, 
for this disease culminates in from twenty-four to 
forty-eight hours in death unless arrested. 
CUTANEOUS DISEASES. 
The relation of these affections to the neuroses, as 
well as to Electro-Therapeutics, has lately afforded 
an interesting topic for discussion, but being foreign 
to our present purpose, may be here passed by. 
Certain constitutional vices also bear relation to 
them ; and the same may be said of many visceral 
derangements. Each of these concomitants must 
have a full share of attention in treatment. 
Again, certain cutaneous diseases are wholly inde- 
pendent, others closely dependent, on the presence 
of parasites,-vegetable or animal. Even these be- 
come impossible, in a condition sufficiently resistant, 
with due attention to cleanliness or substantial com- 
fort in general. 
The electric vapor-bath is a prominent remedy in SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
205 
all forms ; either in ordinary or with the addition of 
medicated fumigations. These are placed in an open 
vessel, ovei' a spirit-lamp, under the seat of the 
bath. 
The fumigations prescribed should be used with 
caution. For non-parasitic forms the Gnaphalium, 
or Life-Everlasting, is the substance thus used. For 
parasitic diseases, as well as syphilitic, the prescrip- 
tion is eight grains of the black oxide of mercury 
in each bath treatment. The usual application of 
A-D in the bath prevents the penetration of the 
mercury beyond the cuticle, to any extent. The 
oxide is moistened with water, and as the steam 
from the boiler begins to fill the bath, the spirit- 
lamp is lighted ; a window is provided at the side of 
the cabinet, through which the patient may breathe 
the outside air. Continue the bath in the usual way 
twenty minutes. 
By mixing with the oxide an equal quantity of 
simple prepared chalk, it is made to volatilize more 
slowly if desired. 
When the head and face require fumigation, wet 
them with a solution of 2£ drachms of calomel and 
li ounces lime-water; treat locally in bath whilst 
thus wet, using B-C, alternating with the general 
treatment. 
After the fumigated vapor-bath, the patient should 
avoid exposure, not leaving the house for two or 
three hours. Repeat about every other day. 
Leprosy requires the use of the red oxide of mer- 
cury as a fumigation (eight grains to bath). After 
two weeks of such treatment, give fumigation every 206 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
second day only, and on the intervening days a sys- 
tematic treatment, as follows: 
No. 4 electrode vertically over stomach B, No. 5 
electrode from the coccyx up in C, fifteen minutes. 
Eczema, psoriasis, etc. 
All forms of skin diseases require the fumigated 
vapor-bath twice a week, using black oxide of mer- 
cury and the following daily applications : 
First. No. 5 electrode from the base of brain 
down the spine in G-, No. 6 electrode over the liver, 
stomach, and spleen in H, fifteen minutes, change 
No. 5 electrode from the lower end of spine upward 
in A, No. 7 electrode under the calves of legs or the 
feet in D, ten minutes. 
Second. B-C and C-E currents in the same man- 
ner as in the preceding treatment. 
Third. No. 5 electrode from below the shoulder- 
blades down the spine in B, No. 6 electrode across 
the liver, stomach, and spleen in II, and C-D current. 
Fourth. If nervousness arises, use A-C from base 
of brain to the hands, or No. 3 electrode back of 
neck, from hair downward, in E, No. 4 electrode the 
small of back in F, ten to fifteen minutes. 
DISEASES OF THE JOINTS, ETC. 
Chronic or Subacute, Sequelae of Sprains,Rheumatism, etc. 
If tissue-changes are still active, as shown by 
tumefaction, pain, etc., treat as in the acute forms. 
If only the sequel© and consequent disability, 
First. Place the extremity, a foot or hand, as the 
case may indicate, on an electrode or in a foot-bath, 
as most convenient, with G, the sponge-cup moved SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
207 
repeatedly down over the affected part in C, fifteen 
minutes. 
Second. Use B-D and A-D in a similar manner. 
If any paralytic tendency is discovered, use F-H 
between the shoulders and down the arm, or from 
the lower part of spine down the legs, etc., according 
to the part affected. 
The general health should be thoroughly estab- 
lished by the use of proper tonics. 
Synovitis requires the same general treatment, 
and the following: 
First. Apply an electrode covered with sponge in 
bend of knee-joint G, sponge-cup with B brushed 
backward and downward, or a flat sponge covering 
the front and sides of the joint, twenty minutes; 
A-D five minutes, same way. 
Second. If soreness arise, use A-B and A-C. 
Treat fever and other concomitants. 
Such treatment will probably obviate suppuration. 
Suppuration. Open and discharge with aspirator, 
then treat as above, also using G-H current. 
Hot applications are always to be preferred to 
cold. The bath is a most efficacious remedy. D is 
placed in foot-tub and A in sponge-cup, rubbed down 
from the hip to knee-joint and over the knee. An 
electric plaster develops the suppuration rapidly, and 
eliminates the disease. 
Morbus coxarius. White-swelling, treat as fol- 
lows : 
First. Every other day for two weeks give the 
electric vapor-bath, in the usual manner, ten minutes, 
then seat the patient on No. 7 electrode in the nega- 208 
ELECTR 0- THERA PE UTICS. 
tive, and apply sponge-cup with positive above the 
joint and other affected parts successively, holding 
it firmly thereon, acting more deeply than if brushed. 
Second. On the intervening days, C-G and B-D 
from base of the brain to feet ten minutes. 
Reverse B-D five minutes to stimulate. 
Third. Sponge-cup in the positive, and apply above 
the joint; if the knee, use instead an electrode, or a 
knee-cap of brass or other metal with wet cloth or 
sponge between ; the negative below, using D-F or 
the silver helix, twenty minutes. 
Fourth. If very sore, use during the last five 
minutes negative under the foot, positive upon joint. 
This is the same application as is commonly used 
for toothache, neuralgia, and sciatica. (See direc- 
tions.) 
Diseases of other joints of like nature, as of the 
shoulder, elbow, and ankle, may be treated similarly. 
Stiff joints, deformed, contracted, dry, and crack- 
ing joints, all require C-D, permeating D-E, warning 
D-F, stimulating currents in connection with the 
treatments directed for sprains, etc. 
A liberal use of cocoanut oil to thoroughly lubri- 
cate the part and gentle exercise are recommended. 
Weak joints should receive similar manipulation. 
CURVATURE OF SPINE. 
The complicated forms of lateral, forward and 
backward curvature of the spine render it almost 
impracticable to lay down given forms of treatments. 
One observance will always meet with effectual re- 
sults, namely: the positive pole should be applied to SPECIFIC TREATMENTS. 
209 
the contracted side of the spinal curve or curves, 
and the negative pole on the outer or peripheral 
aspect of the curvature. 
First. The patient should be stripped and placed 
upon a flat table or pillowless lounge, although the 
table is preferable for many reasons, and the operator 
should be assisted by a well-trained hand, so that 
the patient may be stretched by grasping the ankles 
and under the arms, and at the expiration of breath, 
proceed to stretch steadily together, always expend- 
ing more strength on the contracted limbs. This 
should be done successively during each treatment 
not more than six or eight times ; during this stretch- 
ing the electricity should be applied as follows: 
No. 5 from the base of brain down the spine in A, 
No. 8 from the coccyx up to the lumbar region in D, 
ten minutes. 
Second. Then turn the patient face downward, a 
sponge-cup on the inward curve in G, sponge-cup 
on the outer peripheral of the curve, in D, altering 
the negative and positive as the curves deflect in 
or out; this ten minutes. The patient should be in- 
structed in a series of gymnastics in order to call 
into action and encourage normal activity of the 
muscles and circulation. 
Third. Every fourth day vapor-bath, or foot-bath, 
the feet should be placed in hot water with the 
round electrode in D, sponge-cup stroked down the 
spine from the base of brain to coccyx in A, and 
about once a week the patient should be seated on 
No. 7 electrode in G; the sponge-cup from base of 
brain down to coccyx, in D, ten minutes; then vigor- 210 
ELECTRO- THERA PE UTICS. 
ously across the diaphragm so as to implicate the 
liver and spleen, ten minutes. 
These cases require patience and judicious admin- 
istration of treatments, which will result in a very 
remarkable amelioration of the conditions. 
The author has had the worst and most compli- 
cated cases yield to this treatment, and in compara- 
tively brief time, the conditions of deformity and 
disease so altered that the crooked, abject patient 
assumed an erect position, and matured in a normal 
manner. 
If the patient uses crutches, great care should be 
exercised in graduating the length of the staffs, that 
they may not be so short as to cause the body to be 
inclined too far forward in walking, thereby com- 
pressing the lungs and stomach; then again that 
they may not be so long that they crowd the shoul- 
ders up and out of position. Another point is to 
admonish the patient to sleep in as flat a position as 
possible, without pillows. Lying flat on the face is 
an excellent plan. Of course in these cases the pa- 
tient must unite an earnest endeavor with the physi- 
cian's efforts towards the one end of health getting, 
for so much depends upon hygiene and the minor 
detailed modes of life, etc. Constipation must be 
guarded against. 
Conjointly, Electro-Therapeutics, physician, and 
patient can achieve marvels. 
Note.-The Brush so frequently referred to by the author is some- 
what similar to a wire hair-brush, and is not illustrated in this volume. APPENDIX. 
This Appendix is added mainly for the benefit of the student 
and practitioner not conversant with the author's system of 
" Cranial Diagnosis." And even to those who are, it will be 
of interest to know how thoroughly confirmatory of her sys- 
tem rational symptomatology and physical diagnosis are. 
SYMPTOMATOLOGY. 
Disease is defined to be " a perversion either of the functions 
or of the structure of the body, or any of its parts." 
It is the special province of the pathologist to determine the 
precise nature, in a state of disease, of. the deviation from the 
normal physiological state or action of the living organism 
under the disturbing influence of morbid causes, and to give to 
each particular disturbance a name and place in the nosological 
system. 
Evidences of pathological conditions, or states of disease, are 
called,- 
Rational symptoms and physical signs. 
" A rational symptom is a sign of disease which is obvious 
to the patient himself or the practitioner without close inspec- 
tion. A physical sign is one determined by examination into 
the properties and material conditions of the organs of the 
body. Symptoms guide us generally by physiological infer- 
ence. Physical signs, by anatomical necessity." By these 
means are determined ordinarily the character of the morbid 
process in any given case. 
Symptoms are local or constitutional, primary or secondary ; 
premonitory, critical, or characteristic ; and are noticed with 
regard to the manifest disturbances of the digestive, circula- 
211 212 
APPENDIX. 
tory, respiratory, tegumentary, secretory, motor, sensory, and 
psychical systems, and may be enumerated as follows: 
Digestive System.-The tongue is pale in anaemia; cold in 
collapse; red in scarlatina, stomatitis, and gastritis; furred in 
indigestion, gastro-hepatic catarrh, fever, etc.; brown, black, 
cracked or fissured, and protruded with difficulty in low fevers. 
The latter applies also to apoplexy. It is protruded to one side 
in paralysis. 
The Teeth are covered with sordes in low fevers; are loosened 
by severe salivation; and their rapid decay indicates constitu- 
tional debility. 
The Gums when swollen, soft, spongy, and prone to bleed, 
indicate scurvy. A blue line along the edge of the gums indi- 
cates lead-poisoning. A red line is sometimes observed in 
phthisis, and a white line in approaching salivation ; this is soon 
followed by swelling, soreness, and a coppery taste. 
The Taste is bitter in derangements of the liver and dys- 
pepsia ; sour in gastric indigestion ; saltish in haamoptysis and 
consumption; putrid in gangrene of the lungs. 
Appetite is deficient in all acute diseases; excessive in ill- 
governed lives; sometimes in nervous affections, diabetes, 
and worms; perverted in hysteria, chlorosis; sometimes in 
pregnancy. 
Thirst is excessive in high fever and low collapse. 
Difficulty in swallowing may be due to inflammation of the 
fauces, tonsils, or pharynx, spamodic constriction of the throat, 
obstruction, tumor, abscess, and low debility. 
Nausea and Vomiting may be caused by indigestion, 
colic, pregnancy, gastritis, hysteria, cholera morbus, cholera, 
bilious fever, yellow fever, ulcer of stomach, cancer of stom- 
ach, disease of the brain, Bright's disease of kidneys, strangu- 
lated hernia, poisoning. 
Circulatory System.-The heart. The principal symp- 
tom connected with this organ is disturbed action or palpita- 
tion, and may arise from either of the following pathological 
conditions : inflammation of the heart or its investing mem- 
branes, hypertrophy of the heart, chronic valvular disease, APPENDIX. 
213 
anaemia, nervous irritability, disorder of the brain, dyspep- 
sia. The normal impulses of the heart are already given in 
the body of this book. But the pulse is an important factor 
in determining the nature of given abnormal conditions. In 
disease the pulse may be natural or strong, weak, firm, yield- 
ing, full, small, bounding, compressible, rapid, slow, quick, 
jerking, hard, soft, tense, gaseous, corded, wiry, thready, im- 
perceptible, regular, irregular, intermittent, dicrotus. Without 
stopping to define all these terms, as that may with propriety 
be referred to the medical lexicographer, it is not out of place 
to say that only skill, combined with much practice, is able to 
recognize the distinction between a rapid and quick pulse and 
a full and strong one, yet to be able to do this is very important 
to the practitioner. 
The fever pulse is moderately accelerated with an increase of 
force to the impulse of the heart. But the pulse of inflamma- 
tion is hard, tense, and full. 
When nervous irritation is the disturbing cause, the pulse 
is usually quick and variable, in rapidity and force, as the 
patient may be either in a state of excitement or repose. 
A jerking pulse indicates valvular disease. In extreme 
debility the pulse is usually very rapid, and very small or 
" thready." Irregularity of the pulse is too general, and due 
to too many causes, to have any special pathological value. 
The dicrotus, or double pulse, is to be met with in continued 
fevers, and is always indicative of a want of tone in the mus- 
cular fibres of the arteries, giving rise to a perceptible interval 
between their impulse and the impulse of the ventricles of the 
heart. 
The blood itself furnishes the most reliable data in deter- 
mining the nature of morbid changes in the system. But as 
these peculiarities require microscopic inspection and chemical 
analysis, reference can only be made to the fact, leaving the 
demonstration to the pathologist and the chemist. 
Hemorrhages.-Epistaxis, or bleeding at the nose ; haemop- 
tysis, or spitting of blood ; haematemesis, or vomiting of blood ; 
haematuria, or bloody urine ; uterine hemorrhage ; hemorrhage 214 
APPENDIX. 
from the bowels ; will be more particularly referred to as they 
occur in the symptomatology of particular diseases. 
The Respiratory System.-Dyspnoea, or difficult breath- 
ing, may be due to irrespirable gases in the air, morbid change 
in the blood, obstruction or constriction of the air-tubes, bron- 
chitis, pneumonia, pleurisy, phthisis, heart disease, aneurism 
of thoracic aorta, cancer in the chest, hydrothorax, dropsy. 
Coughing.-The character of a cough will usually and with- 
out difficulty determine its cause. 
A dry and hollow cough is generally nervous or sympa- 
thetic. Dry and tight in acute bronchitis; hacking in incip- 
ient consumption; deep and distressing in confirmed con- 
sumption ; barking and hoarse in spasmodic croup; whistling 
in membranous croup; paroxysmal and whooping in whoop- 
ing-cough. 
Expectoration is mucous in catarrh and primary bronchitis ; 
purulent in advanced and protracted bronchitis; rusty in 
second stage of pneumonia; bloody and muco-purulent in 
consumption ; nummular and heavy in advanced consumption ; 
putrid in gangrene of the lungs. 
The Breath, in temperature, is higher in fever, lower in 
prostration, and when absolutely cold, is an almost certain 
symptom of speedy dissolution. In odor the breath is rarely 
agreeable, except in healthful childhood. It is very heavy in 
the incipient stages of fever. Sour in indigestion; offensive 
from a variety of causes, frequently decayed teeth; rotten in 
gangrene of the lungs. 
Stertorous, or loud breathing, primarily due to relaxation of 
the palate, indirectly to cerebral oppression, which may be 
caused by apoplexy, fracture of the skull, drunkenness, nar- 
cotism. 
Hiccough, produced by spasmodic contraction of the dia- 
phragm, may be the result of indigestion, nervous disorder, or 
exhaustion. It is not serious except in the latter case. 
Tegumentary System.-In fever the skin is hot and dry. 
Moisture of the skin is always favorable, except in the cold, 
clammy perspiration of consumption and extreme prostration. APPENDIX 
215 
With regard to color, the skin is pale in anaemia, fainting, etc.; 
flushed in fever and cerebral congestion; flush is very bright 
on cheeks in hectic fever; forehead and eyes are flushed in 
yellovz fever. The skin is purple or livid in low, continued 
fever; yellow in jaundice, bilious and yellow fever; sallow in 
chlorosis, dyspepsia, cancer; blue in collapse, almost black in 
asphyxia. The great variety of eruptions that occur on the 
skin will be described in the section on skin diseases. 
Secretory System.-Alvine. Constipation may be due to 
torpor of the muscular coat of the alimentary canal, deficient 
secretion of the liver or intestinal glands, defective innervation 
from spinal or cerebral disease, stricture of rectum or colon, 
strangulated hernia, intussusception (a portion of an intestine 
falling into another and becoming strangulated), pregnancy, 
cancer, sympathetic disturbance. 
Diarrhoea and dysentery will be more particularly described 
farther on. 
Urination may be difficult, or there may be retention of 
urine; incontinence of; excessive discharge of, or there may 
be a morbid character to the urine itself (the latter we must 
refer for want of space to medical chemistry). Retention may 
be due to spasmodic constriction of the vesico-urethral mus- 
cular fibres, true stricture of the urethra, enlarged prostate, 
calculus in the bladder or urethra. Suppression is a very seri- 
ous symptom, and if long continued produces fatal uraemic 
poisoning. 
Excessive urination may be hysterical, or the result of cold or 
diuretic medicines. But as a symptom of diabetes is very grave. 
The average amount of healthy urination in twenty-four 
hours is from thirty to forty ounces ; quantity slightly increased 
in winter. It is normally acid, and in health of an amber 
color. Specific gravity 1017-20. A decided deviation from 
this standard denotes disease. 
Milk. The quality and quantity of the mother's milk may 
be so affected by diseased conditions, or even mental impres- 
sions, as to not only cease to be nutritious, but positively inju- 
rious to her child. A sudden arrest of this secretion, combined 216 
APPENDIX. 
with a too early cessation of the lochia after parturition, is 
followed by puerperal fever. 
Menstruation, although thus classified, is not a secretion, but 
is simply a periodical flow of somewhat altered blood, induced 
by (physiological) ovarian congestion, incident to monthly 
ovulation. 
The principal pathological deviations are amenorrhcea (non- 
appearance, suppression, or retention), dysmenorrhoea (painful 
menstruation), or menorrhagia (excessive menstruation). 
The diagnosis of these affections belongs properly to the 
gynaecologists. 
Perspiration, when strongly odoriferous, indicates vicarious 
excretions through the perspiratory glands, and arises from in- 
sufficient action of the kidneys and bowels. A characteristic 
odor of the perspiration is peculiar to measles, scarlatina, small- 
pox, Bright's disease, typhus, gout, etc. 
Motor System.-Inability to rise from a recumbent posi- 
tion may be due to debility, paralysis, inflammation, or in- 
juries. Inability to lie down, due generally to dyspnoea (dif- 
ficult breathing). A desire to lie upon the abdomen denotes 
colic; upon the back with knees drawn up, peritonitis; upon 
the right side, enlargement of heart or liver; prone or semi- 
prone position, aneurism of aorta. 
Muscular debility arises from total want of exercise, acute 
disease, exhaustion, prostration, paralysis. 
Spasms are tonic, clonic, and choreic. Tonic spasm is fixed 
rigidity, as in tetanus ; clonic, successive muscular contraction 
at short intervals, as in ordinary convulsions ; choreic, a jerk- 
ing, irregular, muscular movement, beyond the power of the 
will, as in chorea. 
Subsultus tendinum is a jerking of the tendons at the wrist, 
and is common in low fevers, indicating approaching dissolution. 
Hemiplegia is paralysis of one side of the body; paraple- 
gia is paralysis of both lower extremities, and are terms ap- 
plied to loss of power or loss of sensibility, or both. 
Sensory System.-Here the important symptom is pain, and 
this may be acute, sharp, cutting, shooting, darting, lancinating, APPENDIX. 
217 
gnawing, tearing, dull, heavy, aching, griping, twisting, hear- 
ing down, pulsating, burning, smarting, stinging, nettling, 
constant, intermitting, fixed, wandering. 
Tenderness on pressure indicates inflammation. Pain re- 
lieved by pressure indicates the absence of inflammation. 
Anaesthesia is the term applied to a total loss of sensation. 
The Eyes, when prominent and turgid, indicate acute oph- 
thalmia, or congestion of the brain. The prominence of one eye 
alone would indicate a tumor behind the orbit, or some other 
local disease. In wasting maladies, as consumption, the eyes 
are sunken. Rolling the eyeballs indicates, especially in chil- 
dren, nervous or cerebral irritation. Enlargement of the blood- 
vessels of the eye and reddened membranes indicate conjunc- 
tivitis ; when the enlarged blood-vessels converge toward the 
margin of the cornea, sclerotitis; discoloration, irregularity, 
and fixedness of the pupil, iritis. 
The eyes are lustreless in depressing disease, especially in 
approaching death. Consumption, however, is an exception, 
in which case they are usually remarkably bright. They glare 
in mania and cerebral inflammation. 
Contracted pupil indicates retinal or cerebral inflammation, 
opium or strychnia narcotism. 
Dilated pupil, amaurosis, cataract, apoplexy, hydrocephalus, 
belladonna or stramonium narcotism. 
Dread of light, in ophthalmia, meningitis, cerebritis. Other 
symptoms connected with the eyes are flashes of light, moving 
spots, dimness of vision, double vision, half-sight. 
The Ears.-Ringing in the ears, technically called tinnitus 
aurium, may depend upon cerebral congestion, nervous debility 
over doses of quinine. 
Deafness may be caused by cold in the head, wax in the ears, 
disease of the ear, softening of the brain, typhus or typhoid 
fever, quinine. 
Pain in the Head. This is the questio vexata of the profes- 
sion, both as to cause and treatment. The following state- 
ments are only generally true: When the pain is on one 
side, extending to the face, and is shooting or darting in char- 218 
APPENDIX. 
acter, it is neuralgic. When the pain is attended by stiffness 
of the muscles that move the head, it is rheumatic. When it 
is throbbing, pulsating, and accompanied by "heat of the head, 
it is febrile, congestive, or toxaemic. When pain is on top of 
the head it indicates uterine irritation. Constant or periodic 
pain in one spot is due to chronic cerebral disease. 
Psychical System.-The face gives many indications in dis- 
ease in its varied expressions. The expression of countenance 
is anxious in heart disease and acute abdominal disorders; 
sad and desponding in Hypochondriasis; terrified in delirium 
tremens ; full of rage in hydrophobia and mania. The counte- 
nance of extreme exhaustion and approaching death is techni- 
cally called the facies Hippocratic®. 
Delirium is active in acute cerebral inflammation, passive in 
low fevers. Stupor may be due to alcoholic drunkenness, which 
may be distinguished by the breath; the stupor of opium-poison- 
ing may be distinguished from this by the firmly-contracted 
pupil of the eye, and the absence of alcoholic odor. The stupor 
of typhus is known by its history ; stupor of apoplexy and com- 
pression of the brain are not easily distinguished. 
MODES OF DEATH. 
1st. By asthenia; the vital forces of the system being ex- 
hausted, the heart ceases to beat. 
2d. By anaemia; there being no longer a sufficient quantity 
of blood to sustain life. 
3d. By asphyxia, or arrest of respiration. 
4th. By coma; the brain being rendered incapable of sus- 
taining innervation. 
The causes of sudden death are apoplexy, valvular heart dis- 
ease, rupture of the heart, bursting of an aneurism, suffocation, 
violent shock. 
Physical Diagnosis has been very properly called " Organ- 
ography." The methods employed in physical exploration are 
called inspection, mensuration, palpation, succussion, spirom- 
etry, percussion, auscultation. 
These methods are so complex, and the chapter of signs so APPENDIX. 
219 
extended, that it would be impossible to give them in brief, and 
the student is respectfully referred to some one of the many ex- 
cellent works on " Physical Diagnosisand having given in a 
very condensed manner the essential rational symptoms of 
diseased conditions of the human body, we shall proceed in like 
manner to state the symptoms characteristic of particular dis- 
eases to be dealt with in practice. 
DISEASES* 
AFFECTIONS OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 
Pneumonia.-D., Inflammation of lung-substance; V-, 
single, double, lobular, according to seat; S., commencing 
with a chill, followed by fever, oppressed breathing, dull pain 
in the chest, short cough, rusty expectoration, temperature 
high, secretions scant, delirium common ; C., exposure to cold, 
more especially when suddenly applied to chest, malarial in- 
fluence, tuberculosis. 
Pleurisy.-D., Inflammation of pleura ; V., single, double, 
primary, traumatic, secondary; S'., cold stage or chill, sharp 
pain in the side, oppressed and rapid respiration, short, sharp 
cough, fever, pain intense by taking a long breath, and increased 
when lying on affected side; C., ordinarily, exposure to damp 
and cold, also fractured ribs, punctured wounds, cancer, tuber- 
culosis. 
Pulmonary Abscess.-D., Abscess of the lung; S., all the 
symptoms of pneumonia, pleurisy, and phthisis may be present. 
A sudden cessation of all the acute symptoms, and a free, pro- 
fuse, purulent expectoration decides the case. C., inflammation 
or injury of the lung. 
Gangrene of the Lung.-&, Copious, brown, and very 
offensive expectoration, rotten breath, dyspnoea, extreme pros- 
tration ; C., violent inflammation of pneumonia, cancer in the 
chest, pyaemia, depraved state of the system. 
Pulmonary Emphysema.-D., Dilatation of the air-cells 
* Abbreviations.-Capitals used denote as follows: D., Definition; F., Va- 
rieties; Syn., Synonymes; S., Symptoms; C., Causes. 220 
APPENDIX. 
of one or both lungs ; S., dyspnoea, blueness of the lips ; when 
severe, of the whole surface of the body; sometimes wheezing 
respiration; C., prolonged asthma, chronic bronchitis. 
Bronchitis.-D., Inflammation of the mucous membrane 
of bronchial tubes ; V., acute, chronic, general, capillary, plas- 
tic, rheumatic, syphilitic; S., depression followed by fever, 
tightness and soreness of upper and front part of the chest, 
cough at flrst dry, short, tight, later deep and loose; expectora- 
tion at first mucous, afterwards, if severe, purulent. Dyspnoea 
and tendency to depression and prostration more marked in 
capillary bronchitis. Cough, expectoration, slight dyspnoea 
without fever, characterize chronic bronchitis. C., exposure to 
cold, mechanical irritation by inhaling foreign substances or 
noxious gases, rheumatic transference, tertiary syphilis. 
Asthma.-D., Paroxysmal and spasmodic dyspnoea; V-, 
primary, symptomatic, dyspeptic, and hay asthma; S., dyspnoea 
is the characteristic symptom, wheezing respiration, expansion 
of the chest, anxious pallid countenance, perspiration copious, 
generally expectoration, at first difficult, usually thick, and 
in pellets; C., primarily, predisposing or hereditary; exciting 
causes may be obnoxious inhalations, reflex nervous action, 
pulmonary or cardiac disease. 
Bronchial Dilatation is fortunately rare because incur- 
able, and because of the troublesome cough and profuse muco- 
purulent expectoration is usually mistaken for phthisis. 
Laryngitis.-D., Inflammation or congestion of the mu- 
cous membrane of the larynx ; S., hoarseness, dry, short, harsh 
cough, soreness in breathing; when severe, fever, with " brassy" 
cough, distressing dyspnoea, difficult swallowing; C., swallow- 
ing hot or acrid fluids, inhaling irritant gases, may accompany 
phthisis or secondary syphilis. 
Aphonia.-D., Loss of voice; V., functional and structural, 
clergymen's sore throat; C., functional aphonia may be hyster- 
ical, or enfeeblement and want of co-ordination of the vocal 
muscles ; structural, when vocal cords are destroyed by ulcer- 
ation, tumors, etc. Clergymen's sore throat is described as 
" follicular disease of the pharyngo-laryngeal membrane," and APPENDIX. 
221 
is characterized by soreness, disposition to hawk and expectorate, 
with hoarseness or partial aphonia. 
Aphasia.-D., Loss of speech. Admitting the observations 
of Trousseau, and the subsequent speculations of Broca, that 
the seat of the faculty of language is "in the anterior frontal 
convolutions of the left hemisphere of the cerebrum," then soft- 
ening or inflammation of, or injury to that part of the brain, 
would account for this disease. 
Laryngismus Stridulus.-D., Closure of the glottis; S.} 
stridulous or shrill, whistling respiration. A disease of infancy, 
and occurs during dentition. 
Croup.-D., Inflammation of the trachea; V., inflamma- 
tory, pseudo-membranous; S., a hoarse, barking cough, op- 
pressed and audible respiration, spasm of the glottis and mus- 
cular coat of the trachea, and in the latter variety formation 
of false membrane in the larynx and trachea. 
Pleurodynia.-D., Intercostal rheumatism; S., dull, heavy 
pain on one or both sides, increased by deep breathing or 
coughing, or motion of arms and trunk, without fever; C., 
rheumatic diathesis. 
Intercostal Neuralgia.-«S., Sharp, lancinating, inter- 
mitting or periodical pains between sixth, ninth, and tenth 
ribs ; C., neuralgic diathesis. 
Thoracic Myalgia.-D., Pain in the superficial muscles 
of the chest; C., pressure, constrained position, ill nourish- 
ment, overwork. 
Phthisis Pulmonalis.-D., Tuberculous consumption of 
the lungs; this is by far the most important, because the most 
common and most fatal disease of the respiratory organs ; V., 
acute, chronic, and latent; S., may be the sequelae to any of 
the diseases already described, or may begin as a primary dis- 
ease, with a slight hacking cough, or with a hemorrhage, 
both slowly increasing in severity (hemorrhage not always 
present), pains in the chest, pallor, accelerated pulse, increased 
temperature, chills followed by fever, emaciation, arrest of 
menstruation in females, night-sweats, diarrhoea ; spirits of pa- 
tient generally exalted and hopeful even to the last. Perhaps 222 
APPENDIX. 
we cannot do better than to quote here the description of this 
disease by the late Prof. N. Chapman : 
" The cheeks are hollow, the bones prominent, the skin arid, 
the nose sharpened and drawn, the eyes sunken, with the ad- 
nata of a pearl color, destitute of vascularity, the lips retracted, 
so as to produce a bitter smile, and the hair thinned by falling 
out, the neck wasted, oblique and somewhat rigid or immova- 
ble, the shoulder-blades projected or winged, the ribs naked 
or exposed, with diminution of the intercostal spaces, and the 
thorax apparently narrowed; the abdomen flat, the joints, 
great and small, seemingly enlarged from the wasting of the 
integuments, the nails livid, and occasionally incurvated, the 
extremities oedematous ; the angular points on which the body 
rests, in several points protruded through the skin,-the whole 
attended by a most afflicting cough, aphthae, sore throat, diffi- 
cult deglutition, and feeble, whispering voice, or entire extinc- 
tion of it." 
C., Generally hereditary taint, most frequently found nearest 
sea-level. High, dry, and equable climates most exempt from 
it, even when cold. The disease is never found in Arctic 
countries, and is more prevalent in the Southern than the 
Northern States. Impure air, sedentary employments, excesses 
of all kinds, and everything that depresses vital forces are 
predisposing causes. 
ORGANS OF CIRCULATION. 
Pericarditis.-D., Inflammation of the investing mem- 
branes of the heart; V., primary and rheumatic; £, fever, 
radiating pains from the heart, tenderness on pressure, pulse 
rapid, feeble, and irregular, short hacking cough, counte- 
nance anxious, sometimes nausea and vomiting, frequently 
delirium; as the end approaches, face livid and swollen, so 
also the hands and feet; C., most commonly rheumatic fever, 
gout, and Bright's disease of the kidneys are also assigned as 
causes for it, but the proof does not seem to be clear. 
Endocarditis.-D., Inflammation of the lining membrane 
of the heart. Symptoms and causes same as in pericarditis. APPENDIX. 
223 
Valvular disease, dilatation of the heart, fatty degeneration 
of the heart, can only be differentiated from other diseases of 
the heart by cranial or physical diagnosis. 
Modes of sudden death in heart disease are enumerated as, 
1, arrest of the heart's action from debility of the muscular 
walls; 2, spasm of the ventricles; 3, obstruction or regurgita- 
tion ; 4, rupture ; 5, heart-clot. 
Angina Pectoris.-D., Disease of the nerves of the heart; 
<8., sudden attack of severe pain, extending from the heart, 
along the left arm, stricture in the chest, prostration and 
alarm; C., organic disease of the heart, retrocedent gout. 
Exophthalmic Goitre is an uncommon disorder, involving 
an enlargement of the thyroid gland in the neck, overaction 
of the heart, and prominence of the eyeballs. 
Palpitation.- P., Nervous, dyspeptic, rheumatic, hyper- 
trophic. All these forms except the latter are purely func- 
tional. The hypertrophic form is organic, and may be dis- 
tinguished from the functional forms by the fact that in 
enlargement of the heart active exercise causes great distress, 
dyspnoea, and great acceleration of the pulse. 
Cardiac Exhaustion.-D., Muscular exhaustion of the 
heart; <8., rapid, weak pulse, greatly accelerated, with oppressed 
breathing, on even slight exertion, with no evidence of val- 
vular or other organic disease of the heart; C., over-fatigue, 
deficiency of rest and food. 
Aneurism of Thoracic Aorta.-S., Bulging of the chest, 
in which there is a pulsation, differing from the impulse of 
the heart, with a perceptible thrill, pain on pressure, cough, 
dyspnoea, aphonia, difficulty of swallowing. 
ORGANS OF DIGESTION. 
Stomatitis.-D., Inflammation of the mouth. V., 1, Simple 
stomatitis ; 2, aphthae ; 3, thrush ; 4, ulceration ; 5, gangrene; 
6, salivation ; 7, nurse's sore mouth ; 8, scorbutic. 
1. Simple Stomatitis.-<8., Redness, swelling, heat, and 
soreness of the tongue, gums, lining membrane of the cheeks, 224 
APPENDIX. 
palate, and fauces; C., hot or corrosive liquids taken into the 
mouth. 
2. Aphthae.-<$., Small white ulcers, following a vesicular 
inflammation of the mouth. The vesicles are small and oval- 
shaped, and contain serum, attended by fever and disorder of 
stomach. 
3. Thrush.-&, A disease of infancy, and is characterized by 
a number of small whitish points in the mouth that run together, 
and discharge a whitish curd-like exudation; may be attended 
with fever, nausea and vomiting, mouth hot, stomach dis- 
ordered. 
4. Ulceration.-S., Begins on the cheeks, gums, and lining 
of the lips ; may extend to the fauces. The ulcers are yellow- 
ish-white, painful, and their discharge gives an offensive odor 
to the breath. 
5. Gangrene -C., Extreme inflammation or ulceration of 
the mouth, morbid states of the system (crowd poison); &, ash- 
colored ulcers, that soon begin to slough and discharge an acrid 
offensive fluid, breath very fetid, copious salivation, and unless 
the disease is checked spreads rapidly to the surrounding parts, 
followed by low fever, diarrhoea, prostration, death. 
6. Salivation.-D., Mercurial sore mouth; S., "coppery" 
taste, soreness of the gums, tenderness of the teeth when pressed 
together, redness and swelling of the gums, with broad white 
line along their edges, and in severe cases ulceration and gan- 
grene may follow. 
7. Nurse's Sore Mouth.-S., Begins with small, hard, pain- 
ful swellings in the mouth, which ulcerate and cause considerable 
local and constitutional irritation; C., it is peculiar to women 
nursing children, and to an advanced state of pregnancy. 
8. Scorbutic.-See Scurvy. 
Tonsillitis.-Syn., Quinsy; <S., beginning with sore throat, 
pain and swelling of one or both tonsils and fever; unless re- 
lieved, pain becomes constant and throbbing, swelling increases, 
swallowing difficult and painful in the extreme, and tonsillar 
abscess mercifully relieves the trouble. 
Pharyngitis.-D., Sore throat; V., acute, chronic, ulcera- APPENDIX. 
225 
tive. A sore throat is too common to need description ; when 
the disease becomes chronic, the mucous membrane becomes 
permanently thickened, sometimes granulated and abnormally 
dry, and constantly sore. Ulcerative sore throat is rarely 
primary, but is a usual accompaniment of tuberculosis and 
secondary syphilis. 
Gastritis.-D., inflammation of the stomach; S., pain in 
stomach, tenderness on pressure, constant nausea, restlessness, 
and fever. We have seldom simple gastritis. It usually as- 
sumes the form of a " bilious attack," and involves the duode- 
num and liver. In which case there is usually vomiting of an 
acrid, greenish-yellow fluid, headache, dizziness, constipation, 
and fever. 
Ulcer of the Stomach.-<$., Dull sickening pain in the 
stomach, increased by motion, food, especially when hot, and 
sugar, extreme local pain on pressure, frequent vomiting; vom- 
iting of blood is an important symptom. 
Cancer of the Stomach.-S., Pain, often excruciating, 
tenderness in proportion to pain, vomiting of a mixture of 
food, mucus, and blood, called from its appearance " coffee- 
grounds," indigestion, acidity, fetid breath, constipation, ema- 
ciation, sallowness, sometimes fever. Detecting a tumor in 
the stomach would render the diagnosis almost certain. 
Dyspepsia.-D., A general name for functional and organic 
indigestion ; a complex disease or series of diseases, having no 
distinct pathological name or place, with a symptomatology so 
diverse and varied as to almost defy systematization, and can 
only be stated in a general way. The dyspeptic feels his stom- 
ach all the time, without much pain or nausea, taste sour or 
bitter, sallow complexion, bowels costive, and stools generally 
of an ashen color ; some of the complications are heartburn, 
water-brash, hypochondriasis, palpitation of the heart, head- 
ache, all manner of imaginary disorders. C., Among the many 
causes of dyspepsia may be mentioned too much or too little, 
or improper food, imperfect mastication, too little or too much 
exercise, mental excitement or fatigue from excessive study, 
alcohol, opium, tobacco, improper medicines. 226 
APPENDIX. 
Constipation.-C., Irregular attendance upon the calls of 
nature, want of exercise, and all the causes of dyspepsia, of 
which it is an almost constant symptom. 
Enteritis.-D., Inflammation of the bowels; S., pain in 
the abdomen, or some part of it increased by motion or press- 
ure, constipation, fever, followed by swelling of the abdomen, 
vomiting, and sometimes, when severe, a muco-purulent diar- 
rhoea tinged with blood ; C., blows or other injuries, neglected 
constipation, exposure to cold and wet, corrosive poisons, in- 
testinal obstructions. 
Peritonitis.-D., Inflammation of the peritoneum ; S., pain 
and tenderness over the entire abdomen, greatly increased by 
motion, vomiting, constipation, tympanites, fever, with very 
rapid though not full pulse. In violent cases delirium, insom- 
nia, collapse; C., exposure to cold and wet, injuries, abscess 
of liver, opening of aneurism, perforation of the bowels, puer- 
peral state. 
Colic.- V., Flatulent, bilious, spasmodic, lead. 
Flatulent.-S., Pain in the bowels without tenderness, ab- 
dominal distention, constipation, nausea, belching of wind. 
Bilious.-S., slower in coming on, with more nausea, vom- 
iting of a yellowish fluid almost constant, some fever, some 
abdominal tenderness on pressure, commonly slight jaundice. 
Spasmodic.-Syn., "Cramp in the stomach;" S., comes on 
suddenly with extreme pain, with tendency to coldness and 
prostration ; C., generally of rheumatic or gouty origin. 
Lead Colic.-Syn., Painter's colic, "dry belly-ache;" S., 
abdomen shrunken and hard, intestines knotted without tender- 
ness, no fever; suflering is intense, constipation is obstinate, 
faeces small, dry, and hard ; a blue line along the edge of gums; 
C., exposure to the poisonous influence of lead. 
Obstruction of the Bowels.-V. (As the long list of 
pathological varieties are discoverable only by post-mortem 
examination, and thoroughly obscure during life, they are 
omitted); S., persistent constipation, constant vomiting of 
faecal matter, coldness of the skin, prostration, distressed coun- 
tenance, collapse. APPENDIX. 
227 
Cholera Morbus.-S., Constant nausea and vomiting of a 
greenish or yellowish fluid, generally pain in the stomach and 
bowels, diarrhoea, debility, and coldness. If not soon relieved, 
cramps in the limbs follow, vomiting and purging become 
more watery, followed by collapse. 
Diarrhoea.-Is rather a symptom than a disease. V-, are 
irritative, as in dentition; inflammatory, as in inflammation 
of the bowels ; symptomatic, as in typhoid fever; critical, as at 
the close of remittent fever; eliminative, as in poisoning; col- 
liquative, as in consumption. 
Cholera Infantum.-Syn., Summer complaint; S., diar- 
rhoea, vomiting, rejection of food, debility, emaciation, cold- 
ness, and sometimes stupor. 
Dysentery.-D., Muco-muscular inflammation of the large 
intestine ; S., pain, soreness, or tenderness on pressure or motion 
in the lower part of the abdomen, with frequent desire to go to 
stool, the discharges being scant, faecal, bloody, mucous, with 
griping and tenesmus; C., relaxation from heat, sudden expo- 
sure to cold, improper food, unripe fruit, etc. 
Hemorrhoids.-D., Piles; V., external and internal, vari- 
cose and fibrous, dry (or blind) and bleeding; S., weight and 
sense of fulness in the rectum, soreness about the anus, pain 
in evacuating the bowels, pain in the groins and down the 
limbs. Throbbing and aching constant as inflammation in- 
creases, resulting in one or more distinct tumors, either external 
or internal. Bleeding occurs from internal piles ; intense suffer- 
ing is the usual concomitant of any form of hemorrhoids. C., 
hereditary predisposition, plethoric constitution with sedentary 
habits, pregnancy, long standing, sitting on hard seats, exces- 
sive venery, self-abuse, over-stimulation, constipation, etc. 
the liver. 
Congestion.-S., A sense of weight and slight pain in the 
right side and under the right shoulder-blade, constipation, 
lead-colored stools, nausea, tongue furred, taste bitter, skin 
yellow, headache, and dizziness. 228 
APPENDIX. 
Hepatitis.-D., Inflammation of the liver is only the legiti- 
mate sequelae to congestion, with the same symptoms in a little 
more aggravated form. 
Jaundice.-D., A morbid yellowness of the skin, eyes, etc. 
It is a " self-evident" disease, with no uniform pathology, cause, 
or symptoms. 
Cirrhosis.-Syn., Hob-nailed liver, Gin liver; S'., earliest 
symptoms are slightly yellow skin and eyes, furred tongue, 
nausea, indigestion; later on, constipation, vomiting, emacia- 
tion, debility, dropsy; G., malarial influence, syphilis, most 
commonly intemperance. 
Other affections of the liver are fatty liver, waxy liver, 
syphilitic liver, cancer of the liver, hydatids of the liver, 
tubercle of the liver; but as they are all incurable, and diffi- 
cult to diagnosticate, they have only a post-mortem interest. 
This latter is also true of diseases of the gall-bladder and the 
spleen. 
THE KIDNEYS AND BLADDER. 
Congestion.-&, Pain, with tenderness on pressure, on each 
side of the spine in the lumbar region, urine scanty and high 
colored, sometimes bloody; C., exposure to cold, large doses 
of cantharides or turpentine, abdominal inflammation or ob- 
struction. 
Ur.emia.-D., Urea in the blood; S., suppression of urine, 
headache, dimness of vision, vomiting, diarrhoea, convulsions, 
stupor; C., suppression of urine, and retention in the blood of 
urea, and perhaps other materials that should be carried off by 
the kidneys. 
Albuminuria.-Syn., Bright's disease; D., excess of albu- 
men in the urine accompanied by dropsy; V., acute and 
chronic; S., of acute Bright's disease, chill, headache, nausea, 
vomiting, pain in back and limbs, dryness of the skin, oppressed 
breathing, followed by fever, and puffing with dropsical effu- 
sion of the whole body, urine scanty, with disposition to void 
it frequently, high colored and charged with albumen; S., of 
chronic Bright's disease, gradual loss of strength, puffing of 
the face and extremities, and a slow, but sure, leading up to APPENDIX. 
229 
all the symptoms of renal congestion and uraemic poison. 
The progress of the disease may be slow, and may be months, 
or even years, in reaching a climax, but the tendency is always 
towards a fatal result; (7., predisposing causes are intemperance, 
gout, constitutional syphilis, exposure to cold, scarlet fever, 
diseases of the kidneys, bladder, and urethra. 
Lithiasis.-Syn., Gravel; D., calcareous deposits in the 
kidneys orbladder; S., pain in the bladder and in the back, 
itching in the glans penis, retraction of testicle, sudden stop- 
ping of the flow of urine. 
Diabetes Insipidus.-Syn., Polyuria; D., excessive uri- 
nation; S., excessive discharge of almost colorless urine (two 
to six gallons a day), intense thirst (withholding fluids does not 
lessen the excessive urination), skin hard and dry; debility 
and emaciation if long continued. 
Diabetes Mellitus.-Syn., Glycosuria; D., excessive uri- 
nation, urine containing sugar; S., beginning with all the 
symptoms of diabetes insipidus, the disease gradually simu- 
lates pulmonary consumption, and in that form the case ter- 
minates. 
Hydronephrosis.-D., Dropsy of the kidneys; S., a soft, 
lobular, fluctuating, painless tumefaction in the hypochon- 
driac, umbilical, and iliac regions, generally on one side; when 
extensive may result in uraemia, or bursting of the sac into the 
abdominal cavity. 
Cancer of the Kidney.-S., A tumor in the abdomen 
(sometimes enormously large), with copious discharges of bloody 
urine, is almost certain to be cancerous. 
Tubercle of the Kidney.-S'., Recognized only after tuber- 
cles have softened by the abundant discharge of purulent urine, 
which, in the absence of tumor and bloody urine, distinguishes 
it from cancer. 
Cystitis.-D., Inflammation of the bladder; V., acute and 
chronic, primary and secondary. 
Acute Cystitis.-S., Chills and fever, pain in the bladder, 
frequent desire to urinate, burning pain in the urethra, and 
tenesmus. The bladder felt as a small round tumor, painful 230 
APPENDIX. 
on pressure, urine scanty, and hot and scalding ; as the disease 
progresses, nausea, delirium, cold perspiration, urine purulent, 
bloody, and fetid. 
Chronic Cystitis.-C., Frequent attacks of acute cystitis 
produce " chronic inflammation," which is characterized by less 
severe symptoms, but which, in consequence of the constant 
desire to urinate, with tenderness and irritation of the bladder, 
may be still very distressing. 
Retention of Urine.-C., May be the result of obstruction, 
spasmodic contraction of the urethra, stricture, paralysis. 
Enuresis.-C., Incontinence of urine, unless from some 
local disease or paralysis, is generally confined to children, and 
usually at night. 
BRAIN AND NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
Inflammation of the Brain.-S., Intense headache, face 
and eyes livid, dizziness, "tinnitus aurium," sensitive to light 
and sound, restlessness, insomnia, delirium, convulsions, some- 
times followed by paralysis. 
Hydrocephalus.-£>., Dropsy of the brain; S., languor, 
strabismus, convulsions, loss of appetite, enlargement of the 
head, emaciation of the body, mental dulness. 
Softening of the Brain.-V., Inflammatory and atro- 
phic; S., muscular rigidity, or paralysis of the extremities, 
without loss of consciousness; partial coma would indicate 
inflammatory softening. 
Atrophic Softening.-S., Indicated by a gradual tendency 
to blindness, loss of hearing, failure of mental powers, neuralgic 
pains in the extremities, followed by numbness or paralysis; 
C., old age, intemperance, mental excitement, blood-clot on 
the brain. 
Spinal Meningitis.-D., Inflammation of the spinal mar- 
row ; S., intense pain in the back, increased by motion, muscu- 
lar rigidity, followed by fever, constipation, dysuria, paralysis. 
Softening of the Spinal Cord.-<S'., Uncertainty in step- 
ping and a sense of insecurity in walking, numbness and a 
sense of coldness in the extremities, pain, especially on pressure, APPENDIX. 
231 
in a portion of the spine, impaired motion, and gradual dim- 
inution of sensibility in the limbs. Muscular contraction and 
rigidity occurs as the disease advances, finally loss of control 
over the bladder and rectum, and exhaustion. 
Spinal Irritation.-S., There may be pain and weakness in 
the back, tenderness on pressure, unattended by motor or sen- 
sory degeneration, and with no proof of any special disease of 
the cord; C., are really of rheumatic or myalgic origin, and 
may arise from anaemia or general nervous debility. 
Ophthalmia.-D., Inflammation of the eye; V-, 1, simple 
and catarrhal; S., eyes bloodshot, with soreness, pain, and aver- 
sion to light, and a mucous discharge, that causes adherence of 
the lids to each other, especially at night; C., exposure to cold 
and damp. 
2. Pustular.-S.} Formation upon the conjunctiva of small 
vascular pustules. 
3. Purulent.-C., This variety is doubtless infectious and 
may be communicated. 
4. Gonorrheal.-C., Contact with the virus of leucorrhoea 
or gonorrhoea; is also infectious; suppuration, ulceration, and 
sloughing are concomitants. 
Corneitis.-Z>., Inflammation of cornea. 
Sclerotitis.-Z>., Inflammation of sclerotic coat. 
Iritis.-D., Inflammation of iris. 
Retinitis.-D., Inflammation of the retina. All these 
inflammations may be simple, traumatic, gouty, rheumatic, 
scrofulitic, syphilitic. 
Otitis.-D., Inflammation of the ear ; C., of scrofulitic ori- 
gin; S., suppuration and chronic discharge, attended with 
severe pain; but the tenderness on pressure and the subsequent 
discharge distinguishes it from otalgia. 
Otalgia.-S., Earache without much inflammation, yet 
attended by intense pain; C., neuralgic. 
Cophosis.-D., Deafness. Causes are,- 
1. Accumulation of wax in the ear. 
2. Thickening of the tympanum. 
3. Obstruction of the Eustachian tube. 232 
APPENDIX. 
4. Perforation of the tympanum. 
5. Destruction of the bones of the ear. 
6. Paralysis of the auditory nerve. 
Sunstroke.-S., Falling, insensibility, head hot, temporal 
arteries distended, pulse full, breathing stertorous, convulsions 
(in severe cases); C., fatigue from over-exertion in the sun or 
heat; in this condition copious draughts of cold or iced water 
increase the danger. Intemperate people are predisposed to it, 
and frequently the health is permanently impaired. 
Insomnia.-D., Wakefulness ; reference is had to a morbid 
wakefulness not dependent on pain or diseases affecting the brain, 
and may be induced by excesses of all kinds, mental labor, 
emotional excitement; coffee, tea, belladonna, stramonium, can- 
nabis Indica, may cause it. 
Night-Terrors.-This trouble is too commonly known to 
need description. A child suddenly wakes out of an appar- 
ently sound sleep with a cry of terror and alarm, imagining all 
sorts of hideous things ; finally flings itself sobbing in its 
mother's arms, and is gradually restored to quiet. It is gener- 
ally agreed that this is not a cerebral trouble, but that the mind 
is affected by reflex action from some gastric or intestinal irri- 
tation. 
Apoplexy.-D., Profound coma or insensibility, suddenly 
produced, and not traceable to either injury, narcotism, or poi- 
son ; V., congestive and hemorrhagic; S., congestive apoplexy 
manifests itself by flushed appearance of face and eyes, heat of 
head, throbbing and distention of the carotid and temporal ar- 
teries, fulness of jugular veins, languor, drowsiness, dimness of 
sight, vertigo, headache, followed by sudden stupor, stertorous 
breathing, turgidity of the face, slight convulsive movements, 
pulse full and slow. 
Hemorrhagic Apoplexy.-S., Ordinarily no premonitory 
indications. It is literally a stroke, and in an instant insensi- 
bility is complete; when recovered from, hemiplegia usually 
remains. All the symptoms of congestive paralysis are pres- 
ent, except that fulness of blood-vessels and heat of head are 
less marked. C., in the congestive form vascular pressure on APPENDIX. 
233 
the brain is the exciting cause. In the hemorrhagic form, the 
rupture of a blood-vessel in the cerebrum, cerebellum, or ven- 
tricles, and the formation of "blood-clot." Age is a predis- 
posing cause, so also are excesses of all kinds, especially in 
florid, short-necked, obese people. 
Paralysis.- F., According to cause, 1, cerebral; 2, spinal; 
3, reflex; 4, toxaemic; 5, hysterical. According to parts af- 
fected, facial or other local paralysis, hemiplegia, paraplegia, 
general. 
Facial Paralysis.-C., Affection of the motor nerve of the 
face, and is usually due to inflammation (rheumatic) of the 
sheath of the nerve, near the stylo-mastoid foramen ; S., one side 
of the face is expressionless, and the eye on that side remains 
open. Pressure on, or disease of any nerve, may cause paraly- 
sis to the part it communicates with, until pressure or disease 
is removed; from this cause we may have loss of sight, of hear- 
ing, of taste, of smell. 
Hemiplegia.-D., Paralysis, or loss of motion and sensation 
of one side of the body; C., usually blood-clot, tumor, or 
softening of the brain. 
Paraplegia.-Z>., Paralysis of the lower extremities; C., 
injury or disease of the spinal cord; S., pain in the back, 
numbness of the feet, and a gradual (sometimes sudden) loss 
of motion and sensation in the lower extremities. If the dis- 
ease of the spinal cord is progressive, so also will be the paraly- 
sis, and may finally involve the bladder and rectum. 
Hysterical Paralysis.-This is one of the many remark- 
able forms of nervous phenomena manifested in that unex- 
plained and unexplainable disease, hysteria, and may simulate 
any form of paralysis, and can only be differentiated by the 
history of the patient. 
Reflex Paralysis.-D., Paralysis without any apparent 
brain or spinal lesion, and may be caused by nervous dysen- 
tery, diarrhoea, uterine irritation, teething, external injuries, 
diphtheria, scarlatina, disease of the kidneys. 
Diphtheritic Paralysis.-D., The muscles used in swal- 
lowing, speaking, and sometimes of the upper and lower ex- 234 
APPENDIX. 
tremities, and sense of sight may become partially paralyzed 
after the termination of a severe attack of diphtheria. C., 
doubtful. 
Syphilitic Paralysis.-D., Obscure paralysis, with no 
apoplectic symptoms in syphilitic constitutions. But of un- 
doubted existence. 
Lead Palsy.-C., By exposure to lead-poisoning; S., com- 
mences with the muscles of the forearm; blue line along the 
edge of the gums ; pain attends the beginning of and recovery 
from the paralysis. 
Paralysis Agitans.-D., Shaking palsy; S., a constant 
involuntary shaking of the head, hands, and arms, and more 
or less of the whole body. 
Wasting Palsy.-D., Muscular atrophy ; S., the muscles 
of one limb or the whole body lose their power and waste 
away. 
Locomotor Ataxia.-Syn., Duchenne's disease, "Ataxie 
locomotrice progressive." S., A gradual loss of muscular co- 
ordination, preceded by rheumatic pains, sometimes strabismus, 
and incontinence of urine; gradually the gait becomes unsteady 
and awkward, feet become numb, and walking is insecure, 
usually resulting in complete general paralysis. 
Paralysis oe the Insane.-D., Difficulty of speech, gen- 
eral tremor, gradual loss of motion and sensation character- 
ize it. 
Epilepsy.-D., Periodical convulsions ; S., a creeping, blow- 
ing sensation like a current of air or a stream of water, com- 
mencing in the hand or foot and creeping towards the body, 
is called the "epileptic aura." With a scream the patient 
falls down in violent convulsions; foaming at the mouth, 
grinding of the teeth, rolling of the eyeballs, sometimes vom- 
iting, or involuntary discharges from bladder or rectum, are 
common symptoms. C., Hereditary transmission, intemperance, 
excessive venery, self-abuse, blows on the head, and fright are 
common causes. 
Catalepsy.-S., Unconsciousness, fixed rigidity of all the 
voluntarv muscles. APPENDIX. 
235 
Convulsions.-1. Infantile; C., constipation, indigestion, 
worms, irritation of the gums, excitement of the brain. 
2. Epileptic. (See Epilepsy.) 
3. Parturient and puerperal. It is claimed that about one 
woman in fifty has more or less albuminuria from congestion 
of the kidneys, caused by pressure of the uterus upon the renal 
veins, and that about one in ten of these will have convulsions, 
either during pregnancy, in labor, or after delivery. 
Chorea.-Syn., St. Vitus's Dance; S., Jerking, irregular 
motion of the voluntary muscles, that is not controlled by the 
will. Speech may be affected, writing and work impossible 
when cases are severe, because hands cannot be controlled; pal- 
pitation, constipation, indigestion, dilatation of the pupil, are 
all more or less constant symptoms; C., preceding nervous 
debility being regarded as a predisposing cause, fright, over- 
fatigue, mental excitement, blows or falls, rheumatic fever, 
may produce it. 
Tetanus.-Syn., 11 Lock-jaw." S., Beginning with stiffness 
and rigidity of the muscles of the jaws, it extends to the face, 
trunk, and limbs. May be forward, backward, or lateral arch- 
ing of the body; mastication of food impossible, so also swal- 
lowing ; respiration very difficult; intense suffering and in- 
somnia without delirium. 
Hydrophobia.-S., Having been bitten by a rabid animal, 
say in a month or longer, the wound being apparently thor- 
oughly healed, an unaccountable irritation is felt in the cicatrix, 
nervous restlessness ensues, which increases to a wild, un- 
governable, angry delirium. Spasmodic stricture of the throat 
causes a choking sensation, aggravated by an effort to swallow, 
or even by a sound or flash of light, or current of air. The 
dread of water is a myth, and only the dread of swallowing 
makes the unfortunate sufferer shrink from any liquid. 
Hysteria.-D., " A morbid excitability of the whole nervous 
system," so varied in its manifestations of nervous phenomena 
that almost every disease in the entire nosological system may 
be simulated. S., a " fit of hysterics; ' ' generally commences with 
a choking sensation (globus hystericus) as of a ball coming up 236 
APPENDIX. 
in the throat; crying, laughing, epileptiform convulsions, 
paralysis, palpitation, aphonia, retention of urine, hemor- 
rhages, phantom tumor, are among the many manifestations of 
hysteria; C., frequently obscure, probably most generally due 
to uterine or ovarian disease. 
Neuralgia.-D., Literally, nerve-pain. Different names 
are given according to locality affected, as follows: tic dou- 
leureux, the face; hemicrania, one side of the head; sciatica, 
the hip; gastrodynia, the stomach ; pleurodynia, the side; an- 
gina pectoris, the heart; odontalgia, the teeth. 
Delirium Tremens.-S., Insomnia, debility tremors, hor- 
rors, hallucinations,-e.g., the patient imagines himself pursued 
by serpents, demons, and mortal enemies, etc. Not infrequently 
the hallucinations may be of an amusing character. C., may 
result from two entirely opposite causes: 1, accustomed stimula- 
tion suddenly withdrawn ; 2, excessive stimulation continued in. 
Methomania.-Syn., Alcoholism ; V., periodical, when the 
uncontrollable desire for alcoholic drinks comes on periodi- 
cally, with intervals of weeks or months perhaps of compara- 
tive freedom from the irresistible cravings of this disease; 
persistent, when the mania for drink continues without cessa- 
tion; C., hereditary transmission; long continued and wilful 
excesses may confirm the habit. 
Insanity.- V., 1, Mania, a perversion and derangement of 
all the mental faculties; 2, monomania, partial derangement, 
as desire to commit homicide or suicide, propensity to steal, 
commit arson; 3, melancholia, excessive depression or gloom, 
not traceable to any known cause ; 4, dementia, a weakening; 
loss or wreck of mental faculties (idiocy is congenital dementia). 
C., hereditary transmission the most common, diseases of the 
brain, injury of the head, intemperance, misfortunes, mental 
excitement, domestic troubles. 
Hemorrhages (flow of blood).-Hemorrhage is active when 
there is an excessive determination of blood to a part; pas- 
sive when, through inaction of the circulation or weakness of 
the blood-vessels, the blood is not carried through its proper 
channels; traumatic when caused by wounds, or severing of APPENDIX. 
237 
the blood-vessels ; symptomatic when occurring in connection 
with certain diseases, as bleeding of the nose in typhoid fever, 
bleeding of the lungs in phthisis, vomiting of blood in cancer 
of the stomach, bleeding from the bowels in hemorrhoids, etc.; 
critical, as at the close of yellow fever or remittent fever; 
vicarious when it follows as a substitute the suppression of a 
normal or habitual discharge, as in suppressed menstruation or 
sudden arrest of bleeding hemorrhoids, and manifests itself 
generally in the form of epistaxis, haematemesis, and haemop- 
tysis. 
Haemoptysis.-D., Spitting of blood; when from the air- 
tubes, it is attended with difficult breathing; S., the blood is 
coughed up, is florid, and sometimes frothy and mixed with 
expectoration. 
Haematemesis.-D., Vomiting of blood, when from the 
stomach; S., there is nausea, the blood is vomited up, is dark 
and mixed with food. 
Hjematuria.-D., Bloody urine may be from the kidneys or 
bladder. If thoroughly mixed with urine, it is probably from 
the kidneys, and may be due to venal congestion, or inflamma- 
tion, or cancer; when the urine flows nearly pure and the blood 
follows, it is from the bladder or urethra. 
Intestinal Hemorrhage.-Ci, May be bleeding hemor- 
rhoids, in which case the blood is bright red; in other hemor- 
rhages, as from typhoid, yellow, or remittent fever, or aortic 
aneurism, congestion of the liver or abdominal cancer, it is 
dark and mixed with faeces. 
Uterine Hemorrhages.-C., may be excessive menstrua- 
tion, placenta praevia, abortion, uterine cancer, ulceration of the 
mouth or neck of the uterus, tumors. 
Dropsy.--K, General and oedema; D., tumefaction arising 
from the effusion or infiltration of serum into cellular or con- 
nective tissue; C., one of three cardinal pathological condi- 
tions : 
1. Obstruction to the venous circulation. 
2. Arrest of excretion and absorption. 
3. Excess of water in the blood. 238 
APPENDIX. 
Anasarca.-D., General cellular dropsy; C., suppression 
of the action of the kidneys and skin at once by the powerful 
impression of cold or wet, or the poison of scarlet fever. 
Ascites.-Z>., Peritoneal dropsy; accumulation of water 
in the abdomen; C., cirrhosis of the liver, and diseases of the 
kidneys, heart, aorta, and spleen; S., emaciation, general de- 
bility, with great abdominal enlargement, evenly distributed 
over the abdomen. 
Ovarian Dropsy belongs properly to gynaecology; we may 
say of it, however, that it may be distinguished from ascites by 
its first appearing on one side, its progress is much slower, and 
the enlargement is more globular and coherent, and less fluc- 
tuating. Other local dropsies are hydrocephalus (of the brain), 
hydrothorax (of the chest), hydropericardium (of the heart- 
case), hydronephrosis (of the kidney), hydrocele (of the testes). 
ZYMOTIC DISEASES. 
V., Contagious, epidemic, endemic, and infectious. 
Variola.-Syn., Smallpox; <8., languor, headache, vomit- 
ing, severe pain in the back, fever; three days after fever a 
small red pimply eruption appears, first on face, then on neck, 
arms, body, and lower limbs, these pimples become vesicles, 
then pustules. Complete suppuration about ninth day after 
fever, and in about five days the scabs begin to drop off. 
The stages are about twelve days of incubation, three of 
primary fever, six for development of eruption, five for scab- 
bing, seven for falling off of scabs. A very offensive and char- 
acteristic odor is peculiar to this disease. C., is communicated 
by contagion, and as a rule occurs but once in a lifetime, but 
to this rule there are exceptions. 
Varioloid.-A very modified form of smallpox, to which 
persons who have been vaccinated are liable when exposed to 
the contagion of smallpox. The fever is generally slight, and 
the pustules are seldom so deep as to form pits. 
Varicella.-Syn., Chicken-pox. This is a mild eruptive 
disease, also contagious; S., manifests itself four or five days 
after exposure in the form of widely-scattered pimples, that APPENDIX. 
239 
come out in successive crops on different parts of the body. The 
second day after the pimples appear they become vesicles filled 
with lymph, that scab in a few days, and soon fall off without 
pitting. 
Scarlatina.-Syn., Scarlet fever; V., simple, complicated 
with sore throat, and malignant; <$., stage of incubation after 
exposure about five days, then follow lassitude, loss of appetite, 
headache, pains in back and limbs, fever, soreness of throat, 
followed by a punctuated red eruption of a scarlet, sometimes 
brick-red, hue on face and neck, which soon spreads over the 
whole body, fever high, rapid pulse, great thirst, with burning 
soreness in the throat and over the body, tongue covered with 
strawberry-like red papulae peeping through the white fur that 
covers it. In the simple form all the conditions may be very 
mild. In throat complication (scarlatina anginosa) there will 
be violent inflammation and swelling of the tonsils, resulting 
in suppuration, with a sometimes very acrid and offensive dis- 
charge. Sometimes the ulceration extends to the Eustachian 
tube, resulting in permanent deafness. 
Malignant Scarlatina.-S., An aggravation of all the 
symptoms of scarlatina, in which the throat may be little af- 
fected, but where the whole system seems to be overwhelmed 
with the poison of the disease, depression without reaction, 
resulting in stupor, and not unfrequently in a few hours in 
death ; prostration, hemorrhage from stomach or bowels, vom- 
iting, diarrhoea, all tending towards a fatal issue. 
Measles.-S., Stage of incubation from ten to fifteen days 
after exposure to the contagion; begins with all the symptoms of 
a cold,-running at the nose, red, watery eyes, cough ; after about 
four days there appears, first on the face and then distributed 
in irregular crescentic-shaped patches over the body, a rash 
that is easily distinguished from scarlatina by being less bright 
in color, and accompanied by a much less degree of fever and 
general constitutional disturbance. 
Eubeola.-D., Hybrid between scarlatina and measles. 
Such a disease does undoubtedly exist, in which the two dis- 
eases are so nicely balanced as to render the most experienced 240 
APPENDIX. 
physician doubtful of his diagnosis in calling it either one or 
the other. 
Mumps.-S., Contagious inflammation of the parotid gland, 
which swells and becomes hot, painful, and tender to the touch ; 
one or both may be affected, either simultaneously or after 
an interval of years. It is doubtless contagious, but not dan- 
gerous, unless when by metastasis it is transferred to the breast, 
testicles, or brain, which may be avoided by guarding against 
taking cold. 
Whooping-Cough.-5., Six days of incubation, after ex- 
posure, are followed by symptoms of a cold, with slight fever 
and a cough, which soon shows its specific character by being 
paroxysmal and whooping. It is a self-limited disease, but 
seldom ends in less than six weeks, and sometimes lingers for 
months. 
Diphtheria.-S., A few days of indisposition, slight sore 
throat, swelling of glands behind the jaw, fever, headache, 
furred tongue, constipation, difficulty of swallowing, palate, 
tonsils, and fauces swollen, red or purple. Soon a whitish or 
yellowish-white membrane appears over one or both of the 
tonsils. All the symptoms of pseudo-membranous croup may 
here follow, or it may assume an ulcerated form and become 
" putrid sore throat," or a malignant form with all the symp- 
toms aggravated, and followed by prostration, coma, and 
death. 
Glanders.-This is a disease peculiar to the horse, but may 
undoubtedly be communicated to man; <8., manifests itself in 
from two to seven days after exposure, by fever, inflammation 
of the nostrils, pains in the joints, patches of red skin that may 
become gangrenous, pustules on the face and limbs, inflam- 
mation of nostrils becomes ulcerous and even gangrenous, dis- 
charging a muco-purulent fluid ; throat and lungs may become 
involved, the face becomes cedematous; diarrhoea, delirium, 
coma, and death. 
Influenza.-Syn., Epidemic catarrh. Common as catarrhal 
affections are, there is an occasional epidemic form of this dis- 
ease in which the symptoms of a " bad cold" are all aggravated, APPENDIX. 
241 
and affect a whole community to an extent that is hardly 
accounted for by ordinary climatic conditions. It is rarely 
fatal except among very old people. 
Intermittent Fever.- Ague, chills and fever; <$., 
First, or cold stage.-After a short period of languor and 
yawning, a cold, creeping, shivering sensation ushers in the 
chill, which may last from ten minutes to three hours. 
Second, or hot stage.-A sense of warmth gradually returns, 
which resolves itself into a hot or dry fever, more or less vio- 
lent, with accompanying headache, often vomiting; mouth 
dry and tongue furred. This stage may last from one to six- 
teen hours, and is followed by the third, or sweating stage, 
which is somewhat gradual in its approach ; face first becomes 
moist, soon the whole body, the fever subsides, headache les- 
sens, and, with a profuse perspiration, the patient is likely to 
sink into a quiet, peaceful slumber, and all goes well until the 
intermission is passed and the first stage returns, which may be 
in one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight days. C., it 
may reasonably be called an autumnal fever, as comparatively 
few cases occur at any other time of the year, and is the result 
only of malarial influences, near sea-level, and near marshes, 
shallow lakes, and sluggish streams. 
Remittent, or Bilious Fever.-S., First general indis- 
position, slight headache, nausea, furred tongue, followed by a 
chill lasting for perhaps an hour ; after this comes fever, skin 
hot, dry, harsh, pulse accelerated, face flushed, head aching 
and throbbing, violent pain in back and limbs, nausea and 
vomiting of bilious matter common, bowels costive and stools 
colored with bile, and thirst great. There is an abatement of 
these symptoms, at least in severity, in from eight to twenty 
hours ; after from six to twenty-four hours of comparative com- 
fort the chill again comes on, and all the conditions are more 
aggravated than at first, and then follows a succession of peri- 
odical paroxysms that must vary with the history of the case; 
if uncomplicated, it may terminate favorably in a week ; but 
when, as sometimes happens, inflammations, such as of the 
brain, lungs, stomach, liver, spleen, or bowels, intervene, the 242 
APPENDIX. 
history will be correspondingly grave. C., same as intermit- 
tent fever. 
Pernicious Fever.-D., This is only a malignant form 
of intermittent or remittent fever, and may begin with the 
typical symptoms of either of the fevers named. S., After sev- 
eral days the skin grows livid, pale, and shrunken, sometimes 
suffused with a cold, clammy sweat, tongue pale or cold, thirst 
intense, internal heat, nausea, and vomiting of mucus, or even 
bloody fluid, diarrhoea, stools of bloody water, pulse small, 
weak, rapid, or irregular, mind clear when brain is not im- 
plicated ; in the latter case symptoms are drowsiness and hesi- 
tation of speech ; stupor, stertorous breathing, or tetanic spasms, 
mark the climax of the spasm. If this paroxysm is not fatal, 
there is partial or perhaps complete reaction. If another par- 
oxysm occur the next day, it will be more aggravated and dan- 
gerous than the first. Still, it may be recovered from. But a 
third return is generally fatal. 
Yellow Fever.-S., Beginning abruptly with an indistinct 
chill, pains in the back or limbs, a period of fever of long aver- 
age duration intervenes; skin hot and dry, thirst extreme, tongue 
furred, nausea and vomiting common, with great tenderness 
over the stomach, discharges of the bowels (if any) very offen- 
sive, headache intense, with flushed forehead and eyes, delirium 
not uncommon. Then follows a stage that amounts almost to 
an intermission, with an abatement of all the symptoms except 
the extreme tenderness of the stomach; convalescence may 
follow. More frequently, however, a third stage of prostration 
or collapse follows, in which the black vomit-the character- 
istic symptom of this fever-occurs, and hemorrhages from 
mouth, throat, or bowels, low muttering, delirium, hiccough, 
clammy sweats, involuntary discharges, dissolution. C., In 
regard to the cause, the only well-settled point is that it is 
zymotic. Many and exhaustive papers have been written pro 
and con on all the complex questions relating to this fatal 
malady, but our space is too limited to even notice them. 
Cerebro-Spinal Fever.-Syn., Cerebro-spinal meningitis, 
spotted fever; S., attack always sudden, chills, terrible pain in APPENDIX. 
243 
the head, extending to back of neck, nausea and vomiting, fol- 
lowed by delirium, sometimes coma, more frequently tetanic 
spasm of the muscles of neck and back, whole surface of body 
painfully sensitive ; loss of sight and hearing may occur early 
in disease ; spots do appear in some cases on the body and limbs, 
but in a minority of cases ; fatal cases seldom last over a day 
' or two; not often fatal after the fourth day. 
Typhus Fever.-Syn., Ship, camp, and jail fever; S., several 
days of weakness, headache, and loss of appetite, then chilli- 
ness, in which stage death may occur; more frequently, how- 
ever, fever follows, with severe headache, skin very hot, pulse 
120 to 130, delirium common, extreme muscular debility, 
patient lying in a half stupor, easily aroused, however, but soon 
relapses, face has dusky flush, hardness of hearing. Positive 
coma a bad indication. 
Typhoid Fever.-S., Approaches more gradually than any 
other fever, and with the general symptoms of fever, bleeding 
at the nose and a bronchial cough are characteristic symptoms ; 
fever of some violence sets in ; face dark and flushed ; hardness 
of hearing common after first week; so also swelling of the 
abdomen; a few rose-colored spots on the abdomen only are 
discernible after second week; final symptoms in severe cases 
are double pulse, subsultus tendinum, retention of urine, hemor- 
rhage from the bowels, hiccough, cold sweats, involuntary 
discharges. 
Erysipelas.-S., The eruption commences most frequently 
on the face, with soreness, redness, heat, and moderate swell- 
ing, which spread like a slow fire, and may cover the whole 
body. When deep-seated, may cause suppuration and slough- 
ing. 
Cholera.-S., Commences commonly with a painless, watery 
diarrhoea, which in a short time increases in frequency and 
copiousness, and becomes like "rice-water," vomiting com- 
mences, skin grows cold, and cramps in the limbs, with great 
debility, follow. If not checked collapse comes on, with intense 
thirst, oppressed breathing, loss of voice and pulse, suppression 
of urine, skin cold, blue, and shrunken, breath cold, ending in 244 
APPENDIX. 
death ; the average duration being eighteen hours, but varying 
from ten minutes to a day or two. 
Diathesis.-D., Morbid peculiarity of constitution. 
Rheumatism.-<S., High fever, with severe inflammation of 
the joints, mostly the shoulders, wrist, knees, and ankles, pulse 
full and rapid, but after first week skin usually bathed in per- 
spiration. Chief danger is metastasis to heart or lungs. 
Chronic Rheumatism.-S., Most common in old age. It is 
a slow inflammation of the fibrous tissues that invest the joints 
and muscles, following exposure to cold and wet; pain worse at 
night. 
Syphilitic Rheumatism.-D., Affection of the shafts of 
long bones, on which are abnormal nodes, and the pain is likely 
due to periosteal inflammation. 
Rheumatic Arthritis.-D., Chronic inflammation of one 
or more large joints, resulting in effusion into the joints, with 
deformity and lameness. 
Myalgia.-D., Simply muscular pain as the result of debility 
or fatigue. 
Gout.-D., A constitutional, paroxysmal disorder, that 
manifests itself in local inflammatory affections; S., flatulent 
acidity, constipation, palpitation, usually usher in an attack of 
gout, then a joint (usually the great toe) becomes very painful, 
swollen, red, and tender. The small joints are all more likely 
to be attacked than the large ones. The pain is usually very 
intense, but mercifully, its duration is commonly only a few 
days. Retrocedent gout (so called when some internal organ 
is affected), especially when the heart is the seat of it, is very 
dangerous. C., primarily the gouty diathesis ; high living, with 
indolent habits, excess of animal food, strong wines and malt 
liquors, are all exciting causes. 
Scurvy.-S., Languor, debility, low spirits, followed by 
swelling, sponginess, and bleeding of the gums; teeth loosen, 
breath offensive, palpitation and dyspnoea, swelling of the 
limbs, diarrhoea and dysentery, emaciation and debility, are all 
concomitants; C., deprivation of fresh food, especially vege- 
tables, and cold, fatigue, exposure, and homesickness. APPENDIX. 
245 
Scorbutic Dysentery.-D., A sequela to scurvy. 
Scrofula.-Prof. Aitken defines scrofulosis or tuberculosis 
as follows: 
"A particular morbid condition of the system, attended by 
a persistent increase of temperature, followed by a continuous 
wasting of the body and the growth of a substance in various 
tissues and organs, especially the lungs, to which the name of 
tubercle or tuberculous matter has been applied. These phe- 
nomena are associated with peculiarities of outward appearance 
during life, and liability to certain diseases termed scrofulous, 
such as swellings of lymphatic glands and of joints, carious 
ulcerations of bones, frequent and chronic ulcerations of the 
cornea, ophthalmia, abscesses and cutaneous pustular eruptions, 
persistent swelling and catarrh of the mucous membrane of the 
nose, and characteristic thickening and swelling of the upper 
lip,-lesions which, while they are distinguished by mildness 
of symptoms, are peculiarly persistent, and follow the applica- 
tion of exciting causes which would have no effect on a healthy 
person." 
Rickets.-D., General failure of nutrition, with muscular 
debility, bones brittle from imperfect development, spinal curv- 
ature and crooked limbs follow, teeth slow in appearing and 
decay early ; nervous irritability a usual accompaniment. 
Caries of the Spine.-Syn., Pott's disease; S., pallor, de- 
bility, pain in the abdomen, in sudden and severe paroxysms, 
irritability of temper, stooping forward in walking, rigidity of 
muscles, a cautious, gliding gait, to avoid concussion of the 
spine, loss of appetite, swelling of the belly, uneasy sleep, 
hurried or impeded respiration, tenderness of the spine on pres- 
sure, an angular deformity or backward projection of a portion 
of the spine, paralysis in various degrees, abscesses of the back, 
discharging externally, or by the lungs, bowels, vagina, or the 
pus entering the hip-joint. 
Morbus Coxarius.-Syn., Hip-joint disease ; >S'., of the most 
characteristic kind are pain in the knee, without any other 
sign of disease about that part, a limping gait, the knee bent, 
treading only on the toes of the affected limb. Examining the 246 
APPENDIX. 
hip-joint, it is found that pressing the head of the thigh-bone 
into it gives pain. Atrophy of the muscles over the hip may fol- 
low. General weakness and emaciation, with other symptoms of 
the scrofulous cachexia, usually attend. Suppuration in the j oint, 
with chronic abscesses, ulceration of the cartilages, subluxation 
of the femur, and caries of the bones, with hectic fever and 
progressive debility, occur in severe cases." 
Anemia.-D., Bloodlessness; S'., pallor, debility, nervous 
irritability, palpitation; C., loss of blood, excessive drains on 
the system, as suckling, leucorrhoea, diarrhcea, fevers, deficiency 
of food, light, warmth, or fresh air. 
Chlorosis.-Syn., "Green sickness;" S'., waxy, yellowish 
or greenish pallor of the face, with all the symptoms of anaemia, 
morbid appetite; menstruation usually absent. 
Pyaemia.-D., Absorption of pus; S., of such an affection 
are chills, low fever, rapidity and feebleness of the pulse, pros- 
tration, delirium, and swelling of the joints. Death may occur 
in a few days, from devitalization of the blood; or, if puru- 
lent formations occur, by exhaustion caused by their presence 
and discharge. 
SKIN DISEASES. 
Erythema.-D., Superficial red patches of variable size, 
slightly irritated and inflamed, from friction of two surfaces 
of the skin, as occurs sometimes in not well-cleaned children; 
sometimes also in rheumatic fever. Chilblain is one form. 
Urticaria.-Syn., Nettle-rash ; elevated red or white, round 
or oval-shaped, patches appear very suddenly on the body (sel- 
dom in the face), and burn and sting and itch, and may disap- 
pear as suddenly. It is of short duration, but may become 
chronic, when it is very troublesome. 
Roseola.-S., Dark red damask-rose-colored patches appear 
on the body, with little or no fever, and last only a few days. 
Lichen.-S., Small red, irritable pimples appear on the face 
and neck, involving depositive inflammation. Prickly heat is 
one form of it, from which children especially suffer in the heat 
of summer. APPENDIX. 
247 
Strophulus.-Syn., Red gum. D., A papular eruption, 
consisting of many small red pimples all over the body. S., 
gums red, swollen, and tender; C'., indigestion, teething, too 
much clothing. 
Eczema.-S., Small water-blisters that may be very simple, 
attended with little inflammation or soreness, or there may be 
increased inflammation, redness, heat, swelling ; the vesicles 
break, run together, form scabs that run all over the face, cracks 
are formed that ooze serum and lymph, sometimes pus. 
Herpes.-<S., Blisters large and widely separated; when on 
the lips or face, called " fever blisters." One form of it appears 
mostly about the waist, the blisters appear on an inflamed sur- 
face, attended with intense itching and burning, sometimes with 
neuralgic pains; sometimes it appears in the form of circular 
patches, the blisters forming in rings; differing from ringworm 
in being more easily cured, and the parasite of ringworm absent. 
Bullae.-S., Large blisters, oval-shaped, from a half to 
several inches in diameter, and flat; may ulcerate, but only in 
vitiated or unhealthy constitutions. After the blisters mature 
they burst or dry up, leaving a thin brown scab. Another 
form is where the blisters are smaller, thicker; conical-shaped 
scabs appear after the blisters burst, that drop off and leave a 
small, red, angry, obstinate ulcer. This form is called rupia. 
Syphilitic rupia is very common. 
Ecthyma.-S., Large, round, prominent pustules that sup- 
purate, and end in thick dark scabs that drop off, leaving an 
ulcerative surface, that generally heals readily, but may become 
chronic. 
Impetigo.-S., Small, numerous pustules, commonly on the 
face, that may run together and scab. Crusta lactea is the 
name given by authors to this form of disease in nursing infants. 
Scaly Diseases.->S\, 1. Lepra, characterized by red, scaly 
patches of various sizes, especially on arms and legs, the mar- 
gin of the patches being the highest, reddest, and most scaly. 
2. Ichthyosis.-Syn., Fish-skin disease. Hard, thick, dry 
scales, without redness, soreness, or even itching, that may 
spread over the whole body. Incurable. 248 
APPENDIX. 
3. Pityriasis.-Syn., Dandruff. S., Small white scales form, 
especially on the scalp, with some irritation of the skin and a 
great deal of itching. 
4. Psoriasis.-C., Chronic eczema. 
5. Leprosy.-The Bible thus describes it: "A glossy, white, 
and spreading scale upon an elevated base; the elevation 
depressed in the middle, but without change of color, the 
black hair on the patches (which is the natural color of the 
hair in Palestine) participating in the whiteness, and the 
patches themselves perpetually widening their outline." 
Ephelis.-Sunburn, freckles, and yellowish-brown spots, 
called chloasma. 
Vitiligo.-Literally, veal-skin; unnatural whiteness from 
deficiency of coloring matter of the skin. Occurs in patches. 
When universal it is albinismus. 
Hypertrophia.-Morbidly developed skin or tissues ; con- 
nected with it are,- 
1. Naevus.-Moles and mother-mark. 
2. Verruca.-Warts. 
3. Clavus.-Corns. To name these is sufficient. 
Tuberculous Diseases of the Skin are,- 
Acne.-S., Inflammatory elevations around sebaceous folli- 
cles ; when simple they are small, red elevations or tubercles, 
with black points, principally on the face; may become pustular 
and reach suppuration, or may grow somewhat larger and sore 
and painful, with a red circle around the tubercle (acne rosacea) ; 
finally discharge bloody pus. 
Molluscum.-S., A non-inflammatory, colorless, contagious 
tubercle, appearing on face and neck, growing slowly to about 
the size of a currant. They last from three to six months, and 
finally shrink away or inflame and slough off. 
Lupus.-S., A small, soft, sore, slow tubercle, appears gener- 
ally on the cheek, that scabs and ulcerates indefinitely, leaving a 
white, seam-like scar; may spread, widen and deepen, involving 
all the tissues, even the bones. 
Purpura.-S., Round, red spots appear on the body, that 
gradually become dark or purple, and are caused by the extrava- APPENDIX. 
249 
sation of blood into the skin ; they finally grow green and yellow, 
and disappear like a bruise. In severe cases there may be fatal 
hemorrhages from any of the mucous surfaces. 
Prurigo.-S., Itching without eruption; there may be some- 
times a slight papular eruption accompanying it, but it is inci- 
dental and not peculiar to it. It may be general or local, and 
is named according to locality (as pruritus scroti, vulvae, ani, 
etc.). The irritation and itching may be so severe as to be 
almost maddening, the patient rubbing and tearing the skin 
until mind and body are exhausted without relief. 
Parasites.-Only such diseases as are undoubtedly parasitic 
will be referred to. 
Scabies or Itch.-V., While it is generally vesicular, it 
may be scaly, papular, or pustular; S., it usually manifests 
itself between the fingers on the back of the hand, sometimes 
on legs and arms, seldom on the face; intense itching is con- 
stant, and the only comfort to the patient is to scratch. The 
animalcule is " flat-bellied, round-backed, tortoise-shaped, eight- 
legged." 
Army Itch.-A troublesome and contagious skin disease, 
begotten in the unavoidable filth of camp-life. A very slight 
pimply eruption, attended, however, by intense itching. 
Favus.-S., A scalp disease, which manifests itself in the 
formation of yellow cup-shaped crusts that may run together 
and form a general scab. It is evidently contagious, and when 
severe discharges very offensive matter. 
Sycosis.-Syn., Barber's itch. S., Appearing only on the 
face, it presents slightly inflamed elevations about the roots 
of the hair, which on being cut off in shaving causes irritation, 
suppuration, and scabbing. The chin may become much 
swollen, and it may result in almost complete destruction of 
the beard. 
Tinea Circinatus.-Syn., Ringworm, Scalled head. Its 
usually circular form gives it its name; it occurs most frequently 
on head, face, and hands. S., a thin powdery crust, with here 
and there a minute vesicle; when on the head, results in the 
production of baldness in circular spots. 250 
APPENDIX. 
Poison-Vine Eruption.-C., contact with the common 
poison-vine and several other plants; S'., vesicular eruption, 
generally on face and hands, attended with considerable inflam- 
mation, and sometimes febrile symptoms. 
Frost-bite, Chilblain.-D., An erythematous inflamma- 
tion, caused by too suddenly warming feet or hands after being 
almost frozen. If actually frozen, extremities are liable to 
slough off. 
Bites of Animals.-When a person is bitten by a veno- 
mous serpent, or by a rabid dog or other animal, the wound 
if accessible, should be at once sucked strongly with the 
mouth, to extract the poison. Then wash it thoroughly with 
hot water. Apply a cupping-glass for some minutes. Cau- 
terize it with caustic potassa ; or, if practicable, excise the 
part bitten. Aqua ammonise is useful also as a local antidote 
for snake-poison, and for that of venomous insects; and so is 
fluid extract of serpentaria. 
MARSHALL HALL'S READY METHOD IN 
ASPHYXIA. 
1. Treat the patient instantly on the spot, in the open air, 
freely exposing the face, neck, and chest to the breeze, except 
in severe weather. 
2. In order to clear the throat, place the patient gently on 
the face, with one wrist under the forehead, that all fluid, and 
the tongue itself may fall forward, and leave the entrance into 
the windpipe free. 
3. To excite respiration, turn the patient slightly on his side, 
and apply some irritating or stimulating agent to the nostrils, 
as Veratrine, dilute Ammonia, etc. 
4. Make the face warm by brisk friction : then dash cold 
water upon it. 
5. If not successful, lose no time; but, to imitate respiration, 
place the patient on his face, and turn the body gently, but 
completely on the side, and a little beyond; then again on the 
face, and so on, alternately. Repeat these movements delib- 
erately and perseveringly fifteen times only in a minute. APPENDIX. 
251 
(When the patient lies on the thorax, this cavity is compressed 
by the weight of the body, and expiration takes place. When 
he is turned on the side, this pressure is removed and inspira- 
tion occurs.) 
6. When the prone position is resumed, make a uniform and 
efficient pressure along the spine, removing the pressure im- 
mediately, before rotation on the side. (The pressure augments 
the expiration ; the rotation commences inspiration.) Continue 
these measures. 
7. Rub the limbs upward, with firm pressure and with energy 
(the effect being to aid the return of venous blood to the heart). 
8. Substitute for the patient's wet clothing, if possible, such 
other covering as can be instantly procured, each bystander 
supplying a coat or cloak, etc. Meantime, and from time to 
time, to excite inspiration, let the surface of the body be slapped 
briskly with the hand. 
9. Rub the body briskly till it is dry and warm, then dash 
cold water upon it, and repeat the rubbing. 
Avoid the immediate removal of the patient, as it involves a 
dangerous loss of time,-also the use of bellows, or any forcing 
instrument, also, the warm bath, and all rough treatment. 252 
APPENDIX. 
POISONS AND THEIR ANTIDOTES. 
POISONS. 
ANTIDOTES. 
Acids. 
The Alkalies. Common soap (soft or hard), in solution, 
is an efficient remedy, and has the advantage of being al- 
ways at hand. It should be followed by copious draughts 
of tepid water or flaxseed tea. For nitric and oxalic acids, 
the carbonates of magnesia and lime (chalk and water) are 
the best antidotes. When sulphuric acid has been taken, 
the use of much water is improper. 
Alkalies and their 
The Vegetable Acids. Common vinegar being always at 
salts. 
hand, is most frequently used. The fixed oils, as castor, 
flaxseed, almond, and olive oils, form soap with the alkalies, 
and thus also destroy their caustic effect. They should be 
given in large quantity. 
Baryta and its 
Epsom or Glauber's Salt, in solution, or diluted sulphuric 
salts. Lime. 
acid. The fixed oils also have the same effect as with the 
alkalies proper, when these bases are uncombined. 
Iodine. Iodide of 
Starch, wheat flour, or arrow-root, in large quantities, 
well mixed with water. Let the patient diink freely of 
Potassium. 
starch, or wheat flour and water, and afterwards of a strong 
mixture of vinegar and water (any acid in which there is 
oxygen); when this is done, the whole process of saving the 
patient's life is accomplished, and it will only be necessary 
to evacuate the bowels. 
Cyanide of Potas- 
Chlorine water; solution of chlorinated soda; aqua am- 
sium and Prussic 
Acid. 
monia; cold affusion. 
Antimony and its 
Astringent infusions, as of galls, oak bark, Peruvian bark, 
salts. 
or green tea very strong. 
Arsenic and its 
Any oil or fat (sweet oil, butter, milk) ; magnesia in large 
compounds. 
quantity; hydrated oxide of iron (recently made), in table- 
spoonful doses, every 5 or 10 minutes. 
Bismuth and its 
Albumen. Copious draughts of milk, with sweet mu- 
compounds. 
cilaginous drinks. 
Copper and its 
Albumen, as milk or white of egg in solution, should be 
compounds. 
freely administered. Ferrocyanuret of potassium (freely). 
Vinegar must be avoided. 
Gold, salts of. 
Sulphate of iron, with a free use of mucilaginous drinks. 
Iron, salts of. 
Carbonate of soda, with mucilaginous drinks. 
Lead, salts of. 
Albumen ; sulphate of magnesia (Epsom salts); sulphate 
of soda (Glauber's salt) ; diluted sulphuric acid; lemonade ; 
opium. 
Mercury, 
Albumen, as white of egg, milk, or wheat flour beaten 
salts of. 
up with water; to be followed by an emetic. 
Silver, salts of. 
Common salt, freely, in solution. APPENDIX. 
253 
POISONS. 
ANTIDOTES. 
Tin, sails of. 
Albumen; white of egg; milk; or flour. 
Zinc, salts of. 
Albumen, or carbonate of soda, with copious draughts of 
warm water, aud especially milk. 
Phosphorus. 
Magnesia, with water and copious draughts of mucilagi- 
nous drinks. 
Gases. 
Ammonia, cautiously inhaled, is recommended for chlorine. 
Asphyxia, produced by noxious gases, must be treated by 
copious cold affusions, especially to the head; blood-letting ; 
artificial respiration; and stimulants carefully administered. 
Creosote. 
Albumen, or white of egg; milk; or wheat flour. 
Alcohol or spirit- 
uous liquors. 
A powerful emetic should be given, followed by copious 
draughts of warm water. Congestion of the brain, and 
other symptoms, are to be treated on general principles. 
Opium and other 
narcotics. 
The chief reliance is to be placed on the most active 
emetics (as mustard, alum, tartar emetic, or sulphate of zinc) 
and the stomach-pump. Emetics are preferable to the 
stomach-pump, when the narcotic has been taken in sub- 
stance. The patient should be kept in motion, and cold 
water dashed on the head and shoulders. Should the above 
means fail, the electro-magnetic battery, or if that cannot 
be obtained, artificial respiration must be resorted to. 
Strychnia. 
Emetics should be freely given. Kermes mineral; tannic 
acid; tincture of iodine; chlorine water; ether or chloro- 
form, by inhalation. If these means fail, Dr. Marshall 
Hall's ready method may be tried. 
Arnica. 
Vinegar. 
Aconite. 
Stimulants, externally and internally. 
Veratrum Viride. 
Laudanum; alcohol. 
"Take of Solution of Tersulphate of Iron, a pint; Water of Ammonia, 
Water, each, a sufficient quantity. To the solution of Tersulphate of Iron, 
previously mixed with three pints of Water, add Water of Ammonia with 
constant stirring, until in slight excess. Then pour the whole on a wet mus- 
lin strainer, wash the precipitate with water, pressing the strainer forcibly 
with the hands until no more liquid passes. Lastly, mix the precipitate with 
sufficient Water to bring the mixture to the measure of a pint and a half, and 
transfer it to a wide-mouthed bottle, which must be well stopped."-U. S. P. 
TO MAKE HYDRATED OXIDE OE IRON. 254 
APPENDIX. 
DIETETICS FOR THE SICK. 
Toast-Water.-Toast bread crust to a light brown on both 
sides; plunge into cold water. Keep cool. 
Barley-Water.-Cleanse some pearl barley thoroughly; 
add to it a little sugar and slice of lemon; pour over them some 
boiling water, and put in a covered vessel to cool. 
Barley Gruel.-Boil two ounces of pearl barley in half- 
pint of water ten minutes; pour off this water; then add 
three and a half pints boiling water, and reduce to half the 
quantity; then strain. 
Oatmeal Gruel.-Mix two tablespoonfuls of oatmeal with 
a little water; add gradually, while stirring, three-fourths of a 
pint of water or milk ; add a little lemon-peel and mace; stir 
it on the fire for fifteen minutes, then strain, and sweeten to 
taste. 
Ground Rice Milk.-Boil together two tablespoonfuls 
ground rice with a pint of milk for half an hour; add a little 
lemon-juice, and sweeten to taste. 
Bread Jelly.-Toast a thin slice of bread, or a roll sliced 
thin, to a pale brown on both sides. Put it in a quart of water, 
and let it simmer over the fire until it has become a jelly; then 
strain through a thin cloth, and add lemon-juice and sugar to 
taste. 
Iceland Moss.-Wash and bruise an ounce of the moss, 
and soak overnight; then add a quart of water, and boil it to 
one-half; strain through a sieve. To be taken with milk or fla- 
vored to taste. 
Apple Tapioca.-Pare, core, and quarter eight apples. Soak 
half a spoonful of tapioca overnight; then add to it a half tea- 
cupful of white sugar and a little lemon-peel, and simmer ten 
minutes; then put in the apples and stew ten minutes more. 
Tapioca Jelly.-Soak four tablespoonfuls of tapioca over- 
night ; mix with a pint of boiling water; simmer gently over 
a fire; when thick and clear add two tablespoonfuls of sugar, 
half tablespoonful of lemon-juice; turn into cups. 
Meat Jelly.-Take half-pound each of mutton, beef, veal, APPENDIX. 
255 
or pork, and a small slice of bacon ; add water enough to keep 
from burning; then let simmer in a covered vessel three or four 
hours, and strain. 
To make Arrow-Root.-Put a teaspoonful of arrow-root 
in a basin, and rub very smooth with a little cold water; then 
pour over it, stirring it all the time, a half-pint of boiling 
water or milk ; boil two or three minutes. 
Apple-Water.-Slice two large apples into a jar with 
cover, and add a pint of boiling water; cover close for an 
hour; then pour off the fluid, and sweeten. 
Apple-Tea.-Roast apples, and cover them with boiling 
water; sweeten with sugar; let stand an hour. 
Broth prom Fowls.-Take an old fowl, stew it to pieces 
with a couple of onions, season lightly, skim and strain it. 
Chicken Broth.-Cut up a young fowl, and stew with 
three pints pure water; skim well, and add a little salt; take 
two tablespoonfuls of pearl barley, wash it thoroughly, and 
add to the broth, also an ounce of marsh-mallow roots cut into 
shreds; then boil an hour, and strain. 
Mutton Broth.-Take one pound of scrag mutton, simmer 
gently with two pints of water and a little salt; strain through 
a sieve ; when cold remove all the fat. 
A Strong Broth.-One pound each of beef, veal, and scrag 
end of neck of mutton, a little salt, three quarts of water, a 
few whole peppers ; reduce to a quart. 
Nourishing Soup.-Boil two pounds of lean beef or veal 
with a quarter of a pound of pearl barley, a little fresh celery, 
with a little salt in a quart of water slowly, until it becomes 
the consistency of cream; strain through a fine hair sieve. 
Recipe for Beef-Tea.-Mince finely one pound of lean 
beef; put in a glass or earthen vessel, and pour upon it a pint 
of cold water; allow it to stand for half an hour; next place the 
vessel in a saucepan of water over a fire (if the vessel is glass, 
water must be cold), and let the water boil gently for an hour; 
strain through a coarse cloth. Sediment that strains through 
nutritive and to be used. ANNOUNCEMENT. 
Electro-therapy is the application of electricity 
to the treatment of disease. Metallo-therapy is 
the application of metals to that purpose, different 
metals having different properties. In electro- 
metallo-therapy we pass the electric current through 
different metals, and endeavor to obtain the good 
effects of both plans. On this theory the helices of 
my batteries are constructed and patented; and, 
being made of a combination of wires, varying in 
lengths and diameters, and of distinct and separate 
metals, will, by combining different coils into one 
or more circuits, produce different thermal results. 
Each graduation will therefore elicit its own definite 
physiological affinities.. 
Great experience in the use of these metals has 
enabled me to determine the exact proportions from 
which can be produced the best results in the cure 
of disease; and in the several grades of batteries of 
my own invention the coils and helices of copper, 
iron, brass, and silver are arranged for the most 
effective use. 
To meet the wants in a variety of conditions, I 
have also, after many practical experiments, prepared 
and patented a combination of metals, which, when 
properly proportioned and combined, and formed 
into magnets, produce a silent current of electricity 
when acted upon by the moisture and heat of the 
body. These magnets, being made neatly, of light, 
durable material, and embedded in appliances such 
as chest or lung protectors, shoulder-braces, abdomi- 
nal supporters, pads for the liver and stomach, electric 
256 A N NO UNCEMENT. 
257 
belts for the spine and kidneys, insoles for the shoes, 
etc., have done excellent relief-rendering service. 
The Electric Chest-Protector is made to cover 
the lungs, both in front and back, and is far superior 
to anything else in use for this purpose; prevents 
consumption, cold, etc. 
The Electric Shoulder-Brace is worn upon the 
back, and is adjustable to the size of the person. 
The Electric Abdominal Supporter is neatly 
made, very light, easily adjusted, and of great com- 
fort and use to the wearer. 
The Electric Belt is of great service and comfort 
to men, women, and youth who have much walking, 
standing, or lifting to do, as well as a sure cure for 
most Kidney Diseases and pains in the back. 
The Electric Liver-Pad, for morbid liver and 
indigestion, has no equal. 
The Electric Insoles are worn in the boots or 
shoes, the electric magnets next the feet, outside the 
stockings. When the circulation is very sluggish, 
they may be worn inside the stockings for a time. 
To insure perfect and continuous action, all persons 
using them should have two pairs, changing every 
week or fortnight so as to prevent the demagnet- 
izing. By thus alternating you always secure an 
electric action. 
Thousands of testimonials to the value of these 
Electric Appliances are in my possession ; but the 
very best estimate of their value will be to those 
who may be induced to use them. 
Dr. Elizabeth J. French, 
Care of Otto Flemming, 
1009 Arch Street. 
Philadelphia, Pa., 1885. 258 
INSTRUMENTS AND APPLIANCES. 
INSTRUMENTS AND ELECTRODES RE- 
FERRED TO IN THIS WORK. 
Vaginal. 
Cup-shaped 
for Mouthy 
of Wunib.l 
Ear Electrode. 
Ure- 
thral. 
Uterine and 
Rectal. 
Spinal. 
Eye Elec- 
trode. 
Electrolytic Needle, 
with Holder. INSTRUMENTS AND APPLIANCES. 
259 
INSTRUMENTS AND ELECTRODES REFERRED 
TO IN THIS WORK. 
Nasal Electrode. 
Laryngeal Electrode. 
Interrupting Handle. 
For Special Nerves. 
Large Sponge-Holder. 
Wire-Brush 
Electrode. 
Side Sponge-Cup. 
Spatula or 
Tongue Elec- 
trode. 
Sympathetic 
Nerve. 
Disks, Olives, Points, etc. 
Carbon 
Electrode, 260 
INSTRUMENTS AND APPLIANCES. 
DuBois-Raymond Coil, with Dr. E. J. French's Patented 
Helix Combinations for Office Use. 
(Devised by Otto Flemming.) 
This coil is provided with rapid and 
slow rheotomes or interrupters, with 
switch for circuiting the different 
helix-sections, and with governing 
screw for regulating the tension of 
currents ; its motive-power is derived, 
generally, from a Grenet Cell. The 
platform measures 5J by 15 inches, of 
polished walnut, with all metallic 
parts finely nickel-plated, and the 
whole presents a highly elegant and 
convenient instrument for office use. 
GRENET CELL. INSTRUMENTS AND APPLIANCES. 
261 
Thirty-Cell Portable Continuous Galvanic Current 
Battery. 
(Devised by Otto Flemming.) 
Thia form of Galvanic Battery is now acknowledged to be 
the most perfect ever manufactured, overcoming all the ob- 
jections that have heretofore been so justly urged against all 
the older forms. The different sizes of these batteries-ranging 
from 10 to 30 cells-are so made in sections of 10 cells each 
that any one section, or any number of cells, can be used inde- 
pendently of the others, or all conjointly. A recent invention 
to be used in connection with-from 10 to 15 cells of-this 
battery is the Electrolytic Needle with its holder, for removing 
superfluous hair from ladies' faces, as shown in cut on page 
258. 262 
INSTRUMENTS AND APPLIANCES. 
Flemming's Single-Cell Galvano-Cautery Battery 
for Minor Surgery. 
(Patented June 23, 1885.) 
This Cautery Battery may be furnished as a single-cell cautery 
for minor operations in the nose or throat, or as a compound 
battery to answer as a cautery, and by converting a commutator, 
as a 10-cell continuous galvanic battery. On the same principle 
Flemming's Double-Cell Cautery Battery is manufactured, pro- 
ducing a double amount of heat, which may be converted into 
a 20-cell continuous galvanic battery. ELECTRO-MAGNETIC 
BELTS, ABDOMINAL SUPPORTERS, 
CHEST-PROTECTORS, INSOLES, 
AND 
OTHER APPLIANCES FOR THE HUMAN BODY, 
INVENTED BY 
Dr. Elizabeth J. French, 
OF PHILADELPHIA, PA. 
This invention-the form and combination of metal magnets-is 
peculiarly adapted to various appliances to be worn on the human 
body, and for insoles, generating a silent, but constant, current of 
electricity, stimulating and equalizing the circulation, removing and 
preventing 
WEAKNESS, DEBILITY, PROLAPSUS, COUGHS, COLDS, 
DYSPEPSIA, RHEUMATISM, CRAMPS, COLD 
FEET, AND SIMILAR COMPLAINTS. 
The Insoles are but one-sixteenth of an inch in thickness, to be 
worn in the boots or shoes, and are invaluable to old or young, weak 
or strong. They are inexpensive, very effective, and will cure cold 
feet. As an experiment, they cost but fifty cents a pair; as an 
investment, they have no equal. They return the purchaser manifold 
in comfort and saving of doctor's bills, and the expense and incon- 
venience of disagreeable drugs. 
The Electro-Magnetic Chest-Protector not only supplies the 
place of all other chest-protectors, as a covering for the lungs, but 
imparts a magnetic warmth to the entire throat, lungs, and stomach. 
These Electro-Magnetic Appliances should usually be worn over 
one or more of the undergarments, especially in persons of a weak 
and sensitive organism, the electric current generated by the heat 
and moisture being, in many cases, too powerful when worn next to 
the body. 
These goods are the best, being lighter, neater, more serviceable, 
and therefore cheaper than any others in the market. 
A LIBERAL DISCOUNT TO AGENTS. 
Address all communications to 
ELIZABETH J. FRENCH, 
Or her authorized agent, 1 
, OTTO FLEMMING, 
1009 Arch Street, Philadelphia, Pa. PRICE-LIST 
OF 
ELIZABETH J. FRENCH'S 
PATENTED COMBINATION BATTERIES, ELECTRODES, AND 
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC APPLIANCES FOR 
THE HUMAN BODY. 
No. 1 Combination Battery, Complete $25.00 
"2 " " " 30.00 
"3 " " " 35.00 
" 4 " " with silver helix 55.00 
" 1 Set, Six Combination Electrodes 6.00 
" 2 " Seven " " 8.00 
" 3 " Eight " " 10.00 
APPLIANCES FOR THE HUMAN BODY CONTAINING THE 
PATENTED COMBINATION METAL MAGNETS. 
Abdominal Supporters $6.00 
Belts 3.00 
Liver-Pads 3.00 
Brace for the Shoulders and Back. No. 1 8.00 
« " " " « "2 9.00 
" " « " " "3 10.00 
Chest-Protector 2.00 
Insoles . 50 
Electric Complexion Powder. Per box 50 
" Hair Tonic. Per bottle 75 
Cocoanut Oil. Per bottle . . 1.00 
A LIBERAL DISCOUNT TO AGENTS. 
FOR SALE BY 
ELIZABETH J. FRENCH, 
Or her manufacturer and authorized agent, 
OTTO FLEMMING, 
1009 Arch Street, Philadelphia. ELECTRIC BAKING POWDER. 
WARRANTED THE MOST PERFECTLY PURE 
CHEMICAL COMPOUND EVER OF- 
FERED TO THE PUBLIC. 
The inventor of the Electric Baking Powder, Dr. ELIZABETH 
J. FRENCH, having for years made the SCIENCE of COOKING a 
practical study, has after a series of experiments, in which some of 
the most eminent chemists in America have assisted, succeeded in 
producing a Baking Powder not only harmless but beneficial to 
the human system and which restores to the flour the phosphates 
lost in grinding. 
The combination is so exactly proportioned that in the rising pro- 
cess each ingredient is so far neutralized by the other that not a 
trace of the compound remains after baking, in the delicious 
Bread, Biscuits, Rolls, Muffins, Waffles, Buckwheat and Griddle Cakes, 
Fritters, Potpies, Dumplings, Puddings, Sweet Cakes, and all varieties 
of Pastry; and the nutrition and sweetness of the flour is pre- 
served, without alkaline taste or odor. 
IT IS ANTI-DYSPEPTIC. 
It is infallible, convenient, wholesome, and invaluable to the 
economical housewife, as it requires but one quarter the shorten- 
ing, and but one half the eggs used in any other mode of cooking. 
The receipts on the labels are all from practical tests. The Electric 
Baking Powder will not lose its virtues by age or in any climate. 
After fifteen, years of CONSTANTLY INCREASING DEMAND we 
unhesitatingly pronounce it the BEST. 
All our agents are instructed to return the money in any case 
the Powder does not prove all we claim for it. 
ELECTRIC BAKING POWDER COMPANY, 
PHILADELPHIA, 
Pa. New Path in Electro-Therapeutics. 
BY ELIZABETH J. FRENCH, 
Author of a complete manual of "Electro-Therapeutics," "Alcohol, an Enemy," 
" Family Guide," etc. 
OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. 
'•A very neat little volume, entitled a 'New Path in Electrical Therapew- 
tics,' by Elizabeth J. French, and handsomely printed and published by J. B. 
Lippincott Company, Philadelphia. Its object is to describe and vindicate Mrs. 
French's great discovery of electrical cranial diagnosis, and a scientific appli- 
cation of nine different currents of electricity to the cure of disease. The style 
is clear, concise, and easy, showing that the heart of the authoress is in the sub- 
ject, and the authorities cited in support of her position are respectable and 
numerous."-The Press, Philadelphia. 
" The book is written in an easy, graceful style, and contains much of histori- 
cal and scientific information upon the subject of Therapeutics. It is also valu- 
able as a curiosity of scientific investigation."-The Commonwealth, Boston. 
"The work is written in an easy and comprehensive style, and is really 
curious and interesting."-Philadelphia Inquirer. 
" The author evidently has a very clear idea of her subject, and though her 
theory is rather astounding, still, being supported by such an eminent authority 
as Dr. Ferrier, and by a successful practice in cases described in the volume 
before us, can hardly fail to attract attention from the best scientific minds." - 
The Times and Messenger, New York. 
" The work is void of technicalities, anil givesa very lucid review of Anatomy, 
Hygiene, and Historical Medicine."-The Ohio Democrat. 
"The book contains a vast amount of very useful information on the subject 
of health, and should be read by all, and have a place in every family library " 
-Temperance Blessing, Philadelphia. 
"Dr. Ferrier, the London scientist, is somewhat late in making public his 
supposition that 'disease is mapped out on the brain, and may be diagnosed.' 
In a recent work on Electrical Therapeutics, by Elizabeth J. French, the scien- 
tific application of electricity reveals a new and wonderful phase in anthropol- 
ogy. ' It is many years since I discovered the hitman brain is a chart upon 
which may be found delineated all the organs of the human body, and a record 
of their exact conditions.' Our American lady should be sustained, and the 
laurels should be hers."-Port Wayne Sentinel. 
" Those who sneer at the idea of cranial diagnosis, as developed by Mrs. 
French, may perhaps have more faith in it. now that it has been adopted, not 
discovered, by a great English scientist."-Sunday Republic, Philadelphia. 
" In this starti ng treatise the lady proclaims that not only has she practised, 
but that she teaches, the science of diagnosing disease through the brain. The 
lady's claims are no bolder than she seems prepared to substantiate ; and just 
now comes the announcement that Dr. Ferrier, of King's College, London, Eng- 
land, is about to make public his experiments on the same subject. The lady 
has won the emoluments of fame by her early penetration, and whilst Dr. Fer- 
rier stands at the portal of discovery, Dr. French has almost perfected a grand 
sc ence. If this be charlatanism and humbuggery, let us seek to expose it by 
stern and rigorous investigation, but until then let her who has won wear the 
laurels."-Garrett County Gazette, Maryland. 
"Professor French in her new work gives a very full account of her great 
discovery respecting electrical cranial diagnosis and the scientific appTcation of 
nine different currents of electricity to the cure of disease. It gives a thorough 
system of hygiene, and one of the most consistent we ever read. However much 
may be said against her electrical panacea as an hallucination or otherwise, she 
has wrought wonderful cures in chronic ami physician-abandoned cases. Hap- 
pily, there is no check of potency to the progress of science."-Ohio Farmer.